JP2019165912A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of securing space.SOLUTION: A distribution member 19983 is journaled rotatably and its shaft member 988a (rotating shaft) is arranged along a width direction of a game board 13. Therefore, since a passage TR3 and a passage TR4 are arranged along a direction crossing the game board 13 (base plat e 19060), at least one portion of the passage TR3 and the passage TR4 can be arranged by utilizing space (namely, space in a front side and a rear side of the base plate 19060) in a fore-and-aft direction (in a direction crossing the game board 13 (base plate 19060) relatively having a space margin. Therefore, by miniaturizing a distribution unit 19980 in a width direction (a horizontal direction in front view), space for arranging other members can be secured correspondingly.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 161

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side A gaming machine including a sorting unit having a second passage that passes therethrough is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148189 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that space is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of securing a space.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 operates with the weight of a game ball, and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and the distribution member distributed to the one side. A sorting unit having a first path through which game balls pass and a second path through which the game balls distributed to the other side pass; and the sorting member is rotatably supported The rotating shaft is disposed along the width direction of the game board.

  A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising first detection means for detecting the gaming ball passing through the first passage, wherein the first passage is a displaceable region of the gaming ball. Magnifying means for magnifying the image is provided, and the magnifying means is disposed between the distributing member and the first detecting means.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, comprising a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the expanding means is formed by the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a space can be secured.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the occurrence of chattering can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the occurrence of chattering can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is sectional drawing of the window part movable unit in the XX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of a window part movable unit, (b) is a front view of a window part movable unit. (A) is a rear view of a window part movable unit, (b) is a front view of a window part movable unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a partial front view of an operation unit. It is a partial front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit, (b) is a front perspective view of the wing member and auxiliary member which show the meshing state of a wing member and an auxiliary member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a top view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the displacement relationship of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a base member. It is a top view of a plate-shaped displacement member. 7 is a front perspective view of a hollow member 740. FIG. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the XLIX-XLIX line | wire of FIG. 47, a plate-shaped displacement member, and a hollow member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a drive unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit in the LVa-LVa line | wire of FIG. 53, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit in the LVb-LVb line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the time-measurement change of conduction | electrical_connection of a left and right electromagnetic solenoid, and an attitude | position change of a plate-shaped displacement member. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the time-measurement change of conduction | electrical_connection of a left and right electromagnetic solenoid, and an attitude | position change of a plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of the 2nd operation unit. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXIII-LXIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXIII-LXIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXIII-LXIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXIII-LXIII line of Drawing 58. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rotational displacement of a large receiving part. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXVIII-LXVIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXVIII-LXVIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXVIII-LXVIII line of Drawing 58. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in a LXVIII-LXVIII line of Drawing 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit in the LXXII-LXXII line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the window part movable unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the displacement relationship of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the drive unit of the 2nd operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit of 5th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a base board, a prize opening unit, and a ball sending unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. (A) is a perspective front view of a prize opening unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member, (c) is a perspective front view of a displacement member. FIG. 88 is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in a range XCI in FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 88 is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in a range XCI in FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line | wire of FIG.93 (b). FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a specific prize opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific prize opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a specific prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the specific prize opening unit in the CII-CII line of FIG.99 (c). (A) And (b) is a perspective front view of a specific prize opening unit. (A) is a front view of a specific prize opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific prize opening unit along line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of a specific prize opening unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific prize opening unit and a drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of a drive unit. (A) is a front view of a pitching unit, (b) is a side view of a pitching unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a pitching unit, (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of a pitching unit. (A) is a front view of a distribution unit, (b) is a side view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXIIa-CXIIa line | wire of FIG. 109 (a), FIG.112 (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG.112 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range CXIII of FIG.112 (b). (A) is a front view of a channel | path unit, (b) is a side view of a channel | path unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of an exchange unit, (b) is a rear view of an exchange unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIXa-CXIXa line | wire of FIG. 119 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board along the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). 119 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board along the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and displacement member in a 7th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit and displacement member in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the back surface base and displacement member in 10th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the back surface base and displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in 12th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line | wire of Fig.129 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 13th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line | wire of Fig.130 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a top view of a drive unit, (c) is a perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) is sectional drawing of a game board, FIG.133 (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 15th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 16th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked back at the winning hole unit in 17th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning hole unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line | wire of Fig.135 (a). (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the winning opening unit from the back, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the winning port unit 930 along the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line in FIG. 136 (a). (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the winning slot unit from the back, and (b) is the cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning slot unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of the game board in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. (A) is a perspective front view of a prize opening unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of a front unit, (c) is sectional drawing of the front unit in the CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line | wire of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of a front unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of a distribution unit, (b) is a side view of a distribution unit. (A) is a perspective front view of a distribution unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) is a side view of the first side base in the direction of arrow CLIa in FIG. 149, (b) is a side view of the first side base in the direction of arrow CLIb in FIG. 149, (c) 149 is a side view of the second side surface base as viewed in the direction of arrow CLIc in FIG. 149, and (d) is a side view of the second side surface base in the direction of arrow CLId in FIG. FIG. 147 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along the line CLIIa-CLIIa in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CLIII-CLIII line of Fig.152 (a). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, (b) is a top view of the passage unit, (c) is a side view of the passage unit, and (d) is a side view of FIG. 154 (a). It is sectional drawing of the channel | path unit in a CLIVd-CLIVd line. (A) is a perspective front view of a passage unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLVIII-CLVIII line | wire of Fig.139 (a), (a) shows the closed state of a wing member, (b) shows the open state of a wing member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the closed state of the wing member, (b) is a side view of the winning port unit in the closed state of the wing member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the open state of the wing member, (b) is a side view of the winning port unit in the opened state of the wing member. FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a), where (a) illustrates a state in which the distribution member is disposed at the first position, and (b) illustrates the distribution member. Is shown in the second position. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line of FIG. 161, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line of FIG. 162 (a). It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in 19th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CXIIa-CXIIa line | wire of Fig.109 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 20th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 21st Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 22nd Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 23rd Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 24th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. 139 (a), In (a), the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position is illustrated (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 25th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 26th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 27th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 28th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 29th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a), (a) shows the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the 30th embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the winning port unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 31st Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 32nd Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the prize opening unit in 33rd Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) illustrates a state in which the distribution member is displaced forward while maintaining the posture (angle) disposed at the first position inside the bearing portion described later, and (c). The figure shows a state in which the distribution member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 34th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 35th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 36th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of Fig.139 (a), In (a), the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position is illustrated (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 37th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position. (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 38th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of FIG. 139 (a), In (a), the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position is illustrated (B) shows a state in which the sorting member is disposed at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the prize opening unit in 39th Embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of Fig.139 (a), and the state by which the distribution member was arrange | positioned in the 1st position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 40th Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line | wire of Fig.139 (a). (A) is a side view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)).

  The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and during short time, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for the wing member 945 (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 to be opened is changed, compared to normal A long time is set. When the wing member 945 is in the opened state (open state), the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 than when the wing member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in a short period of time, the wing member 945 associated with the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the wing member is per hit. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times 945 is opened more than usual. Also, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during probability change or time reduction, the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the wing member 945 opens per round At least one of them may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the wing member 945 associated with the second winning opening 140 and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 per time are not counted, only the probability of winning the second symbol. May be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is kept for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the wing member 945 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the ball to the second winning opening 140 is also changed during probability change or time reduction by increasing the probability of winning during probability change or time reduction, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the wing member 945 per time. When it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 140, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the second prize opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  A wing member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. The wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the change display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), And the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the wing member 945 is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for the wing member 945 to open is also longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have a wing member as in the second winning port 140, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the wing member attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140, so the wing member toward the first winning opening 64 without the wing member, The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery of lottery wins is obtained by winning the first winning opening 64, so that the big win The aim is more advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes the wing member 945 attached to the second prize opening 140 easy to open and easy to win the second prize opening 140. Then, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the wing member is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probable big hit by winning the second winning opening 140.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetric, so that it can be aimed at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or the second winning port 140 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving a wing member is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. In FIG. 6, the third symbol display device 81 is not shown.

  As described above, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. , The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, the pair of left and right window movable units 150, and the balls discharged from the game area It is configured by assembling a ball flow-down unit 290 or the like configured to be able to flow down, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of a plywood laminated with veneer plates, and the base plate is provided so that the player does not visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. 60 can be shielded.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 is drilled to pass electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67 in addition to the through hole drilled so that the variable display device unit 80 can be disposed at a substantially central position. A plurality (two in this embodiment) of small through-holes 60a provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b provided so as to be concavo-convexly fitted to the front end of the operation unit 300; A plurality of (two in the present embodiment) light transmission holes 60c are provided in the front and rear direction at the left and right lower portions.

  The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position where light irradiated from the operation unit 300 side can pass, and the effect of the game board 13 is improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. This will be described in detail.

  On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, flow surface constituting members 91 and 92 formed of a light-transmitting resin material are disposed, and the outer side portion 94 of the flow surface constituting members 91 and 92 is a light passage hole. The flow surface constituting members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner of covering the 60c.

  The left and right flow surface constituting members 91 and 92 are substantially symmetrical in shape except that the covering plate FB is disposed on the front side of the right flow surface constituting member 92. The member 91 will be described in detail, and the description of the right flow surface constituting member 92 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the flow-surface constituting member 91 has a plate-like portion disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a game area by a belt-like portion 93 formed in a belt-like shape having the same width as the inner rail 61. Is divided into a band-shaped portion 93, a game section partitioned by the belt-shaped portion 93, and an outer portion 94 that is an outer portion (outer portion in front view) of a game area partitioned by the band-shaped portion 93. And an inner portion 95 that is an inner portion of the region (a front-view inner portion).

  As described above, since the outer portion 94 is outside the game area, the outer portion 94 is configured as a portion that hardly affects the flow of the ball. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consider the influence on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

  Further, as a result of designing the outer portion 94 to be thin, even if the inner portion 95 is made thinner, the base plate 60 is disposed on the back side of the inner portion 95, so that the rigidity of the base plate 60 is increased. Can be used to suppress displacement in the front-rear direction of the inner portion 95 (deformation in the thickness direction). Furthermore, by designing the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to be thin, it is possible to sufficiently secure the front-rear width of the game area.

  In this way, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the function required for the inner portion 95. As a result, the light irradiated from the operation unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. The player can easily make the player visually recognize via the outer portion 94.

  In the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light irradiated from the back side through the thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) is formed as in the present embodiment, and the light emitting means is arranged on the back side thereof, so that the base plate 60 is made of a wooden plate member, while the base plate 60 is formed. The brightness visually recognized through the can be easily changed.

  For example, in the case of forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized so as to be continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions in front view, the decorative portion 770 is disposed on the electric circuit board 777 disposed on the back side of the outer portion 94. By changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means 778 in a plurality of types and changing the brightness of the outer portion 94, it is possible to change the appearance of the same decorative pattern into a plurality of types.

  Further, for example, a decorative member that changes a visible pattern according to the light emission mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer side portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed by the light emission mode of the light emission means 778.

  In addition, the aspect of the decoration member which changes the pattern visually recognizable with a light emission aspect is not limited at all. For example, it may be a member that is designed so that a different pattern can be visually recognized depending on an angle to which light is applied, such as an illumination plate. Further, for example, on the premise that a pattern is drawn in a plurality of colors and a plurality of colors of light to be irradiated are prepared, a member that is designed to change a visually recognized pattern by changing a light emission color may be used. .

  As described above, the inner portion 95 is disposed inside the game area. If the inner portion 95 is displaced (deformed), there is a possibility that the ball flowing down the game area may be affected. In this embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95. (Because the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer portion 94 side with respect to the belt-like portion 93 in a front view), the displacement of the inner portion 95 (using the rigidity of the base plate 60) Deformation). Thereby, the flow of the sphere can be stabilized.

  A general winning port 63 is disposed in the inner portion 95, and the general winning port 63 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow lower surface constituting member 91 is a front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed by fixing with a tapping screw or the like from the side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window movable unit 150 is provided at the upper left and right corners of the center frame 86. Is arranged.

  FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 7, the lower portion of the game board 13 is not shown, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and shown in a front perspective view.

  The window movable unit 150 is configured to be rotationally displaceable. The displacement member 151 is configured to be visible to the player in the window inside the center frame 86. The displacement member 151 is disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. And an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force for driving 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

  The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape when viewed in the front-rear direction, and is provided with a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end portion that is formed in the vicinity of the bent portion, and is disposed at both distal ends of the bifurcated portion 152 and the back side is opened. A distal end portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape), and an overhang portion 154 projecting radially from the proximal end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

  The front end portion 153 is formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side, and is fastened to the opening portion side of the effect portion 153a. A ring-shaped portion that is fixed, and includes a ring-shaped portion 153b that has a shape in which the opposite side of the rendering portion 153a is narrower than the rendering portion 153a.

  The effect part 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner side surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated from the back side to the inside of the open part, so the actually irradiated light is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated, the player who visually recognizes the effect part 153a from the front side can be made to visually recognize that the entire effect part 153a is shining (lightly).

  The overhanging portion 154 has a displaceable range in both directions of rotation defined by a pair of claw portions 86a protruding from the center frame 86 side. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be capable of rotational displacement at an angle (an angle less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the overhang portion 154.

  FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 disposed at a position where it can contact the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal whose one end (front end) is connected to the contact member 161 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Made of brass (in this embodiment, made of brass), a driven member 163 that is connected to the other end (rear side end) of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 in a relatively non-rotatable manner, and the transmission shaft rod portion A known E-ring 164 fitted to both ends of the 162 from the radial direction and a transmission shaft bar portion 162 are configured to be pivotally supported, and the support case 170 is configured in a case shape as a whole, and is disposed inside the support case 170. And an electric decoration board 180 to be provided.

  The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a cylindrical member whose outer shape in the axial direction (front-rear direction) of the middle abdomen is a perfect circle, and is cut into a planar shape from a predetermined radial direction at both ends. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. The both end portions are engaged with the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, so that the contact member 161, the transmission shaft bar portion 162, and the driven member 163 are relative to each other. Non-rotatable (integral) connection.

  The contact member 161 is made of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a base end portion 161a in which a through hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. And an arm portion 161c extending outward from the base end portion 161a and configured in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front.

  The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a base end portion 163a in which a through hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. The arm portion 163c extends straightly toward the outside of the base end portion 161a and has a substantially flat plate shape.

  On the upper surface of the driven member 163, a metal (magnetic body) metal plate member MB1 is disposed. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engagement with the elastic claw 163d.

  Specifically, rail portions for guiding the front and rear slide of the metal plate member MB1 are disposed at both ends in the radial direction of the arm portion 163c, and the rail portions can guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. It is formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claws 163d are pushed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is placed on the rear side wall of the rail portion. The sliding is regulated by hitting, and at this position, the pressing of the elastic claw 163d by the metal plate member MB1 is released (up to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is metal. The plate member MB1 is engaged so as to restrict the retraction of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

  The method for fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be clamped with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

  The support case 170 is arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B, a middle member 170M formed on the front side of the rear member 170B and formed with a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and the middle member 170M. And a front member 170F on which a decorative shape (wave pattern) is formed on the front side, and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of plate-like members are stacked in front and back and fastened and fixed.

  The electrical decoration board 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape in front view according to the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like disposed at positions designed in consideration of effects. The light emitting means 181, a connector 182 disposed as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 that are formed in the electric decoration substrate 180 for assembly.

  The light emitting unit 181 includes a strong light emitting unit 181a disposed inside the light transmitting hole 177 in a front view, and a weak light emitting unit disposed outside the light transmitting hole 177 (disposed facing the rear surface of the front member 170F). 181b.

  The through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the inclined direction. Thereby, the assembly | attachment of the through-hole 183 with respect to the protruding cylindrical part 172 formed in a perfect circle shape by front view can be made easy.

  That is, while the posture of the electric decoration board 180 is inclined (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not inclined (the front-rear direction), so that it is compared with the case where the electric decoration board 180 is assembled in the same direction. Assembling failure (not assembled or loosened) is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the electrical decoration substrate 180 is inclined. The margin of the through hole 183 along the inclined direction can be increased, and the assembly of the through hole 183 with respect to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 can be facilitated.

  The electrical decoration board 180 is accommodated between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M. At this time, the electrical decoration board 180 has a posture in which the front of the plate faces obliquely downward (the normal line tilts downward on the front side). Is done. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 taken along line XX of FIG. For ease of understanding, the illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is indicated by an imaginary line. The XX line is arranged so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding cylindrical portion 172. In the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 are referred to as appropriate.

  The aspect of the wall-like part on the front side of the middle member 170M is different between the upper wall-like part 170MU and the lower wall-like part 170MD. That is, the upper side wall portion 170MU is configured as a non-inclined (normal line is directed in the horizontal direction) wall portion, and the lower side wall portion 170MD is inclined (the normal line is directed downward on the front side). Configured as

  Thus, with respect to the wall-like part having different normal lines, the electric decoration board 180 is supported such that the back surface of the board is in a posture along the lower wall-like part 170MD (an attitude in which the normal line is inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the electrical decoration substrate 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

  The intermediate member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting columnar portions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion. 172 and wiring through-holes 173 formed in the front-rear direction so as to surround the connector 182 at the left and right outer (left) corners.

  The projecting frame portion 171 seals over the periphery of the electrical decoration substrate 180 by contacting the outer frame portion of the front member 170F in the front-rear direction. Thereby, it can avoid that the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 is visually recognized from between the front member 170F and the intermediate member 170M, and it can prevent that light leak arises from the same position.

  The protruding cylindrical portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion further protruding from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion is inserted into the through hole 183 of the electrical decoration substrate 180. Thus, the back surface of the electric decoration board 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the electric decoration board 180 can be stabilized.

  Here, the seat portion of the projecting columnar portion 172 disposed on the upper wall portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the projecting columnar portion 172 disposed on the lower wall portion 170MD. Thereby, while being able to support stably the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 assembled | attached with the above-mentioned inclination attitude | position, a space | gap can be ensured between the upper side wall-shaped part 170MU and the electrical decoration board | substrate 180. FIG.

  The projecting tip of the seat portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured such that the projecting length decreases as it goes downward) in accordance with the posture of the electrical decoration substrate 180. . Thereby, not only the function which stabilizes arrangement | positioning of the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 but the function which stabilizes the attitude | position of the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 can be provided to the protruding cylindrical part 172.

  The wiring through-hole 173 is a through-hole for passing an electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the electrical decoration board 180. Since the posture of the electric decoration board 180 can be maintained by a load applied to the electric decoration board 180 through the electric wiring, the posture of the electric decoration board 180 is stably supported without fastening and fixing the electric decoration board 180. can do.

  The front member 170F is formed from a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-transmitting resin material in a shape in which the back side surface is substantially parallel to the lower side wall portion 170MD, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A left-right direction view L connecting the plurality of light transmission holes 177, the plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the back surface, and the frame portion forming the outer periphery of the plate back surface. And an L-shaped support portion 179 having a letter shape.

  The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 in front view. Thereby, the aspect visually recognized from the front side of the front member 170F changes in the light emission means 181 arrange | positioned in the back side of the light transmissive hole 177, and the light emission means 181 other than that. In other words, the inner side of the light transmission hole 177 can be visually recognized as more intensely emitted than other portions.

  A plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 are formed with substantially the same protruding length. As a result, while the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the electric decoration board 180 is made uniform over the entire arrangement range of the electric decoration board 180, the inclined electric decoration board 180 is surface-supported at a plurality of positions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the electric decoration substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom of arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness of the light emitting mode.

  That is, since the electric board 180 is inclined so that the front of the board faces downward on the front side, it is preferable to support the board from the front side in order to maintain the attitude, but a large-area support portion is provided at one place. When the electric decoration board 180 is supported, there is a tendency that the arrangement area of the light emitting means 181 arranged on the front side of the electric decoration board 180 is easily limited. If the area of the support portion is reduced by giving priority to the area where the light emitting means 181 can be arranged, the posture of the electric decoration board 180 is collapsed, and the interval between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the electric decoration board 180 is arranged. There is a risk that variations in the range are likely to occur, and unevenness in the light emission mode is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter projecting columnar portions 178 having the same projecting height are provided so that the front surface of the electric decoration substrate 180 can be simultaneously supported at a plurality of points. Therefore, a plurality of protruding columnar portions 178 that support the electric decoration substrate 180 can be disposed at a plurality of small gap positions generated between adjacent light emitting means 181. Thereby, the stability of the support of the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 can be improved, maintaining the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the light emission means 181 and suppressing the nonuniformity of a light emission mode.

  The L-shaped support portion 179 is disposed to face the upper surface and the front surface of the electric decoration board 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the electric decoration board 180. That is, the lower part of the L-shaped support portion 179 that faces the front surface of the electric decoration board 180 is supported and supported by the electric decoration board 180 from falling forward due to its own weight.

  In addition, the rear portion of the L-shaped support part 179 and the electrical decoration substrate 180 that are disposed to face the plate upper surface of the electrical decoration substrate 180 are normally arranged with a gap therebetween while loosely supporting the electrical decoration substrate 180, The vertical displacement of the illumination board 180 can be suppressed to a minimum.

  A support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is also formed on the front side of the lower side wall portion 170MD of the middle member 170M (formed at two positions on the left and right sides), and the lower surface of the electrical decoration substrate 180 In addition, it is disposed opposite to the back surface and functions to suppress displacement of the electric decoration board 180. In other words, in the present embodiment, the L-shaped support portions disposed above and below the electric decoration substrate 180 are configured to suppress the displacement of the electric decoration substrate 180 in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the electrical decoration board 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, and is supported stably by being sandwiched and supported by the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and rear. Yes. For example, if the middle member 170M and the electric decoration board 180 are fastened and fixed and configured as a single rigid body, the electric decoration board 180 may vibrate under the influence of vibration generated in the middle member 170M. This is a measure that takes this into account.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illumination board 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if vibration occurs in the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, It is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the electric decoration board 180 independently.

  Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the middle member 170M is likely to cause vibration of the middle member 170M. However, in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 has an upper wall shape. It is arrange | positioned on the opposite side (back side) of the electrical decoration board | substrate 180 on both sides of the clearance gap produced in the front side of the part 170MU.

  With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the electric decoration board 180 through the small-diameter projecting cylindrical portion 172. Therefore, the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is mitigated by the deformation of the projecting cylindrical portion 172. It is possible to suppress vibrations from being transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent vibration from being directly transmitted from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 serving as the vibration source to the electric decoration board 180.

  The intermediate member 170M has a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and is formed in the front-rear direction so as to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. A lower restricting portion 175 disposed and an upper restricting portion 176 disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 are provided.

  The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) The metal plate member MB1 is adsorbed and displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, as the metal plate member MB1 is displaced between an ascending position arranged as a result of being raised by electromagnetic force and a lowered position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and lowered due to its own weight. The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are rotationally displaced. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

  FIG. 11A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11B is a front view of the window movable unit 150. FIG. 12A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12B is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

  11 (a) and 11 (b) illustrate a state in which no electric power is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state of the lowered position). FIGS. 12A and 12B show a state where the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by the electromagnetic force generated when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 (the state of the raised position).

  11A and 12A, the rear member 170B is not shown for ease of understanding, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is omitted in FIGS. 11B and 12B. The shape of the open part on the back side is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 12A, the driven member 163 comes into contact with a cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower regulating portion 175 at the lowered position, and the descending displacement is regulated and lifted. At the position, the ascending displacement is restricted by contacting the cushion part 176a attached to the lower surface of the upper restricting part 176.

  The material of the cushion portions 175a and 176a is not limited at all. For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane, and epoxy resin, and rubber materials may be used. Further, the cushion portions 175a and 176a may be made of the same material or different materials.

  Here, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are configured to have different arrangements (distances from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with respect to the transmission shaft rod portion 162. Regarding the effects caused thereby. explain.

  First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is a load mainly generated by the weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. It can be supported stably. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 175 is disposed at the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (approximately the center position of the arm length).

  On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper restricting portion 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load caused by a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the arrangement of the upper restricting member 176 is changed to the driven member 163. There are few advantages associated with the center of gravity position. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the driven member 163 is reduced by disposing the upper regulating member 176 so as to oppose the rotational tip of the driven member 163.

  That is, when the same moment of force is generated, the position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is long) is transmitted via the driven member 163. Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

  As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotating front end portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in this embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion). And shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). Thereby, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and to stably generate the load transmission at the rotating tip.

  Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated at the raised position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 will rebound after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

  On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion part 175a of the lower regulating part 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion part 176a), the area of the surface that receives the load can be increased. The pressure (stress) generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the weight of the driving member 163 can be reduced. Thereby, the rebound (bound) of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion part 175a can be suppressed.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the driven member 163 while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a via the driven member 163 during the displacement in both the upper and lower directions.

  Below the upper restricting portion 176, a protruding portion 176b that protrudes in a curved shape on the back side of the middle member 170M is formed. The projecting portion 176b is disposed to face the rotating front end portion of the driven member 163. When the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the contact with the driven member 163 is suppressed in a small area, and the driven member 163 is pressed. Guiding the rotation of

  As shown in FIGS. 11B and 12B, the distal end portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmission hole 177 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player through the tip portion 153.

  As described above, the internal shape of the effect portion 153a allows the player who visually recognizes the effect portion 153a from the front side to be visually recognized as if the entire effect portion 153a is shining (lightly). Even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced while the actual arrangement of the means 181a is not changed, it is possible to suppress the change in the light emission mode of the effect part 153a.

  In other words, since the player can visually recognize the light that is visually recognized through the effect unit 153a as being displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect unit 153a, an LED or the like is provided inside the effect unit 153a. The light emitting means is provided, and an illusion can be given as if it is displaced in synchronism with the displacement of the effect part 153a.

  On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b disposed on the electric decoration board 180 is adopted while adopting the arrangement fixed electric decoration board 180. It can be visually recognized as if it emits light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a similarly disposed on the electric decoration substrate 180 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light while being displaced.

  As a result, by adopting a plurality of lighting boards, the first board is fixedly arranged, and the second board is configured to be displaceable. It can be realized by using a decorative substrate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of illumination boards while producing the same effect.

  Returning to FIG. The operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed therein.

  FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a back case 310 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from an outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

  The back case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The operation unit 300 is disposed in the inner space of the back case 310 so that the movable device can be displaced along a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and the left and right sides of the opening 311a. The left and right effect units 600 that perform the above and the like, and the second operation unit 700 disposed below the opening 311a are accommodated, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the first operation unit 400 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 at a position above the opening 311a, and the second operation unit 700 is disposed at a position below the opening 311a. FIG. 5 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are attached to the back case 310.

  The back case 310 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall 312 and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A supporting plate portion 313 is provided.

  The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 and a positioning convex portion 313 a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted to the fitting recess 60 b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. And a plurality of insertion holes 313b that are pierced through the fastening screws.

  The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a to the fitting concave portion 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be fixed integrally, so that the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the fitting concave portion 60b (in this embodiment, circular or oval) may be used, and the fitting gap may be increased in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (further outer shape) may be used. In addition, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion 60b is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion 313a has a rectangular shape corresponding to the inner shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in the present embodiment, a large number of support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left and upper sides of the back case 310, and the formation of the support plate portions 313 is reduced on the right and lower sides. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of a balance between improvement in rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and space efficiency.

  That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of a plywood laminated with a plywood board as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base board 60. Therefore, the entire back side of the area where the opening can be formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (the concave formation from the side surface) is effective as an effect area where the movable member is disposed so as to be visible.

  On the other hand, in the place where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the inner space of the back case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in the front view. The area | region which can be arrange | positioned will become narrow. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

  In the present embodiment, the large number of support plate portions 313 provided on the left and upper sides of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the ball launched into the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a place other than the range where the fired sphere is visible.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 so as to pass through the game area. After that, it is configured to flow down the game area. In the ball game, the place where the most attention is likely to be gathered is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 in between ) Is usually low.

  Therefore, as a range where the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left with respect to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right with respect to the upward convex arc It is thought that the player's attention to the will be low.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the outer edge member 73 described above and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 on the lower left and upper left with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed along the outer rail 62 and disposed on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material. The game board 13 is composed of a plywood board that hardly transmits light in the first place, and an outer edge member 73 from the front side of the game board 13. In addition, the back side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized through the block-shaped member 74.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially disposed at a place where these attentions are low or a place where it cannot be visually recognized. In fact, the support plate portion 313 is also formed near the corner of the back case 310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62, even in the left side portion and the upper side portion where the support plate portion 313 is often formed. Is done.

  In other words, by selecting a location where space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from a location with low visibility (low performance capability), the rigidity of the motion unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole is selected. While achieving the effect of ensuring, it is possible to ensure a high degree of freedom in designing the area that enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

  From this point of view, there is a common configuration in pachinko machines that rolls the ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a along the outer rail 62 and introduces it into the game area. It can be easily disposed in the upper and right parts.

  A substantially lower half of the right outer wall 312 includes a notch 312 a that is notched (notched) toward the back side. The notch 312a is notched below the belt-like portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in a front view, and a gap is formed between the notch 312a and the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). Form.

  By forming the notch 312a in this way, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable prize device 65 passes outside the back case 310. Thereby, compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down, the possibility that the electrical wiring interferes with other components can be reduced.

  Further, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space of a configuration required for the variable winning device 65. The configuration required for the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid for generating a driving force, a flow path for flowing a sphere, a substrate accompanying a light emitting effect, a detection sensor for detecting a sphere, and other structures. Is exemplified.

  Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch 312a, it is possible to make a player easily recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (when the boundary of the light irradiated from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). Thus, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be made ambiguous. Thereby, it can avoid that the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board 13 depends on the shape of the back case 310, and the freedom degree of light emission effect can be improved.

  Furthermore, the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as LED is operated through the notch portion 312a as compared with the case where the electric wiring is arranged so as to go out of the operation unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13. The configuration as in the present embodiment that goes out of the unit 300 can reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring blocks light emitted from the LED.

  That is, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electrical wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED by allowing the electrical wiring to exit to the outside of the operation unit 300 without turning to the front side of the LED. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design of effects by light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs.

  In addition, the formation length (vertical direction length) of the notch part 312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch 312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the fastening with the game board 13 is omitted at the right side portion of the back case 310, the rigidity at the right side portion of the game board 13 is considered when relying on the rigidity of the operation unit 300. I can't.

  As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. Hereinafter, the metal plate member 75 will be described.

  14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate member 75. FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate member 75. 14 and 15, the game board 13 is shown as a single unit and other members provided on the game board 13 are not shown for easy understanding.

  The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arc wall portion 73a that forms an upper side and an inner side surface having an arc shape, and extends in a thin wall shape downward from a lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. A vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. Thus, by configuring the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 is formed of a plurality of members that are divided vertically. Assembling steps to the game board 13 can be reduced.

  The vertical wall portion 73b is bent and formed in a U-shape in a vertical view from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion and a plurality of plate-shaped protrusion portions 73b1 protruding in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion. A plurality of bent portions 73b2, a columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side at the joint portion of the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and the columnar projecting portion 73b3. And a fastening portion 73b4 formed so as to be screwable.

  The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. Thereby, in relation to the metal plate member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 against the vertical wall portion 73b while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. Can be improved.

  In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like projecting portions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 of the metal plate-like member 75. Since a resistance force against bending can be generated, a load generated at one place can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly assigned. An excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

  The metal plate-like member 75 is folded back to the left at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a and the main body plate portion 75a formed with no folds in the longitudinal direction, while the short side direction is folded a plurality of times. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the joints between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a, and the bent portion 75b, and are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. Through-hole 75d, and an insertion hole 75e that is provided in the plate portion provided with the through-hole 75d and stepped to the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

  The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way of folding the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, the vertical wall part 73b can be efficiently reinforced by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall part 73b that is easily bent in the longitudinal direction.

  The joint penetration part 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like projecting part 73b1 of the vertical wall part 73b to be inserted. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 through the joint penetration portion 75c.

  When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and the cylindrical projection is provided. The portion 73b3 is inserted through the through hole 75d. As described above, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned with respect to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

  From the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed over the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and their front end portions engage with the game board 13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board 13 will be described.

  The game board 13 receives a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed so as to receive the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and the cylindrical protruding portions 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portions 13e. And a plurality of positioning holes 13f formed to be recessed as possible.

  When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are integrated with the game board 13, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73 b 1 and the circular projecting portion 73 b 3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 73b with sufficient rigidity, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily bent in the left-right direction by itself.

  Furthermore, since the deformation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 (the rigidity can be improved), even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 The shape can be maintained.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. A first operation unit 400 is disposed on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 of the operation unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is a device that visually amuses the player by controlling the displacement to synchronize or controlling the displacement to synchronize with the operation of the frame button 22 that the player can operate. Details of the first operation unit 400 will be described below.

  16 and 17 are partial front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 16 illustrates a retracted state in which the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are retracted to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 17, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are 3 shows an overhanging state that projects (lowers) to the symbol display device 81 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the back case 310 is not made symmetrical. In particular, regarding the upper side wall (ceiling surface), the right side of the front view is lower than the left side of the front view due to the relationship with the shape of the tank 130 of the dispensing unit 93 (see FIG. 3). That is, when the tank 130 is disposed on the upper right side of the operation unit 300, the upper side wall of the rear case 310 is disposed at a position where the right side is lowered as compared with the left side in order to secure the arrangement region. (It is arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

  As described above, in the inner side of the back case 310, it is easy to secure a larger area on the left side compared to the right side (the ceiling height has a margin). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring are provided. An auxiliary device that does not directly affect the appearance of the effect such as SP1 (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) is arranged on the left side.

  Accordingly, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be disposed by effectively using the depression (gap portion) generated by the left-right asymmetric shape of the upper wall of the back case 310, and the lower edge of the first operation unit 400 is formed in a left-right symmetric shape. However, since it can be moved upward as much as possible, it is possible to easily ensure a large vertical dimension in the visual recognition area of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the shape of the wing member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 in accordance with the left-right asymmetric shape of the upper wall of the back case 310. The shape of the side facing the upper wall of the back case 310 is designed. That is, the left wing-like member 460 is designed to project to the upper wall side of the back case 310 as compared with the right wing-like member 460.

  Note that the wing-like member 460 is configured to be united and visually recognized as the state of the first operation unit 400 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, and is designed to have a bilaterally symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the left and right wing-like members 460 have an asymmetric shape.

  In the present embodiment, when the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state, the asymmetrical portion of the wing member 460 (the upper side that comes into contact with the wing member 460) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). It can be made difficult for the player to notice that the shaped member 460 has an asymmetric shape.

  18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first motion unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21 are rear perspective views of the first motion unit 400. FIG. 18 and 20 illustrate the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 illustrate the extended state of the first operation unit 400.

  In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates through a plurality of gears interposed therebetween, and the lift plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotation.

  The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal metal rail 405 that is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction and configured to be vertically extendable and an auxiliary arm member 444 that is disposed on the opposite side of the arm member 414. The

  The lift plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is relatively displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and is rotated symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. The plurality of wing-like members 460 to be displaced are displaced.

  Accordingly, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement mode in which the raising and lowering and the rotation are combined with the driving of the drive motor MT1. Thereby, although only the single drive motor MT1 is used, the constituent members can be displaced in a plurality of directions, so that the effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper end position portion of the arc upper gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to protrude upward from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430. The In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It can be made difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is overhanging.

  On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward movement of the lifting plate 430 from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the upper arm of the lifting plate 430 in the retracted state. Further, the arcuate gear portion 444b projecting upward (see FIG. 27) is displaced downward as the elevating plate 430 is lowered, and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

  In this way, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the lifting plate 430 at a location shielded by the base plate 60 in terms of arrangement, and the lifting plate 430 is not shielded by the base plate 60. The auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be displaced so as to hide the overhang on the back side of the lifting plate 430 until it is displaced, so that the auxiliary arm member 444 is always hidden on the back side of the lifting plate 430. Compared to the case, the design freedom of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the lifting plate 430 can be improved.

  For example, since the upper edge portion of the lifting plate 430 can be disposed on the lower side, it is possible to easily avoid interference between the upper edge portion of the lifting plate 430 and the outer wall portion 312 on the upper side of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be rotationally displaced, so that the rack gear-like portion (the portion having the gear teeth formed along a straight line) is kept protruding from the third symbol display device 81 side. The length of the lifting plate 430 protruding to the third symbol display device 81 side can be sufficiently secured.

  That is, even if a fixed rack gear-like portion is formed on the lifting plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and meshed with the rotary gear 441, the fixed lifting gear 430 is moved relative to the lifting plate 430 with the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430. Although the relative displacement member 442 can be displaced up and down, in this case, it is necessary to always dispose a fixed rack gear portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is disposed. Therefore, when a configuration in which most of the lifting plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 like the lifting plate 430 of the present embodiment is used, the fixed rack gear-like portion is used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401. It was necessary to project from the 3rd symbol display device 81 side.

  Therefore, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is shielded by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, so that the visibility of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is deteriorated, or the rack gear is moved by the lifting plate 430 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400. For the purpose of hiding the shape portion, there is a possibility that a problem such as a decrease in the degree of freedom in design of the lifting plate 430 may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is employed instead of the fixed rack gear-like portion, it is hidden (hidden) on the back side in accordance with the displacement of the lifting plate 430. A) an auxiliary arm member 444 may be disposed. Therefore, the protruding length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 to the third symbol display device 81 side is sufficiently set while avoiding the situation in which the rack gear-like portion is kept protruding from the third symbol display device 81 side. Can be secured.

  FIGS. 22A and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 22B shows the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member showing the meshing state of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. FIG. 24 is a front perspective view of the member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are exploded rear perspective views of the first operation unit 400. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the first operation unit 400 is formed in the shape of a long plate from the resin material to the left and right, and the bottom of the back case 310 (see FIG. 16). The main body plate portion 401 fastened and fixed to the wall portion 311, the transmission unit 410 composed of a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate portion 401, and the distal end of the arm member 414 of the transmission unit 410 A rear plate 420 that is composed of a plurality of plate-like portions arranged on the same plane including the connecting plate portion 421, and is arranged on the front side of the rear plate 420, and the rear plate 420 is fastened and fixed. And a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevation plate 430 and the receiving plate portion 425 of the rear surface arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).

  In addition, the first operation unit 400 is a plate-like support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the lifting plate 430, and is rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. A pair of left and right wing members 460 that rotate and displace with a load given by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490, and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates in synchronization with the wing members 460 (FIG. 22A, FIG. 22). b) and FIG. 24).

  The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft support portion 402 that pivotally supports the transmission gear 412, an end support portion 403 that is disposed at the lower right portion thereof and supports the end gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 which is disposed at the center of the left and right sides and whose back side is fixed so that the front side can be displaced vertically, and is formed as a left and right long opening on the right side of the metal rail 405. A long hole portion 406, a lid portion 407 that is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and covers the region where the long hole portion 406 is formed, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state Is provided.

  The end support portion 403 includes a shaft support portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft support portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b that protrudes along a circle centered on the shaft support portion 403a, and an annular shape thereof. A stopper portion 403c is provided that protrudes in a fan shape on the front side at a position between the protrusion 403b and the shaft support 403a. The stopper portion 403c is configured by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

  The lid portion 407 closes a region where the long hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaches the back side of the long hole portion 406 is formed into a long hole. Guided to the front side through the section 406. Therefore, in the situation where the lid 407 is not provided and the back side is opened, the electrical wiring DH1 projects to the back side, and the assembly between the bottom wall 311 (see FIG. 13) of the back case 310 and the main body plate 401 occurs. There is a risk of being pinched. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the region where the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed is partitioned by the lid portion 407, the electrical wiring DH1 is prevented from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. Can do.

  As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the back case 310 without confirming the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the assembly work can be made more efficient.

  The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1 in a relatively non-rotatable manner, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by the shaft support column 402, A terminal gear 413 meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support 403a, and an arm member 414 pivotally supported by the arm support 404 so that the posture can be changed as the terminal gear 413 rotates. Prepare.

  The end gear 413 has a gap between an annular protrusion 413a that protrudes toward the back surface in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b, and an inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stoppered portion 413b protruding like a fan in the same manner as the stopper portion 403c, a columnar protruding portion 413c projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side at an eccentric position away from the shaft post 403a, and the front of the gear portion And a detected portion 413d extending in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the side.

  The annular protrusion 413a is disposed such that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b, and sandwiches the annular protrusion 403b between the stopper portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail that guides the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

  The stopper portion 413b is configured by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stopper portion 413b interferes with the stopper portion 403c in the rotation direction. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is limited by the circumferential dimension of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 413b. That is, the terminal gear 413 is rotationally displaced at a rotation angle of less than 360 degrees.

  When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the angle obtained by subtracting the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 from 360 degrees) is calculated. What is necessary is just to design the shape of the stopper part 403c and the to-be-stopped part 413b by the angle which bisected, respectively. As a result, it is possible to avoid any one of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, so that the service life of the first operation unit 400 can be extended.

  The columnar protruding portion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin end gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the projecting tip, and the arm member 414 is connected to and supported by the cylindrical projecting part 413c so as not to fall off.

  The detected portion 413d is formed with a thickness that can pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is the first operation unit when the detected portion 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1. It can be determined that 400 is in the retracted state.

  The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a that is rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, a plate-like portion 414b that extends radially from the front side of the annular portion 414a, and a plate-like portion thereof. An intermediate plate portion 414c that is arranged in parallel to the back side with respect to the portion 414b and is connected to the extended end portion of the plate-like portion 414b, and a long hole portion that is formed in the intermediate plate portion 414c in a long hole shape. 414d, a front end plate portion 414e that is arranged in parallel to the back side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and is connected to an extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and a front side from the extended front end of the front end plate portion 414e. And a columnar projecting portion 414f projecting in a cylindrical shape.

  The long hole portion 414d is formed in such a size that the columnar protruding portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 can be inserted, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the long hole portion 414d.

  The columnar protruding portion 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate portion 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the projecting tip of the cylinder projecting portion 414f, and the connecting plate portion 421 of the rear surface arranging plate 420 cannot be detached. It is connected and supported by the overhanging portion 414f.

  FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operation unit 400. In FIG. 26, the second intermediate position of the first operation unit 400 is illustrated, and in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1, the fixed pulley on which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1, and the drive motor MT1 are shown. Illustration of the base plate to which is fastened and fixed is omitted.

  According to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, by forming the arm member 414 in a shape bent forward and backward, interference with other members can be functionally avoided. This will be described below.

  The plate-like portion 414b is arranged on the front side of the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, the limitation on the front-rear position of the plate-like portion 414b is based on the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, and therefore the portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (location opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Then, the front and rear positions can be arbitrarily designed.

  In the present embodiment, an intermediate plate portion 414c disposed at a position on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1 is disposed on the back side as compared with the plate-like portion 414b. As a result, the front-rear distance between the front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be reduced, and load transmission to the arm member 414 can be generated on the base side of the columnar projecting portion 413c. It is possible to avoid a decrease in load transmission efficiency due to the deformation of the columnar protruding portion 413c.

  Furthermore, since it is based on the relationship with the terminal gear 413 at the front and rear positions of the intermediate plate portion 414c, at a portion not related to the terminal gear 413 (location opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the terminal gear 413), The front and rear positions can be arbitrarily designed.

  In the present embodiment, a front end plate portion 414e disposed at a position opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413 is disposed on the back side as compared with the intermediate plate portion 414c. Thereby, a large space on the front side of the front end plate portion 414e can be secured, so that the rear arrangement plate 420 disposed on the front side of the front end plate portion 414e and the back side of the elevating plate 430, and It is possible to easily ensure the longitudinal dimension of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set for the purpose of avoiding interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by bending the arm member 414 stepwise, it is possible to avoid local concentration (one point) of the load generated in the arm member 414 (stress concentration can be reduced), and the arm member The durability of 414 can be improved.

  Further, by forming the minimum gap necessary to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a gap that is gathered on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to other members that secure the gap. Therefore, it is possible to use the gaps to make the electrical wiring (electrical wiring different from the electrical wiring DH1) or to arrange an additional effect member (such as an electric decoration board).

  In addition, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 disposed so as to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate 401 side is unintentionally sandwiched between the wing-like members 460 or rotated. The gear 441 and the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be prevented from being caught in the gear teeth. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 is referred to as appropriate.

  The electrical wiring DH1 is first guided to the auxiliary arm member 444 through the long hole portion 406 from the main body plate portion 401 side. At this time, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the extending portion 444c by being inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448.

  Inside the extended portion 444c, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from dropping by the retaining portion 444c1. Thereafter, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided from the base end side portion 444a to the back surface side of the housing plate portion 425, and is divided into an L-shaped region partitioned by a frame portion protruding from the back surface side of the housing plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. And reaches the through hole 427.

  The frame portion that protrudes toward the back side of the accommodation plate portion 425 includes an abbreviated portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over a substantially half circumference around the insertion hole 425a. By the omitted portion 425b, the angle at which the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the closing plate 428 can be provided at 180 degrees. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is bent in the vicinity of the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated.

  The electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the cylindrical part 433 formed at a position overlapping with the through hole 427 by passing through the through hole 427 to the front side. While being temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of 450 with a binding band or the like, it is connected to a connector disposed on the electric decoration board of the light emitting effect device LA1.

  In this way, the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed on the inner side of the constituent members (the auxiliary arm member 444 and the rear surface arrangement plate 420) in most of the path, and therefore the electrical wiring is routed like the conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the electric wire DH1 is exposed (exposed) in most cases, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 collides with another movable member and receives a load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the guide path of the electrical wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that slides are separated. That is, it is limited to the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by the sliding displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause the electric wiring DH1 to undergo deformation such as bending or bending.

  Thereby, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be greatly different, the relationship between the deformation of the electrical wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 is obtained. By cutting off, it is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electrical wiring DH1.

  Returning to FIG. 22 (a), FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. The rear surface arrangement plate 420 is connected to the columnar protruding portion 414 f of the arm member 414 and is connected to the elevating plate 430 and fixed to the elevating plate 430, and is disposed on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421. A receiving plate portion 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and an L-shaped plate that is fastened and fixed to the receiving plate portion 425 and partially closes the back side portion of the receiving plate portion 425. And a closing plate 428 having a shape.

  The connecting plate portion 421 is formed in a long hole shape that is long in the left-right direction in the main body plate portion, and is formed so as to be able to pass through the columnar projecting portion 414f. And a support box part 423 formed in a box shape whose upper side is opened.

  Since the support box part 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion long hole 422, the rigidity of the accommodation plate part 425 can be reinforced using the support box part 423. That is, the support box part 423 is disposed to oppose the support wall part 426 on the left and right sides. When the support wall part 426 is greatly deformed to the left and is brought into contact with the support box part 423, the deformation is supported by the support box part 423. It can be suppressed by the rigidity of the portion 423.

  The receiving plate portion 425 has a support wall portion 426 projecting to the front side in a straight plate shape along the vertical direction on the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a penetration penetrating on the front side of the closing plate 428. Hole 427.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter through which a connector disposed at the end of the electrical wiring DH1 can be inserted.

  The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front of the plate abuts on a frame portion protruding in a frame shape on the back side of the receiving plate portion 425, and partitions the region between the receiving plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. Composed. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only on the inner side of the frame portion of the accommodation plate portion 425 (the front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side from the frame portion).

  A deformed hole 428a is formed in the closing plate 428 so as to be visible in a rear view so that a temporary retaining portion 425c that protrudes in a U-shape on the back side at a position closer to the through hole 427 than the omitted portion 425b. The

  The irregularly shaped hole 428a is formed from a horizontally long shape portion having a lateral width slightly longer than the horizontal width of the temporary retaining portion 425c, and a vertically long shape portion provided so as to intersect with the horizontally long shape portion in order to secure a region through which the binding band can be passed. It is formed.

  The temporary holding part 425c has a role as a fastening part of a binding band. By temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 with a binding band, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. In this case, by tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 side can be brought close to the closing plate 428 side, so that the insertion hole 425a of the accommodation plate portion 425 is centered. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the semicircular plate portion and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Thereby, since it is possible to avoid the electric wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the accommodation plate portion 425, the service life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the closing plate 428.

  Accordingly, the position where the electrical wiring DH1 is fixed relative to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400, that is, the temporary fastening position of the electrical wiring DH1 is the position between the housing plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428 (ie, the electrical wiring DH1). The base end side portion of the auxiliary arm member 444 that is the first part that displaces the electrical wiring DH1 relative to the lifting plate 430 when the electrical wiring DH1 is routed from the light emitting effect device LA1 to which one end of the DH1 is connected. The binding band can be replaced without removing the closing plate 428 while temporarily securing the electrical wiring DH1 at a location overlapping the route up to 444a. Therefore, the service life of the electrical wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintenance performance of the binding band related to the electrical wiring DH1 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the electrical wiring DH1 is wound on the front side of the closing plate 428 along the shape of the closing plate 428, the closing plate 428 has an L-shape when viewed from the back. While curving along the first plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction on the front side of the plate 428, curving along the second plane (plane perpendicular to the first plane) perpendicular to the left-right direction near the through-hole 427. become. Accordingly, the holding force for holding the electric wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodation plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

  The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fastening of the rear surface arrangement plate 420, a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of portions related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440, and the electric wiring DH1. A cylindrical portion 433 formed so as to be insertable, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a plurality of portions formed on the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference between members. The coping part 435 and the decoration part 436 by which the pattern of a substantially left-right symmetric shape is given to the board front surface are provided.

  The fastening portion 431 includes at least a pair of hook-shaped protrusions 431a that are disposed at the lower end of the lifting plate 430 and support the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (slide rack). Although the hook-shaped protrusion 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, a female screw shape is formed from the tip thereof, and a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the receiving plate portion 425 to the lifting plate 430 is screwed in. The That is, it is used for both the portion related to fastening and fixing the rear surface arrangement plate 420 and the portion related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

  The cylindrical portion 433 extends to the back side through a gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its back side end abuts against the front surface of the receiving plate portion 425, and in this abutting state, the through hole 427 The inside of the cylindrical part 433 is continuously connected. The electrical wiring DH1 is inserted back and forth through this continuously connected portion.

  As the coping part 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with a connection part (in this embodiment, a raised fastening part arranged side by side vertically) between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442, A notch portion 435a that is notched upward from the lower edge and an arcuate gear portion that is recessed in a wall portion that is formed in a wall shape so as to protect the upper axis of the arcuate gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444. For example, a recessed portion 435b formed so as to avoid interference with 444b is exemplified.

  The decorative portion 436 is disposed on the back side of the wing member 460 and is configured to be able to visually recognize a series of patterns in cooperation with the wing member 460 as the wing member 460 is displaced. It will be described later.

  The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotating gears 441 that mesh with each other, a relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the rotation gears 441 and that can be displaced in the vertical direction, and a long hole in the relative displacement member 442. A pair of elongated holes 443, an auxiliary arm member 444 having a rotating gear tooth meshing with the other of the rotating gear 441, and an end fastened and fixed to the rotating tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back side And a side plate 448.

  The elongate protrusion 431a is inserted through the long hole 443. Stability of the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be achieved by arranging the longitudinal direction of the bowl shape and the longitudinal direction of the long hole 443 substantially parallel to each other.

  In addition, since the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced as compared with the case where the hook-like protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the hook-like protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be reduced. The frictional resistance generated between the two can be reduced.

  The auxiliary arm member 444 includes a ring-shaped base end side portion 444a that is pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432, and an arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the base end side portion 444a. The gear portion 444b, the extending portion 444c extending in the radial direction of the ring shape from the proximal end side portion 444a, and the substantially semi-cylindrical shape disposed at the extending distal end portion of the extending portion 444c are formed. A cylindrical member 444d configured to be continuously connected to the open portion of the extending portion 444c.

  The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a through which a fastening screw that is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the distal end of the large-diameter projection 432a is inserted in the state of being inserted into the large-diameter projection 432a. Movement to the back side is restricted by the accommodation plate portion 425. That is, the base end side portion 444a is pivotally supported so as not to drop off in such a manner as to face the elevation plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 from the front and rear.

  The extending portion 444c is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and extends from one side in the short side direction to the other side on the back side portion, and the short side of the electrical wiring DH1 between the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the direction dimension (width dimension) is provided. The retaining portion 444c1 serves to prevent the electrical wiring DH1 disposed between the extended portion 444c and the other side in the short direction of the extended portion 444c from dropping later. have.

  The aspect of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the gap between the extending portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1 may be configured to be shorter than the short-side dimension (width dimension) of the electrical wiring DH1. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electrical wiring DH1 into the gap between the extended portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

  As long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extending portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the up-and-down displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be minimized. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The cylindrical member 444d has an outer diameter that is designed to be slightly shorter than the short dimension of the long hole portion 406. By inserting the cylindrical member 444d into the long hole portion 406, the long direction (left and right direction) of the long hole portion 406 is designed. The auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to slide along the auxiliary arm 444 and to rotate.

  The end side plate 448 is provided with a through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted. The electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a has a cylindrical portion 444d inserted through the long hole portion 406. It passes through the inside, passes through the inside of the extending portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the base end side portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the receiving plate portion 425. And it guides to the front side through the through-hole 427 and the cylindrical part 433.

  As described above, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is formed larger than the outer shape of the connector connected to the end of the electric wire DH1 because the electric wire DH1 is passed therethrough. In other words, the through hole 448a is formed in a size that allows the connector to be inserted.

  The through hole 448a is formed not only in the center portion of the end side plate 448 but also in a deformed shape including a region eccentric to the outside of the diameter, and in particular, a large opening is formed on the extended portion 444c side. Therefore, since the electric wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extending portion 444c regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 is increased in accordance with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444. It is possible to avoid changing (raising).

  In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the extended portion 444c side at the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. With this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right, so that the lateral displacement width required for the electrical wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

  In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced left and right when the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the direction of the through hole 448a is changed so that the end side plate 448 is displaced in the left and right direction. Can function to mitigate. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened compared to the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 is shortened. In addition, the load applied to the electrical wiring DH1 from the end side plate 448 can be reduced.

  A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, the relative displacement between the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the lift plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened to the relative displacement member 442 is similar to the relative displacement of the lift plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442. To do.

  The support plate portion 450 is a plate-like member that is formed in a disc shape and has a light emitting substrate LA disposed on the back side and fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a fastening screw that is inserted into the lifting plate 430. A plurality of fastening portions 451 into which a screw is screwed, and a pair of left and right fastening shaft support and joint portions 452 that are fitted into the cylindrical portion 461 of the wing-like member 460 and into which a fastening screw inserted into the lifting plate 430 is screwed. In addition, a pair of left and right through holes 453 are provided below the fastening shaft support portion 452 and a support portion 454 that hooks and supports the upper protrusion LA1b of the light emitting effect device LA1.

  The light emitting effect device LA1 includes a pair of fastening portions LA1a into which a fastening screw inserted into the support plate portion 450 is screwed in a lower portion, and a pair of projecting pieces projecting to be inserted into the support portion 454 in an upper portion. LA1b is provided. In this way, the lower portion of the light emitting effect device LA1 is supported by fastening and the upper portion is supported by engagement, so that the shadow of the fastening screw is formed on the upper back side of the electrical decoration board while ensuring sufficient support strength. It can be avoided.

  A three-dimensional or planar decoration pattern is provided on the front surface of the light emitting effect device LA1 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where the decorative pattern is viewed without being hidden by the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (FIG. 34). reference).

  In the present embodiment, the shapes of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are similar to shells (for example, scallops), and the shape of the light emitting effect device LA1 disposed therebetween is like a pearl. It is formed from a substantially circular shape in front view that is visible. That is, by visually recognizing the light emitting effect member LA1, the wing member 460, and the auxiliary member 470, it is possible to configure an external appearance reminiscent of the concept of “pearls arranged inside an open shell”. .

  The wing member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support / use portion 452, and a cylindrical portion 461 that is rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support / use portion 452 and the tubular portion 461. Arc-shaped gears 462 formed in an arc shape and meshed with each other, an extending portion 463 extending from the tubular portion 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and an extending portion 463 of the extending portion 463 Forming portions 464L and 464R that are formed on the extended end side and coated with plating on the front surface of the plate so that light can be reflected strongly, and an arcuate gear along an arc having a smaller diameter than the arcuate gear 462 A downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extended end portion in which the flange portion 466 extends in the external direction. Cylinder extension that projects from the back to the back And a part 467.

  The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed in an arc of the same diameter that meshes at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) wing members 460 that rotate by the engagement of the arcuate gear 462 are the same (symmetric).

  The extending portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is recessed and formed only on the right side. The recessed portion 463a is a shape portion for making it easy to avoid interference with the electrical wiring guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430 through the tubular portion 433, and details will be described later.

  The forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the projecting state of the first operation unit 400 and configured as a series of substantially semicircular (substantially semielliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17), while the first operation In the retracted state of the unit 400, the unit 400 is divided into left and right parts, and the size thereof is left-right asymmetric (see FIG. 16).

  More specifically, the lower side is formed symmetrically, while the left side forming portion 464L is formed so as to protrude in the rotational direction as compared with the right side forming portion 464R in the shape of the upper side that contacts when combined. As a result, it is formed large. In other words, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is disposed on the right side in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 17).

  The shapes of the upper end portions of the wing-like members 464L and 464R and facing each other are different depending on the distance from the tubular portion 461. That is, the side close to the cylindrical part 461 (the side close to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) of the wing members 464L, 464R can overlap each other in front view when the wing members 464L, 464R are closest. The interference portion 464a is disposed so as to be displaced in the rotational axis direction.

  In the present embodiment, the side close to the cylindrical portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns when the wing-like members 464L and 464R are closest to each other is formed. The above-described interference portion 464a can prevent a cut from occurring on the contact surface S1 of the wing members 464L and 464R when the wing members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. It can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, on the side far from the cylindrical portion 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the rotation shafts of the wing members 464L and 464R can be stopped by contact so that the rotation of the wing members 464L and 464R can be stopped. The contact surface is arranged at a position that matches in the direction.

  By providing the portion where the load at the time of stopping of the wing members 464L and 464R comes into contact with the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the moment of force is the longest, the wing members 464L and 464R are brought into contact with each other. Can be minimized.

  In this way, by changing the shape of the wing members 464L and 464R by the distance from the cylindrical portion 461, a series of decorative patterns formed when the wing members 464L and 464R are closest to each other feels strange to the player. And the load that can be generated on the wing members 464L and 464R when the wing members 464L and 464R are closest to each other can be minimized.

  The flange portion 466 is used both for suppressing the positional deviation of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and for partitioning the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and to prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with the fixed transmission plate 490 and causing excessive resistance.

  The columnar protruding portion 467 is inserted into the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and a ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted into the protruding tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed at the projecting tip, and a fastening screw having an umbrella portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is inserted into the collar C1. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the columnar protruding portion 467 so as not to fall off.

  The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate members that are rotatably supported. The auxiliary member 470 is inserted into the supported portion 471 through the through-hole 453 and the supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape, and cannot rotate. A metal insertion metal rod 472 fitted to the insertion metal rod 472, and a gear portion 473 having a gear tooth formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472 and fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472 so as not to rotate. With.

  A female screw is formed in the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472 in the radial direction, and a through hole through which a screwed portion of a fastening screw to be screwed into the female screw can be inserted into a corresponding position of the supported portion 471. Is formed. After the insertion metal rod 472 is inserted into the supported portion 471, the insertion metal rod 472 can be prevented from falling off the supported portion 471 by screwing a fastening screw into the female screw through the through hole.

  The gear portion 473 is pivotally supported around the through hole 453 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453. Since the gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (see FIG. 22B), the gear portion 473 rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the wing member 460.

  The fixed transmission plate 490 includes a plate-like portion fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 drilled as a long hole curved in the plate-like portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-like portion. A metal rod-like member that is supported in a non-rotatable manner and includes a metal rod 492 that projects to the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is secured to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492 so as not to rotate.

  The long hole portion 491 includes an up-down direction portion 491a formed along the up-down direction and a bending change portion 491b formed by bending in the left-right direction with respect to the up-down direction portion 491a. In this way, by dividing the long hole portion 491, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the accompanying rotational displacement of the wing member 460 are not completely synchronized, but a shift is provided in the synchronization mode. The details will be described later.

  The coupling and fixing of the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 are the same as the coupling mode of the insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 471 described above. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the metal bar 492 from falling off the decorative portion 493.

  Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28, 29 and 30 are rear views of the first operation unit 400. FIG. 27 to 30 show how the respective constituent members are displaced in accordance with the rotation of the drive motor MT1. In FIG. 27, the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. In FIG. 29, the first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 in which the lifting plate 430 is lowered from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical displacement dimension in FIG. 16 shows the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the left-right direction. FIG. 30 shows the second intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 facing, and FIG. 30 shows the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the detected portion 413d enters the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1, whereby the attitude of the end gear 413 is determined. In the present embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (the first intermediate state, the second intermediate state, and the overhanging state) are the displacement amount set in advance from the retracted state. The state after the displacement is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413 and the columnar protruding portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member). 414 (the radial direction of rotation of 414) is orthogonal. As a result, a load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along a linear direction passing through the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can be maintained (use of dead center).

  The distal end plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is disposed outside the arc MXS circumscribing the disc portion of the terminal gear 413 around the rotation axis of the arm member 414. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the front end plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 from interfering during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

  The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the lifting plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the long hole portion 406 so as to be slidable, it is not a non-resistance member, and is caused by contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the long hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, the right side portion of the elevating unit 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 by the action of the operation resistance.

  As shown in FIG. 28, when the arm member 414 is rotationally displaced, the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward, and the relative displacement member 442 is moved up and down as the rotating gear 441 meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 displaced accordingly. The plate 430 is displaced downward with a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the plate 430.

  Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears, so the displacement amount of the relative displacement member 442 relative to the lifting plate 430 and the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, while the wing member 460 has the same posture as that in the retracted state. maintain.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts to descend from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing at which the wing member 460 starts to rotate. The cause of this time shift will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) until the wing member 460 starts to rotate, and thus the wing member 460 rotates. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a problem of colliding with the upper wall portion of the back case 310 when it is displaced.

  In other words, the displacement mode in which the wing-like member 460 is rotationally displaced after being lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed such that the upper wall portion of the back case 310 is not displaced in height from side to side. In this case, the conditions are the same as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the wing member 460 is rotated simultaneously with the lowering of the lifting plate 430. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of this embodiment can be realized by diverting the operation conditions (gear ratio, parameters such as the displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. Thereby, the cost required for design can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 414 hidden on the back side of the lifting plate 430 in the retracted state protrudes above the lifting plate 430 as the lifting plate 430 descends as shown in FIG. Displace as follows.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wing member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the lifting plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). In other words, the wing-like member 460 is not only used as an effect means for performing an effect of making the player visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the surface side and exciting the game, and the arm member 414 for driving transmission is connected to the lifting plate 430. It also functions as a shielding means to hide together.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the formation portion 464L of the wing member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having a function of transmitting driving force is disposed is compared to the formation portion 464R of the wing member 460 on the opposite side. Therefore, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

  Similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, due to the configuration, the arm member 414 protrudes above the lifting plate 430 in the second intermediate state, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the lifting plate 430. That is, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to project to the upper side of the lifting plate 430 after the arm member 414 projects to the upper side of the lifting plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

  Therefore, even when the forming portion 464R is formed to have a shape smaller than the forming portion 464L (the amount of protrusion on the upper side of the lifting plate 430 at the same point is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L), the auxiliary arm member can be used without any problem. 444 can be hidden from the player's view.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the auxiliary arm member 444 has a posture in which the longitudinal direction faces the left-right direction at a position slightly beyond the state where the columnar projecting portion 414f is farthest left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414. Become. In the state where the columnar projecting portion 414f is farthest leftward from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the lifting plate 430 tends to increase, but at the same time, it opposes this. When the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the lift plate 430, the displacement resistance of the lift plate 430 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state where the columnar protruding portion 414f is farthest left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the cylindrical portion 444d (FIG. 25) is disposed at the right end of the long hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the lift plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the lift displacement of the lift plate 430. While suppressing, it is possible to suppress the lifting plate 430 from being displaced in the left-right direction by a load in the left-right direction applied to the lifting plate 430.

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the columnar protruding portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is disposed outside the arc MXS, but the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the columnar protruding portion 413c. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 can be avoided.

  In other words, the arc MXS is defined only as a reference position, and the design of the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 determines whether interference occurs when the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked. It is done by dynamically examining whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the end gear 413 rotates with the position where the stopper portion 413b of the end gear 413 contacts the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as an end point. As a control, the drive motor MT1 is driven so that the terminal gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where the stopper portion 413b contacts the stopper portion 403c. Thereby, it is possible to structurally prevent the end gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the stopper portion 413b and the stopper portion 403c.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413 and the columnar protruding portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm And the radial direction of rotation of the member 414 are orthogonal to each other. As a result, a load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along a linear direction passing through the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can be maintained (use of dead center).

  The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, not only the displacement in the gravitational direction but also the first operation unit 400 can be prevented from moving upward from the extended state to the retracted state side.

  This prevents the lifting plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing up and moving up after reaching the overhanging state, so that the downstream side of the lifting plate 430 as a driving force transmission path can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, wing member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, the contact state of the wing member 460 can be easily maintained.

  The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the lifting plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the long hole portion 406 so as to be slidable, it is not a non-resistance member, and is caused by contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the long hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, the right side portion of the elevating unit 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 by the action of the operation resistance.

  In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 supports the lifting plate 430 in a suspended manner. Accordingly, the posture of the elevating plate 430 becomes unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405 while the driving force by the driving motor MT1 and the biasing force by the coil spring SP1 are generated only on the left and right sides (left side). Can be avoided.

  Here, as described above, as long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extending portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the up-and-down displacement of the lifting plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 is minimized. Explain what can be done.

  When the route of the electrical wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting effect device LA1 side, the route is fixed to the lifting plate 430 until the auxiliary arm member 444 is reached, and the route becomes variable for the first time by the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the extended portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is disposed is fixed in shape while the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is subject to expansion and contraction is reduced. it can.

  In the position where it has come out from the through hole 448a to the back side, the horizontal displacement caused by the horizontal displacement of the end side plate 448 occurs in the electrical wiring DH1. As described above, the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction in the electrical wiring DH1 is limited to that due to the displacement of the end side plate 448. In this embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured to obtain the necessary amount. Is added to the electrical wiring DH1 in the path from the fixed position of the electrical wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electrical wiring DH1 slackened), and then the electrical wiring DH1 is calculated. Is fixed to the main plate 401.

  In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand and contract with the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448. In addition, the amount of displacement that causes the lifting and lowering plate 430 can be limited. Can be suppressed to less than half of the vertical displacement amount.

  Furthermore, as described above, the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced compared to the displacement width of the end side plate 448 due to the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448. The length can be shortened.

  31, 32, 33 and 34 are front views of the first operation unit 400. FIGS. 31 to 34 illustrate how the constituent members are displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 31, the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 is illustrated, and in FIG. 32, the first operation unit 400 is illustrated. 33, the second intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 is shown in FIG. 33, and the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge of the wing member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first motion unit 400, the first motion unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the lifting plate 430 is slightly lowered and displaced, the posture of the wing member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the player can visually recognize the first operation unit 400 entering the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

  In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the wing member 460 does not change compared to the retracted state shown in FIG. 31, while the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are the same as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. The decorative part 493 is displaced downward by a displacement amount that exceeds the downward displacement amount.

  Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the state in which the single lifting plate 430 is displaced up and down with respect to the player who visually recognizes the lifting plate 430 but also the lifting plate. Since the decoration part 493 that is displaced by the vertical displacement amount different from the vertical displacement amount 430 can be visually recognized, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative portion 493 is increased compared to the first intermediate state, and in addition, the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 changes posture.

  FIG. 34 illustrates a state in which the wing-like member 460 comes into contact with the opposing position. The wing-like member 460 is visually recognized as if a pair of left and right members are united as if it were a single semi-circular (semi-elliptical) decorative member. The rail 405 is formed at a position shifted to the right side from the central position where the rail 405 is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is preliminarily formed on the forming portion 464R side as compared with the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R, so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is shifted from the left and right center. It is configured.

  Since the upper edges of the formation portions 464L and 464R are disposed at positions that are shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the formation portions 464L, It can be made difficult for the player to notice that 464R is configured in a left-right asymmetric shape. Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R being left-right asymmetric.

  Further, since the contact surface S1 is displaced from the metal rail 405 in a front view, even if the wing-like member 460 bounces off due to an impact at the time of contact and a gap is generated again, the rail member is removed from the gap. 405 can be avoided from being visually recognized, and the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate 401 can be visually recognized.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is viewed from the gap. It is possible to suppress a reduction in the production effect.

  Further, the contact surface S1 is disposed at a position shifted from the left and right center position generally assumed by the player as a break between the pair of movable members that contact and separate on the left and right. That is, the player does not create a gap at a position (right and left central position) that is visually recognized while expecting that a gap will be generated, and the contact surface S1 that may cause a gap is formed at a position shifted from the position. By arranging, even if a gap occurs, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the wing-like member 460. That is, from the retracted state (refer to FIG. 31) of the first operation unit 400 to the second intermediate state (refer to FIG. 33), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the wing member 460, It is difficult to grasp.

  On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape portion of the decorative portion 436 disposed on the lower side of the wing member 460 is visible, and the outer shape portion is the wing member 460. It is formed to be continuous with the outer shape of the front view.

  That is, a series of decorative shapes (in the present embodiment, “shell” shape) that the pair of wing-like members 460 visually recognize in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge portion. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, a series of decoration shapes larger than a series of decoration shapes (see FIG. 38) configured by combining the pair of wing-like members 460 can be formed, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the process of the displacement until a series of decorative shapes is constituted by the displacement of the wing member 460 is not one way. That is, as a process of the first displacement, there is a process in which a pair of wing-like members 460 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes are displaced and combined in a manner close to each other to form a series of decorative shapes.

  On the other hand, as a process of the second displacement, the wing member 460 and the decorative portion 436 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes overlap in the front-rear direction in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and project. As the state approaches, a process of forming a series of decorative shapes by displacing the wing member 460 in a direction in which the overlap margin becomes smaller (a direction in which the wing member 460 moves away from the decoration portion 436) can be given.

  Through these different processes, the displacement of the wing member 460 itself is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, and the shape can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the wing member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Accordingly, while the shape of the individually displaceable wing member 460 is suppressed to a small size, a series of decorative shapes formed by merging in the projecting state of the first operation unit 400 are configured to be large compared to the size. can do.

  35, 36, 37, and 38 are rear views of the support plate portion 450, the wing member 460, the auxiliary member 470, and the fixed transmission plate 490. FIG. 35 to 38 show how the respective constituent members are displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 35, the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 36, the first operation unit 400 is shown. 37, the second intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 is shown in FIG. 37, and the extended state of the first operation unit 400 is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c dispersedly arranged along an arc shape are formed on the back side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks to the back side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the wing member 460 is disposed so as to cover the back side of the through hole LA1c. Therefore, the light leaked from the through hole LA1c is formed on the formation portions 464L and 464R of the wing member 460. Can be reflected to the front side.

  The rotational displacement of the wing member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the rotational displacement of the wing member 460 is caused by the relationship between the columnar projecting portion 467 and the long hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in detail.

  From the retracted state illustrated in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state illustrated in FIG. 36, the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the columnar protruding portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction). Since the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the wing-like member 460 from being rotationally displaced by a load applied to the columnar projecting portion 467.

  In this embodiment, an individual member for biasing the wing member 460 to the retracted state side is not prepared, but the center of gravity is arranged on the left and right sides of the rotation axis due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R. It is maintained in a retracted posture by its own weight.

  In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, when the columnar projecting portion 467 enters the curve changing portion 491b, a load in the left-right direction is generated on the columnar projecting portion 467, and the wing-like member 460 starts rotational displacement. From the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the left wing member 460 via the column extending portion 467 and then to the right wing member 460. Communicated. That is, as compared with the right wing member 460, the left wing member 460 is upstream in the driving force transmission path.

  In the present embodiment, the formation portion 464L of the left wing-like member 460 on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path is formed slightly larger (heavy) than the formation portion 464R. Accordingly, the movable members can be sequentially arranged so as to become lighter toward the downstream side in the transmission path of the driving force. Thereby, while being able to aim at favorable transmission of a driving force, it can suppress that each structural member bounces and displaces after displacing to each terminal position.

  One of the reasons for arranging the cylindrical portion 433 as the guide route of the electrical wiring DH1 on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in weight between the forming portions 464L and 464R. Specifically, the positions of the formed portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the engagement of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact of the opposing surfaces of the formed portions 464L and 464R. The position after the displacement of the forming portions 464L and 464R may be slightly changed due to an error, aged deformation of the long hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the wing member 460, or the like.

  In this case, the position change after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

  Considering this, in this embodiment, the extending portion 463 of the wing member 460 is disposed below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, the recessed portion 463a is provided so that the overlap between the tubular portion 433 and the extending portion 463 is reduced. As a result, even when a displacement that is pushed down unintentionally occurs in the formation portion 464L, the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 and the formation portion 464L interfere with each other can be reduced.

  In addition, since it is assumed that the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced, it can be designed at a position where the cylindrical portion 433 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere in the rear view (see FIG. 38). Thereby, a design freedom can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the formation range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower side portion of the tubular portion 433 can be particularly opened. Thereby, the difference in the shape of the pair of left and right extending portions 463 can be minimized while avoiding contact between the extending portion 463 and the electrical wiring DH1 that tends to hang down due to its own weight inside the cylindrical portion 433.

  That is, it is possible to avoid the recessed portion 463 from being too close to the forming portion 464 side. Thus, in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463 a is placed on the back side of the auxiliary member 470. The recessed portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

  Thereby, in any state from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470. Accordingly, the extending portion 463 of the pair of left and right wing-like members 460 and the lower edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R can be easily viewed in the left-right symmetry, so that the symmetrically displaced member is configured asymmetrically. Giving the player a sense of discomfort can be avoided.

  The transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the columnar projecting portion 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced so as to move downward from the tubular portion 461 of the wing member 460. As the driving force is transmitted, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is attached to the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 461. However, when it is assumed that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the columnar overhanging portion 467 It is configured not to be displaced at a constant speed (configured to change the angular velocity).

  More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the cylindrical portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curve changing portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left and right direction). In this case, as the columnar protruding portion 467 is displaced downward, the angle of the rotational displacement of the columnar protruding portion 467 with respect to the vertical displacement width increases. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the rotational displacement speed (angular speed) of the cylindrical protruding portion 467 gradually increases.

  Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the pair of wing-like members 460 are decelerated during the displacement, it is possible to configure a powerful effect of displacing at high speed and uniting.

  On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the columnar protruding portion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the wing member 460 immediately before the pair of wing members 460 come together in close proximity, but if the speed increases too much, There is a possibility that the pair of wing members 460 will rebound greatly due to the impact, and there is a possibility that the effect of the present embodiment of combining the pair of wing members 460 to visually recognize a series of decorative patterns is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bending change portion 491b is directed toward the rotating shaft side of the wing member 460 (the left wing member 460) including the columnar protruding portion 467 with respect to the horizontal direction (left and right direction). It is formed as a long hole extending in the rising and tilting direction. As a result, an increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular speed) of the columnar protruding portion 467 can be suppressed.

  The degree of the suppression is the amount of upward displacement of the curve changing portion 491b with respect to the long hole parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction) at the position where the cylindrical protruding portion 467 is disposed (hereinafter also referred to as “upward correction amount”). It corresponds to.

  As in the present embodiment, when the bending change portion 491b is configured as a long hole extending in a direction of rising and inclining toward the rotation axis side, the columnar projecting portion 467 is displaced downward (the pair of wing-like members 460 is The closer to the united state), the larger the upward correction amount. Therefore, the extent (decrease width) that suppresses the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the columnar protruding portion 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the columnar protruding portion 467 changes downward.

  Therefore, an increase in speed can be moderately suppressed as compared with a configuration exemplified by a brake structure that maintains the same friction state. The actual displacement speed of the wing member 460 will be described later.

  FIG. 39A to FIG. 39C are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first motion unit 400. FIG. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis. In FIG. 39 (a), the downward displacement amount of the lifting plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis, and FIG. In b), the rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39C, the rotation amount (angle change) of the wing member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

  Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, while the terminal gear 413 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not rotate at a constant speed, and the up-and-down displacement of the elevating plate 430 does not change at a constant speed.

  That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode (for example, constant speed rotation) of the drive motor MT1 and the control mode (non-constant speed displacement) of the elevating plate 430, and the elevating plate 430 in the driving force transmission path. The displacement mode on the downstream side is affected by this shift. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed, it is difficult to displace the components disposed downstream in the transmission path at a constant speed.

  For example, even if a fixed rack gear-like portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-like portion is configured to mesh with the rotating gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the relative displacement member 442 is not moved up and down. Since it depends on the up-and-down displacement mode of the up-and-down plate 430, the displacement is not constant.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the relative displacement member 442 is not configured so that the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is defined by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, but the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the lift plate 430. In the same manner as the above, a configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442.

  That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 into the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430 accompanying the vertical displacement of the columnar projecting portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, the horizontal axis of FIG. A conversion formula for converting a numerical value into a numerical value on the vertical axis) is applied in reverse to convert the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 accompanying the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotating gear 441. By doing so, it is possible to partially offset the displacement mode, and approximate the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement mode of the rotating gear 441.

  In other words, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 starts to shift from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 from the vicinity of the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 of 90 degrees and 140 degrees (see FIG. 39A), As for the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444, a deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is in the vicinity of 30 to 170 degrees (see FIG. 39B).

  As a result, for example, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed for the most part as the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 are rotated at a constant speed (see FIG. 39B). Can be displaced up and down with respect to the lifting plate 430 at substantially constant speed.

  This makes it possible to easily associate the speed control of the drive motor MT1 with the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the first operation unit 400 can perform the driving effect to be visually recognized by the player in reverse calculation from the displacement mode desired to be executed. It is possible to easily set the speed of the drive motor MT1.

  Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence of the configuration that produces an advantageous effect only on the driving device side in the driving force transmission path on the front end side of the transmission path. Here, with reference to the lifting plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side will be described as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side will be described as the front end side of the transmission path.

  On the drive device side of the transmission path, when the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the arm member 414 can be started and stopped quickly. However, on the distal end side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state becomes extremely small, so that the problem is that the displacement tends to become slow. was there.

  From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the distal end side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 is set before the arm member 414 reaches the end of displacement. Or by controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the arm member 414 is decelerated (before the retracted state or the extended state is reached).

  However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for displacement on the distal end side of the transmission path is reduced, and the width of the displacement mode is reduced. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode on the front end side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413, so that it is synchronized immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operation unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Accordingly, the relative displacement member 442 (and the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 disposed on the downstream side thereof) disposed on the distal end side of the transmission path while utilizing the rotation angle of the arm member 414 to the maximum. Can be avoided.

  It is the displacement of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 that is visually recognized by the player. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the rotational angular velocities of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the terminal gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed are increasing (immediately above the stop speed) immediately before the stop, and immediately before the stop. The speed is reduced in accordance with the shape of the curve changing portion 491b of the long hole portion 491 described above.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the displacement mode of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430, the displacement of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more gradual. Therefore, powerful displacement can be realized and the effect of production can be improved.

  On the other hand, instead of stopping the rotational angular velocities of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in an increasing trend (combining the wing members 460 together), the wing member 460 is provided by providing a section to be decelerated immediately before. It is possible to suppress rebounding and displacement after combining.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430 that is displaced continuously by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 that is displaced downstream thereof, and the fixed transmission plate 490. The displacement modes of the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made different.

  In particular, the displacement mode once changed while going downstream along the driving force transmission path can be changed back to the original side. Thereby, in the structure which a several member displaces synchronously, a unique displacement aspect can be comprised.

  Although the case where the drive motor MT1 is displaced from the retracted state to the extended state has been described as a control mode, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so as to reverse at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reversely controlled so that the first operation unit 400 is reciprocally displaced (repetitively reciprocated) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

  In this case, since the elevating plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state after the elevating plate 430 starts to descend and before the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start to rotate, it is made visible to the player. The displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be limited to the vertical displacement, and the rotational displacement can be eliminated.

  Even if the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are relatively displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the lifting plate 430, so that the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is easily changed. can do.

  FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. In FIG. 40, a state in which the game board 13 is removed from the operation unit 300 and disposed on the front side is illustrated, and illustration of the upper part of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 40, the outer shape of the transparent cover member 790 that is disposed along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and is formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the configuration below the transparent cover member 790 is illustrated. Is shown in a visible manner.

  When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the window section defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The top surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operation unit 700 are visible. Moreover, since the light emitted to the front side by the electric decoration board 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60.

  41 is a front perspective view of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 714 arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and electrical decorations arranged on the left and right. A substrate 777.

  Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide irradiation light irradiated from below, and transmits the irradiation light from the upper end portion. The electrical decoration board 777 includes light emitting means 778 such as an LED configured to irradiate light to the front side. As described above, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714 and emit light toward the front side through the electric decoration substrate 777.

  43 and 44 are exploded front perspective views of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 43, it is shown in a direction view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is shown in a direction view looking up from below. Further, in FIG. 45, the protruding pressing portion 724 is shown in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45, the second operation unit 700 includes a base member 701 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 40), and from above the base member 701. A cover member 720 that is covered and fastened to the base member 701, and a plate-like displacement member that is supported between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 so as to be rotatable and displaceable (rotatable at a rotation angle of about 6 degrees). 730, a hollow member placed on the upper surface of the plate-like displacement member 730, and a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) hollow members 740 configured to be vertically displaceable, and more than the hollow member 740 A plurality of (three in this embodiment) variable decorative members 750 that are placed on the upper surface of the plate-like displacement member 730 on the front side and are configured to be at least vertically movable, and the bottom left and right of the base member 701 Each of the first and second drive units 760 has a configuration that is substantially line-symmetric with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and is configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-like displacement member 730, and a transparent cover member 790 ( 40).

  The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member that covers the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720 in advance. Even if any of the constituent members of the operation unit 400 malfunctions, the first operation unit 400 acts to prevent the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714 from colliding with each other.

  Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back side, a part of the light emitted right above from the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 can be refracted to the back side. Thereby, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so that even if the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light is guided. It is possible to easily notice changes in the lighting state of the light member 714 (including changes based on changes in light and darkness, light vibration, and displacement of the hollow member 740).

  43, 44, and 45, the transparent cover member 790 is not shown. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 701 includes a plate-like member 702 formed to have sufficient strength, an electric decoration board 705 that is fastened and fixed facing the upper surface of the plate-like member 702, and A partition member 708 disposed opposite to the upper surface of the electric decoration substrate 705 and fastened and fixed to the plate-like member 702, and a thin film cover formed on the partition member 708 and formed on the partition member 708. A member 712, a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of light guide members 714 placed in contact with the thin film cover member 712, and a plate-like member covered from above the light guide member 714 And the displacement control member 716 which controls the raise of the light guide member 714 and the displacement to a horizontal direction is provided.

  The plate-like member 702 is formed as a pair on the left and right side portions of the plate-like member 702 so as to be engageable with the flange-like portion 721 c of the cover member 720, and the pivotally supported portion of the plate-like displacement member 730 is formed. A receiving recess 702b formed so as to be able to pivotally support 731, a regulating projection 702c projecting upward from the front edge and formed to regulate the rotation of the plate-like displacement member 730, and a fastening screw can be screwed in A plurality of fastening portions 703a formed on the top, and a plurality of columnar projecting portions 703b projecting upward in a column shape beyond the fastening portions 703a and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into the projecting tip portions; And a plurality of through holes 704 drilled in the vertical direction.

  The plurality of fastening portions 703a are fastened and fastened by fastening screws that are inserted through the electrical decoration board 705, and are formed at three places, the left and right center and both left and right ends. A protruding pin for positioning is also provided.

  By arranging the electrical decoration board 705 so that the projecting pin is inserted into the through hole formed in the electrical decoration board 705 corresponding to the positioning projecting pin, the fastening screw is inserted into the electrical decoration board 705. Since the through-hole drilled and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected, the electrical decoration board 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-like member 702 by inserting a fastening screw therethrough.

  The columnar projecting portion 703b is a portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted in the order of the displacement regulating member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 708 is screwed, and the base end side is inclined and formed in a trapezoidal shape. Thereby, the electrical decoration board | substrate 705 can be made easy to arrange | position to an appropriate position.

  The through-hole 704 is drilled in a size that allows a connector (not shown) disposed on the lower surface of the electric decoration board 705 and an electrical wiring connected to the connector to pass therethrough. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electric wiring connected to the electric decoration board 705 is disposed on the lower surface side of the electric decoration board 705 and does not protrude above the electric decoration board 705. Thereby, the whole board upper surface of the electrical decoration board | substrate 705 can be utilized as an area | region in which light emission means 706, such as LED, can be arrange | positioned.

  The electric decoration board 705 has a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs and the like, and an open portion that is formed so as to leave a slight gap from the columnar protruding portion 703b in the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43). 707.

  The light emitting means 706 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of individual light emitting means 706a arranged along a straight line facing in the left-right direction, and a plurality of whole light emitting elements disposed at positions different from the individual light emitting means 706a. Means 706b.

  The opening portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar protruding portion 703b, and the protruding end position of the columnar protruding portion 703b is higher than the position where the electric decoration board 705 is disposed in the assembled state. For this reason, when the electric decoration board 705 is moved down to a position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the opening portion 707 advances along the columnar protruding portion 703b.

  In the present embodiment, since the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a circular shape in a top view and a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed. The side surface is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. When the electric decoration board 705 is displaced downward, when the position is largely displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the position in the assembled state, along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar protruding portion 703b. Since the positional deviation of the electric decoration board 705 can be corrected, the electric decoration board 705 can be easily arranged at a target position.

  The partition member 708 is formed of a colored hard resin material that is difficult to transmit light (black in this embodiment), and includes a plurality of light transmitting holes 709 formed at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting units 706a, and columnar protrusions. A plurality of through-holes 710a drilled with an inner diameter through which the tip of the installation portion 703b can be inserted, a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed in, and fastening thereof And a plurality of receiving portions 710c that are recessed (or perforated) so as to receive the protruding pins 716b protruding from the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716 at positions shifted in the front-rear direction with respect to the portion 710b.

  The light transmitting hole 709 is formed with a long crystal shape (substantially oval shape, substantially turtle shell shape) cross section in the front and rear directions, and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. That is, the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is reduced as the translucent hole 709 is closer to the center (matched in this embodiment), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the direction is toward the center toward the left and right. The direction is inclined.

  In other words, the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting hole 709 is set to a direction inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the angle of the inclination is designed so as to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle increment is constant (about 5 degrees).

  The thin film cover member 712 is a thin, colorless and transparent resin member with low rigidity, and is formed so that the center portion is raised, the lower surface side is open, and is drilled up and down at the left and right end portions of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through-holes 712a, a plurality of middle through-holes 712b drilled up and down on the inner side in the left-right direction with respect to the outer through-holes 712a, and vertically displaced with respect to the middle through-holes 712b And a plurality of small through holes 712c to be drilled.

  The large through-hole 712a is formed with a diameter longer than the diameter of a projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) projecting in an annular shape surrounding the periphery of the insertion hole 716a from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. Since the projecting portion 716e projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 is projecting with a projecting length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, a load (fastening) is attached to the edge portion of the large through hole 712a. (Load) can be avoided.

  One of the middle through holes 712b is disposed at a position corresponding to the columnar protruding portion 703b at the center position on the front side, and the other is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

  The small through-hole 712c is disposed so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through-hole 712b disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and projects from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 and is a partition member. The protruding pin 716b received in the receiving portion 710c of 708 is formed in a size that can be inserted.

  Therefore, after covering the partition member 708 with the thin film cover member 712 and placing the displacement regulating member 716 thereon, each member is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into each place. From the lower surface of the partition member 716, Since the projecting pin 716b is inserted through the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 710c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 are aligned with the partition member 708 before the fastening screw is screwed. It can be performed easily (simultaneously), and the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw thereafter can be improved.

  The light guide member 714 is formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material into a bottomed cylindrical shape having a bottom at the top, and the top view outer shape is formed into a long and long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially turtle shell shape). A main body portion 714a, a projecting edge portion 714b projecting from the lower edge to the left and right and the front, and an inclined surface portion 714c that inclines downward toward the front side at the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a.

  Since the embossing is formed on the upper outer surface of the main body 714a, when the player visually recognizes the light emitted from the single individual light emitting means 706a and traveling through the light guide member 714 and reaching the upper end. , It can be visually recognized as if the light is emitted from the surface, not the point light.

  On the other hand, the body portion 714a is not formed with a textured portion other than the upper outer surface (intermediate portion or the like), and a smooth surface is formed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent irregular reflection when light traveling in the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and the light is totally reflected on the smooth surface to cause the main body 714a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the energy loss of light at the midway position of the main body 714a.

  The longitudinal direction of the main body portion 714a of each light guide member 714 follows the setting of the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting hole 709 described above. In other words, the light guide member 714 closer to the center has a smaller shift between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction (matched in this embodiment), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the direction toward the front side and the closer to the left and right center. The direction is inclined.

  That is, the elongate direction of the light guide member 714 is set in a direction inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle increment is constant (about 5 degrees).

  By configuring in this way, the front side end portion in the long direction in the top view of the light guide member 714 (the portion on the side close to the player as the portion that irradiates light to the player side) is the center in the long direction. It can be made to face the player side (front side left and right center) compared to the position. That is, it is possible to make the player feel as if the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is gathered toward the player.

  The protruding edge portion 714b is formed with a constant vertical thickness and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714. The inclined surface portion 714c receives light incident from below the light guide member 714 in front. Although it functions to emit light toward the side, details will be described later.

  The displacement restricting member 716 is formed from a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and protrudes from the lower surface with a plurality of insertion holes 716a that are pierced through the fastening screws. A plurality of projecting pins 716b, a plurality of receiving cylinder portions 716c formed in a cylindrical shape vertically penetrating at positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and an inner shape of a lower edge portion of the receiving cylinder portion 716c And a plurality of recessed portions 716d configured to accept the protruding edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714.

  The receiving cylinder portion 716c has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light transmitting hole 709 in top view, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, since the recessed depth of the recessed portion 716d is equal to the thickness dimension of the protruding edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714, in the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 40), The upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716 (the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) can be stably supported by the surface so as to sandwich the protruding edge portion 714b.

  The overhanging edge portion 714b is overhanging on the left and right sides and the front side, and is not formed on the back side. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 is also recessed on the left and right sides and the front side, and the recessed portion on the back side is omitted. Thereby, it can prevent that the light guide member 714 is assembled | attached in the front-back reverse direction.

  That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the reverse direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is to be assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b is misaligned. The portion 714 b cannot be inserted, and the overhang edge portion 714 b overhangs from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. A gap corresponding to the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b is generated between the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716, making it difficult to fasten and fix the assembly operator (or an automatic machine for assembly). It can be noted that the light guide member 714 is in the reverse direction.

  In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the protruding edge portion 714b is sandwiched between the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 712 in the vertical direction, thereby stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714. Fixed.

  A procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the electric decoration board 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b and disposed at the fastening position, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like member 702. Next, the constituent members are arranged in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716 above the electrical decoration substrate 705.

  At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-like member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar projecting portion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the projecting pin 716b is passed through the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712c. Thus, the displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Further, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716 by passing the main body 714a through the receiving cylinder 716c. As described above, since the constituent members are relatively positioned before the fastening screw is screwed in, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the operation of screwing the fastening screw.

  Finally, each component member can be fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 716a and screwing it into the fastening portion 710b and the columnar protruding portion 703b. According to the present embodiment, since each component member disposed above the electrical decoration substrate 705 is placed at an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, thus simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the screwing process of the fastening screw (use of an automatic machine for screw turning).

  In this embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be removed when the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protruding portion 703b, but the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the fastening portion 710b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

  Thus, while the light guide member 714 is placed on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially the same as the structure in which the light guide member 714 is placed on the partition member 708. The light guide member 714 is rigid due to the rigidity of the partition member 708. The support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

  In addition, since the vertical distance between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced with the thin film cover member 712 interposed therebetween, light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be prevented. Can be planned.

  Returning to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. The cover member 720 is a member made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base member 701. A plurality of coupling portions 721 used for coupling, a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and the rear side A plurality of front through holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) as a pair of left and right pairs on the front side of the through holes 722, and the rear side left and right outer portions of the rear through holes 722 And a plurality of projecting pressing portions 724 that project downward from the front left and right inner portions.

  The coupling portion 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a drilled so that fastening screws can be inserted from above, a plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws inserted from below into the base member 701 are screwed, and left and right outer sides And a plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c that are formed in a hook shape on the back surface and are engaged with the base member 701.

  The rear side through-hole 722 differs in the vertical position of the lower edge portion at four positions closer to the center and four positions closer to the left and right. In the present embodiment, the portion closer to the center is formed higher. This is due to the design of the upper surface shape of the cover member 720. That is, the upper and lower positions of the lower edge portion of the rear through-hole 722 are curved upward so that a portion near the center is raised so as to give the top surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect. Has been adjusted.

  The protruding pressing portion 724 has a protruding length adjusted so as to partially cancel the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722. That is, the protruding pressing portion 724 disposed closer to the center lengthens the protruding length, thereby adjusting the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 equally on the left and right. Note that the front-side protruding pressing part 724 and the rear-side protruding pressing part 724 are both disposed at positions overlapping the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 in the vertical direction. Even if the posture is broken, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can be prevented from falling off the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  In the present embodiment, the upper and lower positions of the lower end portion of the projecting pressing portion 724 on the back side are arranged below the lower position of the lower end portion of the protruding pressing portion 724 on the front side. Thereby, even if the hollow member 740 is in contact with the protruding pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the backward tilted posture. Thereby, it is possible to easily show the shape and pattern of the front side of the cylindrical main body 741 of the hollow member 740 to the player who views the hollow member 740 as viewed from the front side.

  The plate-like displacement member 730 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a receiving recess 702b formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720. More than a pair of pivoted support parts 731 that are coaxially projected from both left and right ends in a circular cross section, a light transmission hole 732 that is drilled in a vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and a pivoted support part 731. A plurality of light guides drilled in the vertical direction with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 and the pair of loaded parts 733 that extend in a plate shape to the front side to receive a push-up load from below. An insertion hole 734, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 arranged in a pair on the diagonal line of the light guide insertion hole 734 and projecting in a ring shape when viewed from above, and the center of the front through-hole 723 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above Top view ring placed in position Jo in and a plurality of large-receiving portion 736 to be projected.

  FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-like displacement member 730. The loaded portion 733 is disposed on the front side of the rotating shaft passing through the center of the pivoted support portion 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to the left and right, respectively, and a load is applied from below.

  The plate-like displacement member 730 is different in the mode of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether load is applied to only one side or both sides, load with a short time interval) Depending on whether a constant load is applied or a continuous load is applied, etc.), the rotational displacement about the pivoted support portion 731 is different in a different manner. Details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is perforated with a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially turtle shell shape) in the front and rear, and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. .

  That is, the shift between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is reduced as the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center (matched in this embodiment), and the longer direction is closer to the left and right center toward the left and right ends. The direction is inclined in the direction.

  That is, the elongate direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set in a direction inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the angle of the inclination is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle increment is constant (about 5 degrees).

  The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the hollow member 740, and is disposed symmetrically with respect to the center line CL <b> 1 passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the plate-like displacement member 730. The relationship with respect to the longitudinal direction of the insertion hole 734 (the angle between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

  As a result, the second operating unit 700 is assembled while the plurality of hollow members 740 disposed on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while the hollow member 740 disposed on the other side is symmetrical). The posture of the hollow member 740 in (see FIG. 40) can be varied.

  That is, as in the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is reduced as the hollow member 740 is closer to the center, and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side and the closer to the center. The direction is inclined in the direction.

  In other words, the longitudinal direction of the hollow member 740 is set to a direction inclined toward the left and right center toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle increment is constant (about 5 degrees).

  The pair of small receiving portions 735 are disposed on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and are formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a circular cross section with a circular cross section, and are disposed on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and have a circular cross section. And a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape.

  In this embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the diameter of the cross section of the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is designed to be 3 [mm], the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is designed to be 4.8 [mm], and the rear small The diameter of the inner cylinder of the receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

  In other words, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed such that the gap between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 is smaller than the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar shape. This is smaller than the gap size with the portion 743.

  Thereby, order can be given to the displacement aspect of the hollow member 740 supported allowing rattling. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational displacement with the front small receiving portion 735a as the axis can be made easier to occur than the rotational displacement with the rear small receiving portion 735b as the axis.

  In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, but the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily shifted in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. The direction of the displacement of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, which will be described later, can be adjusted in a direction that expands to the left and right sides toward the back side.

  The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that supports the variable decorative member 750 while allowing rattling, and is larger than the large receiving portion 736 that is disposed on the center line CL1. The part 736 is formed so that the distance from the rotation axis passing through the center of the pivoted support part 731 is longer and the vertical position is also different, which will be described in detail later.

  Returning to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the left side and four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the right side are configured in a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 will be described in detail, and the description of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left side will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is disposed so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714, thereby shielding the light leaking from the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714 from being visible (difficult) to the player. In addition, it is a member configured to collect the player's line of sight at the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 that is easy to visually recognize the light, and has a long crystal shape (substantially oval shape, substantially turtle shell shape) in front and rear. A cylindrical main body 741 formed into a cylindrical shape whose frame is designed and opened up and down, and a flat plate extending portion 742 extending in a flat plate shape from the lower edge of the cylindrical main body 741 in the front-rear and left-right directions, And a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 projecting in a columnar shape downward from the lower surface of the flat plate extending portion 742.

  The outer shape of the cylindrical main body portion 741 in a top view is formed slightly smaller than the inner shape in a top view of the rear side through-hole 722 of the cover member 720, while the outer shape in a top view of the flat plate extending portion 742 is the cover member. 720 is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the rear through-hole 722 when viewed from above. That is, in the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is pulled out above the cover member 720 while being vertically displaceable while being inserted into the rear through hole 722. Is regulated.

  The upper edge of the cylindrical main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. Thereby, the light which reached the upper end part of the light guide member 714 can be radiated | emitted intensively to the front side upper direction. On the other hand, most of the light traveling upward on the back side is blocked by the cylindrical main body 741. Therefore, the light reaching the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 can be delivered to the player's eyes well, and the light reaching the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third symbol display device 81 in a large amount. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from deteriorating.

  The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion in which the upward displacement is restricted by the protruding pressing portion 724 (see FIG. 45). In other words, the protruding pressing portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the protruding columnar portion 743 on the back side, and restricts the upward displacement of the hollow member 740. Thus, even if the hollow member 740 changes its posture by forming the protruding pressing portion 724 and the protruding columnar portion 743 at the corresponding positions, the protruding columnar portion 743 is a plate-like displacement member. The hollow member 740 can be stably supported since it can be prevented from coming out of the small receiving portion 735 of 730.

  The protruding columnar portion 743 has a protruding tip formed in a hemispherical shape, and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-like displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (See FIG. 40), it is received by the small receiving portion 735.

  The pair of projecting columnar parts 743 and the cylindrical main body part 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetric, so that the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 can be changed when assembled reversely in the front-rear direction. It is possible to prevent erroneous mounting. Since the four hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right sides are formed in a symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 assembled on the left side from the left and right center position from being assembled on the right side. (Accidental prevention can be prevented).

  Here, the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis centering in the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-like displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar portion 743 is mainly displaced by the vertical displacement allowed by the hollow member 740. However, since the projecting tip of the projecting columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the displacement aspect of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is demonstrated.

  49A, 49B, and 49C are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-like displacement member 730, and the hollow member 740 taken along line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 49A illustrates the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-like displacement member 730, FIG. 49B illustrates the horizontal posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, and FIG. The upper end posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated. The horizontal posture corresponds to a posture in which the plate-like displacement member 730 rotates (rises up) about 2.1 degrees around the reference O1 from the lower end posture, and the upper end posture changes from the horizontal posture to the plate-like displacement member. Reference numeral 730 corresponds to a posture rotated (raised up and displaced) by about 4 degrees around the reference O1.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the drive unit 760 is not in operation, the posture in which the plate-like displacement member 730 tilts forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture (lower end posture (initial posture)) ), The plate-like displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, the rear small receiving portion 735b is recessed deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, thereby supporting the front small receiving portion 735a in the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-like displacement member 730 ( The vertical displacement of the support position (bottom portion) of the bottom portion and the rear small receiving portion 735b is suppressed.

  Thereby, it can prevent that the attitude | position of the hollow member 740 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 of a lower end attitude | position (initial attitude | position) becomes a forward inclination attitude | position. Further, the hollow member 740 is configured such that the surfaces of the support positions (bottom portions) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-like displacement member 730. Even if is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

  Therefore, for example, even when the hollow member 740 is displaced due to a load generated when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, the position of the hollow member 740 is set closer to the front (initial position) before the operation of the drive unit 760. Can be stably maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 49B, in the horizontal posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 both in the front and rear. . Therefore, for example, when the plate-like displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 is easily displaced in the front-rear and left-right directions.

  As shown in FIG. 49C, in the process in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced to the upper end posture, the projecting columnar portion 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 contacts the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed to the rear side. Is advanced.

  Therefore, for example, when the plate-like displacement member 730 slightly vibrates on the basis of the upper end posture (in the vicinity of the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is centered on the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. Is easily rotationally displaced. That is, the displacement mode that is likely to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed corresponding to the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 that is a reference for small vibration.

  A light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the cylindrical main body portion 741, and the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 are supported by being received by the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-like displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described first.

  Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-like displacement member 730, it is displaced following the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730. Since the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced around the reference O1 that is a straight line connecting the pivoted support portions 731 (straight line facing the left-right direction), the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (left-right direction). Instead, it is displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1. Accordingly, the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also prompted to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

  The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 has not only a displacement on the plane orthogonal to the reference O1 but also a displacement in the front-rear and left-right directions (horizontal direction) in accordance with the change in the degree of inclination described above. Posture change is allowed.

  Since the arrangement of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-like displacement member 730 is symmetric with respect to the center line CL1, the change in the degree of inclination is also symmetric with respect to the center line CL1, so that the hollow member The displacement or posture change in the front / rear / right / left direction (horizontal direction) of 740 can be generated symmetrically.

  In addition, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side close to the center line CL1 (center side). Is different from the change in the degree of inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side farther from the center line CL1 (outside left and right). In this embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in inclination of the pair of left and right small receiving portions 735 having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. This is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). Thereby, the attitude | position change amount of the hollow member 740 in case the plate-shaped displacement member 730 displaces in a fixed aspect can be changed in the side close | similar to the centerline CL1, or a far side.

  The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress the resistance at the time of displacement of the hollow member 740, the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 and the hollow member 740 are arranged in a dimensional relationship in which a gap is generated between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714. The shape and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed.

  Here, the design gap differs between the long direction of the light guide member 714 in the top view and the direction orthogonal to the long direction. That is, the gap in the long direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the long direction.

  Therefore, as the inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the longitudinal direction in the top view of the light guide member 714 becomes larger (as arranged on the left and right outer sides), the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 The gap in the front-rear direction between the two is narrowed.

  Therefore, if the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-rear direction along with the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right outer sides is pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or large There is a possibility that the load may be easily applied and may be damaged. On the other hand, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set in advance as a countermeasure, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of concealing the player's line of sight at the distal end portion of the light guide member 714 by shielding the portion other than the distal end portion of the light guide member 714 with the hollow member 740 is diminished.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left-right center side. It is configured as follows.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the plurality of small receiving portions 735 are disposed on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 disposed on the left and right outer sides are closer to the left and right central sides. Compared to the provided small receiving portion 735, the front-rear receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 are disposed so that the distance in the front-rear direction is shorter.

  As a result, the longitudinal displacement of the hollow member 740 that is pushed forward and displaced rearward due to the backward displacement of the small receiving portion 735 on the front side in accordance with the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 is disposed on the left and right center side. Compared to the members, the members disposed on the left and right outer sides can be geometrically defined so as to be slightly smaller.

  In the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, the gaps between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 are configured to be substantially equal in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel to the horizontal direction. Even if it moves, it is provided so as not to fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740.

  Therefore, in a state where the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or swings the pachinko machine 10, and external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced in this case, the displacement is suppressed to be less than the gap size between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

  Along with the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes in a top view. The possibility that the hollow member 740 is displaced in the front-rear direction while the center of the protruding columnar portion 743 of the member 740 is coincident is low.

  Since the arrangement of the protruding columnar portion 743 relative to the small receiving portion 735 changes at least in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743, the displacement or posture of the hollow member 740 in the left-right direction is accompanied by this change. Changes can occur.

  A mode of pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, the front side portion of the inner side surface of the front small receiving portion 735 a (small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large) is the protruding columnar portion 743. It starts to contact the front side surface and is pushed to the back side.

  At this time, a gap is maintained between the front portion of the inner side surface of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the front surface portion of the protruding columnar portion 743 due to the dimensional relationship described above. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction around the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. Due to the displacement using the rattling, it is possible to cope with the change in the interval between the small receiving portions 735 in the top view.

  In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 to the back side, and the small receiving portion that only allows rotational displacement about the front projecting columnar portion 743 as the rear small receiving portion. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735 b and the protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, even when the hollow member 740 collides with the light guide member 714 during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 using the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 as a drive source, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated between the light guide member 714 and the light guide member 714 can be suppressed, the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped.

  Returning to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. The variable decorative member 750 is a bifurcated support member 751 supported between the cover member 720 and the plate-like displacement member 730, and a decorative member 756 that is fastened and fixed to the bifurcated support member 751 and disposed above the cover member 720. With.

  The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting in a columnar shape downward from the lower surface of the center portion of the plate-shaped main body portion formed in a left and right elongated plate shape, and left and right end portions of the plate-shaped main body portion. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 753 (different lengths) projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the plate, and a plate-shaped extending portion extending in a plate shape from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side 754.

  The projecting tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 has a hemispherical shape and is received by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730. The cylindrical projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the front through-hole 723, and the front-side through hole 723 allows the bifurcated support member 751 to be displaced in the vertical direction. It is rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of 731. Accordingly, although the displacement directions are different from each other, the projecting tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance in accordance with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. it can.

  The plate-like extension part 754 acts so that the position of the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 is arranged on the back side with respect to the center of the columnar protrusion part 752. That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stabilized by its own weight can be set to the backward tilt posture. As a result, the contact position between the columnar projecting portion 752 and the plate-like displacement member 730 when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the initial posture is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without being inclined. Since it can be brought closer to the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 in the vicinity of the position change start time of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be increased.

  The decorative member 756 includes a pair of projecting leg portions 757 projecting downward corresponding to the cylindrical projecting portion 753, and a female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg portion 757. The protruding leg portion 757 is inserted inside the cylindrical protruding portion 753.

  The plate-like main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the cylindrical protruding portion 753. The bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 757 are fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the projecting leg 757.

  An assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the cylindrical projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from the lower side, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the cylindrical projecting portion 753 to project. A fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg 757.

  Next, the plate-like displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. When the cover member 720 is assembled to the base member 701, a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above with the hook-like portion 721c engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back side of the plate-like member 702. After the insertion cover member 720 and the base member 701 are fastened and fixed, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 721b upside down.

  Accordingly, a plurality of members are arranged in a non-fixed manner between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and each component member is assembled in the middle of assembly while being configured to screw a fastening screw into a plurality of locations from the lower surface. Can be prevented from falling off between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

  Finally, the drive unit 760 is disposed below the base member 701, and a fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix. In the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the advancing direction of the fastening screw screwed from below and the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310 interfere with each other. It is difficult to remove the fastening screw in the accommodated state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently taken out from the rear case 310 when the front side of the operation unit 300 is illegally opened.

  Further, on the back side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 to which a fastening screw inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 is fastened and fixed is formed. Accordingly, when the second operation unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screws are inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operation unit 700. Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at the stage, the operator can be made aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. Thereby, forgetting to assemble drive unit 760 can be controlled.

  FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, the drive unit 760 arrange | positioned by the front view right side is illustrated. The drive unit 760 is slightly different in appearance, but the components are symmetrical. Therefore, the right drive unit 760 will be described in detail, and the description of the left drive unit 760 will be omitted.

  The drive unit 760 is made of a load member 761 configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-like displacement member 730 and a metal (in this embodiment, made of brass) that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761. A shaft rod portion 762 formed in a columnar shape, a support case 763 in which the shaft rod portion 762 is fixed and configured as a case, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 disposed inside the support case 763, and a support A front lid member 770 is provided on the front side of the case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763, and an electric decoration board 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770.

  The load member 761 is made of a resin material, and extends substantially outwardly from the base end portion 761a in which a through hole through which the shaft rod portion 762 is inserted is formed. A bar-like extension part 761b formed to be bent in a U-shape, a vertical bar-like extension part 761c formed in a bar-like shape bent upward from the extension tip of the bar-like extension part 761b, and a bar-like extension An extension portion 761d extending from the extension tip of the extension portion 761b along the extension direction of the rod-like extension portion 761b, and the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the extension portion 761d and the rod-like extension portion 761b The curved part 761e of the front cover member 770 formed in the circular arc shape and the opposing curved part 761e opposingly arranged is provided.

  A metal (magnetic body) metal plate member MB2 is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-like extending portion 761b. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-like extending portion 761b by engagement with an elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

  More specifically, rail portions for guiding the longitudinal slide of the metal plate member MB2 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (Only the back side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB2 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2. When the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. Thus, the slide is restricted, and the pressing of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released at that position (the plate is raised to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw is moved to the metal plate member MB2. Engage so as to restrict the retreat of the back to the back side.

  Note that the method for fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-like extending portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-like extending portion 761b, may be attached with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

  The front lid member 770 has a projecting frame portion 771 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting projections projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion 771. From the rear surface of the plate, a cylindrical portion 772, a wiring through recess 773 that is recessed so that an electrical wiring connected to the electrical decoration board 777 at the lower edge or a connector connected to an end of the electrical wiring can be passed. A curved projecting portion 774 projecting in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762.

  The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to be opposed to the periphery of the electric decoration board 777, and is a part that prevents the electric decoration board 777 from being loaded from above, below, right and left directions.

  The protruding cylindrical portion 772 includes a bowl-like seat portion in front view and a small-diameter insertion portion further protruding from the seat portion so that the insertion portion is inserted into the through hole 779 of the electrical decoration board 777. By assembling, the back surface of the electric decoration board 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the electric decoration board 777 can be stabilized. The seat portion is provided with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed, and the electric circuit board 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion.

  The electrical decoration board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like disposed at positions designed in consideration of production, and a plurality of through holes 779 perforated in the electrical decoration board 777 for assembly. With.

  The through-holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment) as a pair of circular through-holes corresponding to the insertion portion of the protruding column portion 772 and the female screw portion.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical decoration board 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is, this corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 and the electrical decoration board 777 arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are configured as a single rigid body. Therefore, the electric decoration board 777 can be easily vibrated by the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is vibrated by the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Can be configured.

  In the present embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is disposed between the load member 761 displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved projecting portion 774, it is possible to prevent vibration from being excessively transmitted.

  The width dimension of the curved projecting portion 774 can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the setting of the width dimension of the curved projecting portion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is vibrated or not maintained. In the former case, the width dimension may be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension may be increased.

  The support case 763 includes a lower restriction portion 764 disposed below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, an upper restriction portion 765 disposed on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the back case 310. And a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) is screwed.

  The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51A), but a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generates metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and displaced upward.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the ascending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force rising and the descending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and descending due to its own weight. The plate-like displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives a load from the load member 761 is displaced in the rotational direction around the pivoted support portion 731. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are front views of the drive unit 760. FIG. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the illustration of the front lid member 770 and the electrical decoration board 777 is omitted except for the curved projecting portion 774, and the outer shape of the curved projecting portion 774 is an imaginary line. Illustrated.

  Further, FIG. 51A shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 761 is placed in the lowered position under its own weight. In FIG. 51B, current is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the generated electromagnetic force and the load member 761 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the load member 761 is in contact with the lower restricting portion 764 in the lowered position and restricted in downward displacement, and is in contact with the upper restricting portion 765 in the raised position. Restricted upward displacement.

  Here, the lower restricting portion 764 and the upper restricting portion 765 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distances from the shaft rod portion 762) with respect to the shaft rod portion 762, and effects produced thereby will be described. .

  First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 764 via the load member 761 is a load mainly generated by the weight of the load member 761, the load member 761 is stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. can do. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is disposed at the center of gravity of the load member 761.

  In the description of the window movable unit 150 described above, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the center of gravity is assumed to be the substantially central position of the member. However, the load member 761 is a rod-like extending portion. Since the vertical rod-like extending portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend from the extending tip end side of the 761b in a bifurcated manner, the position of the center of gravity is arranged closer to the extending tip side than the substantially central position of the rod-like extending portion 761b. .

  In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower regulating portion 764 is disposed closer to the extending distal end side than the substantially central position of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b as a position corresponding to the gravity center position of the load member 761. .

  On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper restricting portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly a load caused by a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the upper restricting portion 765 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761. There are few advantages related to location. In the present embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper restricting portion 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by disposing the upper restricting portion 765 so as to oppose the rotation tip of the load member 761.

  That is, when a force moment of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is at a position away from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is long). Since it becomes small, the load transmitted to the upper side control part 765 can be reduced.

  As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 765 occurs at the rotating front end portion of the load member 761. Therefore, in this embodiment, the overhang portion 761d further extends from the extended front end of the rod-like extended portion 761b. A circle centering on the shaft rod portion 762 projects to the outer diameter side, and the projecting portion 761d abuts on the upper regulating member 765. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and to stably generate the load transmission on the rotating front end side.

  In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761, but is configured to be pulled up by an attractive force. That is, the load member 761 is pulled up by the magnetic force generated in the iron core disposed in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 attracting the metal plate member MB2.

  According to this configuration, even when the load member 761 is displaced by a load applied to the load member 761 as compared with a configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by a member that moves by electromagnetic force, an overload (locally) Therefore, it is easy to avoid damage to the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Thereby, even if it is the structure which receives the load which the load member 761 fluctuates like this embodiment, the service life of electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the load member 761, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (predetermined to the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state where the attracting force is received from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (upward position). The surface is configured to provide a gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body (portion in which the coil is built) of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and is in contact with the surface described above. The upper restricting portion 765 and the overhanging portion 761d are configured to contact each other on the surface parallel to the surface.

  This prevents the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, thereby avoiding overloading the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and reducing the load caused by the electromagnetic force from the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The lower edge portion and the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper restricting portion 765 can be dispersed and received. It can be avoided that a large load is generated locally.

  In addition, at the ascending position of the load member 761, a gap is formed not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. The load from the load member 761 may be received only by the upper regulating portion 765. In this case, since the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be interrupted, the durability of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be improved.

  In this case, since the load tends to concentrate on the overhang portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhang portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhang portion 761d is broken (broken). Even in this case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, it is possible to avoid load concentration at one point. .

  Further, in this case, when the overhanging portion 761d is broken (broken), the metal plate member MB2 comes into contact with the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points, so that a detection sensor is separately configured to detect this contact. Thus, it is possible to easily determine the breakage (breakage) of the overhang portion 761d.

  Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the raised position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 will rebound after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the arrangement and posture of the upper restricting portion 765 can be designed only considering the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper restricting portion 765 (the straight line passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762 and the width of the upper restricting portion 765). The angle with the straight line along the direction can be designed to be small).

  On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower restricting portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower restricting portion 764 and passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the lower restricting portion 764 Compared with the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line, the direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed (force decomposition). Thereby, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower side regulation part 764 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed with a longer width dimension (width along the radial direction), it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the load, and due to the load due to the weight of the load member 761. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulating portion 764 can be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower restricting portion 764 and the upper restricting portion 765 via the load member 761 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the material of the upper side control part 765 and the lower side control part 764 is not limited at all. For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane, and epoxy resin, and rubber materials may be used. Further, the upper restricting portion 765 and the lower restricting portion 764 may be made of the same material or different materials.

  For example, when the load member 761 can receive from the plate-like displacement member 730 at the ascending position, the upper restricting portion 765 has a function of suppressing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761. As a material of the upper restricting portion 765, not only a damping property but also a material or a structure excellent in frictional resistance may be adopted.

  In this case, the load member 761 is displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction) by the load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730 to the load member 761, particularly in a state where the overhanging portion 761 d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other. This can be easily prevented.

  When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposing curved portion 761e displaces the back side of the curved projecting portion 774. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side, and the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 are merely slid along the rotational direction, so that the resistance of rotational displacement can be reduced.

  In addition, by forming the opposing curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above it. In the present embodiment, a vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is disposed in the secured space.

  The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposing curved portion 761e that is formed to be curved, it extends straight in a front view. That is, it is formed in a bar shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in a state where the load member 761 is disposed at the raised position.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that the load member 761 bends and deform | transforms right and left with the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front-end | tip of the load member 761 carries out an upward displacement while being slightly displaced right and left like this embodiment. Even if it is a structure, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be pushed up stably. The load received from the plate-like displacement member 730 and the support mode will be described later.

  The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is formed in a bar shape that extends straight in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, but in the side view, the upper end is positioned on the front side rather than the lower end. It is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left side of the rod portion 762.

  As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 below the vicinity of the shaft rod portion 762 can be moved to the back side, and the arrangement area of the members arranged on the front side can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the electric decoration board 777 can be moved to the back side, the gap between the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the electric decoration board 777 is separated from the light emitting means 778 and the flow surface configuration. It is possible to make the light visually recognized through the members 91 and 92 easily visible as a wide light. In other words, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize by surface light emission in which light reaches a circular shape around the optical axis and shines in a planar shape, instead of the point light emission visually recognized by the size of the outer shape of the LED.

  Furthermore, since the load member 761 can be easily bent back and forth due to the load received from the plate-like displacement member 730, when the plate-like displacement member 730 is supported by the single load member 761, there is a local overload. Even if it occurs, the load can be released by the load member 761 being bent and deformed. Thereby, durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the ease of bending of the load member 761 different from front to back and left and right, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-like displacement member 730 and improve the durability of the load member 761. The effect that it is possible can be produced.

  When the load member 761 is disposed at the raised position, an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 at the left and right ends of the load member 761. It is supported stably by.

  Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-like displacement member 730, the stable support from the base end portion 761a to the overhang portion 761d does not change. The range in which the bending occurs can be limited to the vertical bar extending portion 761c.

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole by the load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from rubbing against other members, thereby damaging the member or requiring an extra driving force for driving the load member 761.

<Operation of Second Operation Unit 700>
An operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700, the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right, and accordingly, the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-like displacement member 730 is accompanied. Also, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is configured to be different. Below, the displacement aspect of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is demonstrated first, and then the displacement aspect of the variable decoration member 750 and the hollow member 740 is demonstrated.

  52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operation unit 700. FIG. FIG. 52 illustrates a state in which the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both disposed at the lowered position, and FIG. 53 illustrates that only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 is disposed at the lowered position, The state where the load member 761 of the unit 760 is displaced upward from the lowered position to the raised position is illustrated, and in FIG. 54, the state where both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are disposed at the raised position is illustrated. .

  The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (non-excited state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is the lower end posture (initially maintained by the contact with the base member 701). Posture).

  The state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state (one-side excitation state) in which current is controlled to flow through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side). In this state, when the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 is pushed up by the right load member 761, the plate-like displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and assumes a midway posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced from the horizontal posture by about 1.3 degrees in the midway posture.

  In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 or the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-like displacement member 730 is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In this embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in a thin rod shape and is bent in the front-rear direction, and is configured to bend easily in the short direction (front-rear direction). The hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 are formed with such a strength (rigidity) that they can be bent and deformed by their own weight.

  In the present embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decoration member 750 on the plate-like displacement member 730 is applied in the direction including the front-rear direction component at the contact position with the load member 761. The load member 761 is configured to be easily bent and deformed (see FIG. 55), and the load can be released by the bending deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which the load member 761 is bent and deformed.

  The difference in the posture in the rising direction of the plate-like displacement member 730 between the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below can be described as being due to the degree of deflection of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic coefficient of the load member 761, the difference in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be designed. Note that the elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be the same on the left and right, or may be different.

  In this embodiment, since the shape of the load member 761 of the left and right drive units 760 is symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (FIG. 50) of the left drive unit 760 is reversed as shown in FIG. Even if the current is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760, the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is equivalent to the posture shown in FIG. Therefore, in the following, the state shown in FIG. 53 is referred to as a one-side excitation state, and the description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical is omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-like displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of the own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-like displacement member 730 is reduced by half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. 53, in addition to the load member 761 on the left side being disposed at the raised position, the load member due to the load applied via the plate-like displacement member 730 The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

  55A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-like displacement member 730 is divided into two parts. The plate-like displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the bending deformation 761 is small (the bending deformation is approximately half).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55A, when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is excited, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-like displacement member 730 is the load member 761 on one side. Concentrate on. Since the bending deformation generated in the load member 761 due to this load increases, even when the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same, the rising displacement amount of the plate-like displacement member 730 is suppressed by the amount of the bending deformation.

  In the present embodiment, the plate-like displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. In a state where the plate-like displacement member 730 is supported by the restricting protrusion 702c (initial posture, illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 55A), from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730. The extending normal line contacts the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending downward in the back direction.

  In other words, the load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the direction in which the longitudinal bar-like extending portion 761c extends, so that bending deformation generated in the load member 761 can be suppressed to a small level. . Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  On the other hand, in the midway posture (see FIG. 55A), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 is lower in the front direction than the reference O1 in the front direction. In contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760.

  In other words, since the displacement of the load member 761 increases, the deflection deformation amount of the load member 761 tends to increase, and in the vicinity of the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55A), the load member 761 is directed toward the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. Is provided with a front direction component and a downward direction component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction of rising and tilting toward the front, the load having a front direction component and a downward component acts as a load that causes the load member 761 to bend and deform. To do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 but also for the deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deformation of the load member 761). Will gradually increase).

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the ease of bending deformation of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes as the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 changes. That is, in the posture where the load starts to be applied from the load member 761 to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)), a rear load is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is less likely to bend and deform, and from the horizontal posture, A load (a downward load or a load on the front side) is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to bend and deform than the direction of the rear load.

  As a result, even when the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761 and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly, the shape of the vertically extending portion 761c) and the load Depending on the design of the portion 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to be bent (the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted, so the second operation when the drive unit 760 is driven. The operation mode of the unit 700 can be designed differently.

  In the present embodiment, since the vertical bar-like extension part 761c is shaped to extend upward while projecting to the front side, the vertical bar-like extension part 761c can be bent and deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is bent and deformed (deformed in a forward tilt direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of the own weight transmitted through the plate-like displacement member 730 can be used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 from the stage before the plate-like displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture.

  As described above, the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-like displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced by the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761. Even if the member 761 is excessively displaced or insufficiently displaced, fluctuations occurring in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be reduced.

  For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 directly affect the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are not precisely designed, the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, since high accuracy is required in both the member manufacturing stage and the assembly stage, the manufacturing cost increases.

  On the other hand, when the load member 761 is bent and deformed, even if a difference in displacement amount of the load member 761 or a difference in height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 occurs, the load member 761 is designed to cancel out by the bending deformation of the load member 761. By doing so, the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be stabilized. For this reason, the accuracy of the manufacturing stage and the assembly stage required to stabilize the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be kept low, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  This is not the case with only the load member 761 alone, but the same can be said for the displacement in which the left and right load members 761 are combined. That is, when the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are configured to be bilaterally symmetric as in the present embodiment, the left and right drive units 760 use the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the upper end portion of the load member 761. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761.

  Thereby, the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 in the one-side excitation state can be stabilized in the middle posture regardless of which one of the left and right drive units 760 is driven.

  Moreover, the direction of the bending which arises in the load member 761 by the load given to the load member 761 via the to-be-loaded part 733 can be limited to the front side. This direction coincides with the direction of positional deviation in the front-rear direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extending part 761c with respect to the bar-shaped extending part 761b. Thereby, it can comprise so that the load which produces a bending deformation to the load member 761 may face the direction away from the rod-shaped extension part 761b.

  Accordingly, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the influence that the rod-shaped extending portion 761 b receives due to the load applied from the loaded portion 733. Can be reduced. In other words, the influence given to the load member 761 can be suppressed in the vicinity of the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.

  That is, rubbing and deformation occurring in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved projecting portion 774 and the opposing curved portion 761e). Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the bending deformation mode of the load member 761, so the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement mode design of the plate-like displacement member 730 are premised on the assumption that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. Can be easy.

  In addition, the direction of bending that occurs in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (the same part can be prevented from bending to the front side or to the back side depending on the situation. Therefore, the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761 can be related on a one-to-one basis, and the durability of the load member 761 can be compared to the case where it can bend in the front and rear sides. Can be improved.

  55 (a) and 55 (b), the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c, and both the load members 761 are in the raised position. (See FIG. 51 (b)).

  Therefore, as described above, the longitudinal displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 due to the bending deformation of the vertically extending portion 761c occurs between the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed by friction.

  Therefore, even when the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is controlled to be repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in an excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is set in an excited state. The control mode repeatedly switching between the non-excited state) and the displacement of the load member 761 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

  This can be satisfactorily realized by a configuration in which the load member 761 is supported not only by the shaft rod portion 762 but by the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 as in the present embodiment. More specifically, it is not an aspect of receiving a load from the plate-like displacement member 730 with the load member 761 disposed between the lowered position and the raised position, but the plate-like displacement with the load member 761 fixed at the raised position. It can be satisfactorily realized because of the aspect of receiving the load from the member 730.

  That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the portion on the shaft rod portion 762 side such as the base end portion 761a and the rod-like extension portion 761b with respect to the longitudinal component of the load from the plate-like displacement member 730 is used. However, if the rod-like extending portion 761b is twisted or displaced in the front-rear direction due to a load from the plate-like displacement member 730, a gap is generated between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. there is a possibility.

  When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance for effectively generating the electromagnetic force, the electromagnetic force is suddenly weakened and it is difficult to maintain the load member 761 at the raised position. As a countermeasure, it is possible to take measures by increasing the rigidity of the rod-like extending portion 761b or increasing the resistance between the shaft rod portion 762 and the load member 761, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavy. In the latter case, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased in size, and an excessive driving force for rotating the load member 761 is required, which leads to an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-like extending portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably supported not only at the shaft rod portion 762 but also at both left and right positions of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 765. I support it. Thereby, in addition to being able to suppress the torsional deformation of the rod-like extending portion 761b as compared with the case where it is supported on the left and right sides, the axial displacement of the load member 761 is reduced by the frictional resistance generated with the upper restricting portion 765. Can be suppressed.

  Therefore, when controlling so that bending and cancellation | release of the vertical bar-shaped extension part 761c repeatedly occur, without enlarging electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, it suppresses that the load member 761 displaces in the front-back direction as a whole. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-like extending portion 761b from the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the torsional deformation of the rod-like extending portion 761b can be prevented by the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2.

  Returning to FIG. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state (excitation state) in which a current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the loaded portions 733 on both the left and right sides of the plate-like displacement member 730 are pushed up by the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, so that the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is changed in the rising direction and is in the upper end posture. . In the present embodiment, in the upper end posture, the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced about 2.7 degrees from the midway posture (about 6.1 degrees from the lower end posture, and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

  In the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 or variable decoration member 750 riding on it is divided into the left and right load members 761. By doing so, the bending which arises in the load member 761 is relieved.

  In FIG. 54, for convenience, the left and right load members 761 are illustrated as being so small that the deflection cannot be determined. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the shape of the load member 761 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the plate-like displacement member 730 has a plurality of postures (at least three). Can be switched.

  In order to switch the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. 54, the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is maintained while the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is maintained. Since it is only necessary to excite SOL2, it is possible to easily switch the posture.

  56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a), and 57 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a change in time of conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and a change in posture of the plate-like displacement member 730. FIG. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the left electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the middle timing chart shows the right electromagnetic solenoid. The conduction state of SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  Although the plate-like displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the electrical conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference is generated), FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are intended to facilitate understanding. For convenience, the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated as being displaced simultaneously with the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

  The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are switched alternately. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56 (b) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are switched alternately. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are switched alternately.

  The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is alternately between the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53, and the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. The mode to be switched is the same as the mode to be repeated.

  As described above, the state switching patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 are not limited to a single pattern, but are generated in a plurality of ways by changing the combination of conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

  Therefore, a plurality of patterns for changing the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 are generated. Therefore, the displacement patterns of the hollow member 740 and the variable decoration member 750 (see FIG. 43) riding on the plate-like displacement member 730 are generated. Can be configured in a plurality of ways, details will be described later.

  In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a), and 57 (b), the short-time conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown constant for convenience. This is just an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set apart, or may be configured to gradually increase or decrease gradually, and can be arbitrarily set.

  Moreover, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be instantaneously (pulsed), while increasing the conduction length. , Can maintain posture change with sufficient length. Further, by shortening the conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be changed so that the plate-like displacement member 730 vibrates.

  58 is a top view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operation unit 700 is formed in a substantially left-right symmetric shape when viewed from above. In the following, the right part from the symmetry axis will be described in detail, and the description of the left part will be omitted.

  59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, and FIG. 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, and FIG. 62 show the displacement of the second motion unit 700 in time series. In FIG. 59, the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). 60 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, FIG. 61 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position, and FIG. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is illustrated.

  59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of pivoted support portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is illustrated as the reference O1 as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730. The reference O1 is illustrated in the same meaning in the subsequent drawings. 59 to 62, a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated.

  The variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front and rear and right and left is a gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical projecting portion 753. Is allowed and is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 will be described. In order to facilitate understanding, the change in the posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

  59, FIG. 60, and FIG. 61, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it contacts the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the vertical displacement.

  On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts on the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750, and the load in the front-rear direction Transmission occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is small in the first stage (the posture change from the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730) that occurs mainly in the vertical direction. 59, FIG. 60, and FIG. 61) and a second stage that occurs in a direction that is a combination of the up-down direction and the front-rear direction (a stage in which the posture change from the initial position of the plate-like displacement member 730 is large, FIG. 62). Thereby, the variation of the displacement aspect of the variable decoration member 750 (the center of the left-right direction) can be increased.

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-side excitation state and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state, the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) can be switched by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The displacement mode can be switched by a plurality of variations.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-like main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front side through-hole 723. Accordingly, since the cover member 720 and the plate-like displacement member 730 are not in a relationship of sandwiching the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, generation of a load is suppressed and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. Can do.

  63, 64, 65, and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 63, 64, 65, and 66, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 63, the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). FIG. 64 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position, and FIG. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is illustrated. 63 to 66, a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the variable decorative member 750 on the right side is shown.

  The left and right variable decorative members 750 are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through-hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front-rear and left-right directions is a gap between the front through-hole 723 and the cylindrical projecting portion 753. Is allowed and is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are disposed at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and away from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction than the large receiving portions 736a at the left and right center.

  Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (on the left and right sides) accompanying the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in the posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

  63, 64, and 65, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it contacts the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the vertical displacement.

  On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced to the extent that it abuts on the front side surface of the columnar protruding portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750 (although it is retracted). ), The transmission of load in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of the relationship of pushing further.

  In other words, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed only of the load in the vertical direction. When only the vertical component of the displacement is compared, the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is compared. The displacement amount of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount.

  In this way, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is configured so that the direction is different for each stage, while the variable on both sides in the left-right direction is variable. The displacement of the decorative member 750 occurs mainly in the vertical direction. Thereby, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be made different depending on the degree of the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  As described above, since the displacement in the vertical direction of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is large, as shown in FIG. 66, the bifurcated support that occurred when attention was paid to the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-like main body portion of the member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through-hole 723 disappears, and the plate-like main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through-hole 723 as it is in the front-rear position. It is a dimensional relationship that bites into the cylindrical part.

  In FIG. 66, on the assumption that the plate-like main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 is moved in parallel to the back side by contacting the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through-hole 723. It is shown in the figure.

  Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-like displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-like displacement member 730. Given. Accordingly, the holding force of the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

  Therefore, in the state where the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in an excited state and the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture, the variable decorative member 750 at the left and right center is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Thus, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. Therefore, the state of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 after the plate-like displacement member 730 is set to the upper end posture can be changed.

  That is, the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right is configured to allow a slight displacement as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 (is loosely supported), while the variable decorative member 750 on both the left and right sides is By being configured so as to suppress displacement (stiffly supported), the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right.

  As described above, the vertical displacement associated with the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 is larger in the left and right variable decoration members 750 than in the left and right center variable decoration members 750, and therefore, as the vertical displacement. While the player's attention tends to be gathered on the left and right variable decoration members 750, when the plate-like displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper end position, the player's attention is applied to the left and right center variable decoration members 750. Easy to collect.

  Accordingly, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-like displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end posture, or the posture change is repeated so as not to be held (not stopped) in the upper end posture. The player's line of sight can be easily collected on the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides. Can be easily collected.

  Thereby, when there is a specific light guide member 714 that the player particularly wants to pay attention to among the plurality of light guide members 714, it is easy to collect the player's line of sight on the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 By controlling the drive unit 760 to be driven (by controlling the light emission mode of the light guide member 714 and the drive mode of the drive unit 760 in association with each other), the player's line of sight is specified. Can be collected.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, the direction view of the reference O1 is illustrated, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper end posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated.

  Since the central large receiving portion 736a is disposed above the front side of the reference O1, the longitudinal displacement is smaller than the vertical displacement at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) at which the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. growing.

  Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself associated with the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 is larger than the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged in front of the reference O1 (being arranged on the horizontal line), at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) at which the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. The vertical displacement is larger than the longitudinal displacement.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b are made different by rotationally displacing the plate-like displacement member 730 about the reference O1 center. Can do. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 supported by the large receiving portion 736 so as to be displaceable can be made different between a member arranged at the left and right center and a member arranged at the left and right outer sides.

  68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 68, 69, 70 and 71, the displacement of the second motion unit 700 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 68, the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). 69 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, FIG. 70 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position, and FIG. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is illustrated.

  68 to 71, a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated. As described above, until the middle position of the plate-like displacement member 730 (see FIG. 70), the abutting of the inner side front portion of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the protruding columnar portion 743 does not occur, and the hollow member 740 The displacement is mainly a vertical displacement.

  On the other hand, between the midway posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the upper end posture, the inner side front portion of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 come into contact with each other, and the hollow member 740 after the contact. Is pushed back as the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced. As described above, a time difference can be provided in the start timing between the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 generated by being pushed along with the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the horizontal displacement.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the operation due to the change in the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 as the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced will be described.

  When the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture), the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is the width LH1a, whereas the plate-like displacement member 730 is the upper end posture. In the case of the end posture, the width of light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side changes to the width LH1b (LH1a> LH1b).

  On the other hand, even when the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, the balance between the amount of light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light radiated to the back side can be changed as the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 changes.

  That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-like displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the plate-like displacement member 730 is directed to the player as compared with the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). Since the light becomes weak, the light guide member 714 can be easily viewed (easy to see), and the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 becomes strong in the same comparison, so that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 Can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the line of sight can be drawn to the light guide member 714.

  72 is a cross-sectional view of second operation unit 700 taken along line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705 as described above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

  That is, in this embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705, and the size of the gap is the emission surface (upper end face) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed to the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

  In addition, the light emitted from each individual light emitting unit 706a is emitted toward a different light guide member 714, but the other light guide member 714 (when one individual light emitting unit 706a is focused, its true The light guide members 714 other than the light guide member 714 arranged on the top are prevented from being directed. That is, since the base end sides of the light guide members 714 are divided by the displacement restricting member 716, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the light guide member 714 toward the other light guide members 714 (FIG. 72). See enlarged view).

  Further, although the light guide members 714 are configured to be indirectly connected via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, the light irradiated from the individual light emitting means 706a can be prevented from reaching the other light guide member 714.

  Therefore, in the case where an effect is performed in which the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting unit 706a is different, the light reaches the other light guide member 714 and the other light guide member 714 is seen. The influence can be avoided. In other words, it is possible to prevent an unintended light guide member 714 from emitting light or being viewed through the light guide member 714 in a state where light emitted from separate individual light emitting means 706a is mixed. .

  When light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks out from the gap between the electric decoration board 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the whole light emitting means 706b and made visible to the player. Can do.

  As described above, the second operation unit 700 is displaced in different modes by changing the drive modes (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the drive units 760 respectively disposed on the lower left and right sides of the plate-like displacement member 730. To do.

  For example, when the plate-like displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as the first displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated, so that the plate-like displacement member 730 is reciprocated between the lower end posture and the intermediate posture. Can be made. Further, as a second displacement mode, by keeping one drive unit 760 in an excited state and repeatedly operating the other drive unit 760, the plate-like displacement member 730 is placed between the midway posture and the upper terminal posture. Can be displaced back and forth.

  Further, for example, when the plate-like displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), the plate-like displacement is maintained by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state as the first stop mode. The member 730 can be stopped in a midway posture. Further, as a second stop mode, the plate-like displacement member 730 is stopped in the upper end posture by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state and maintaining the other drive unit 760 in an excited state. Can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a structural difference is not provided between the left and right drive units 760, but a load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one drive unit 760 is in an excited state. Thus, the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the bending generated in the load member 761 (see FIG. 55A).

  Therefore, in the first displacement mode (stop mode) or the second displacement mode (stop mode) described above, one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Instead, it can be changed depending on the situation.

  Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 that is maintained in an excited state or the drive unit 760 that is repeatedly operated is used. The degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 can be adjusted (adjusted) by switching alternately according to the number of operations or switching every period. Accordingly, the replacement timing of the left and right drive units 760 can be matched, and as a result, the service life of the second operation unit 700 can be maintained long.

  It should be noted that the degree of bending that occurs in the load member 761 is merely an example, and can be arbitrarily set. It is only necessary that the bending occurs regardless of the amount of bending. That is, any configuration that can cause even a slight difference between driving control of one of the driving units 760 and driving both of them is sufficient.

  The second operation unit 700 is disposed so as to be visible at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 from the player's perspective through the window section defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is arbitrarily set. For example, the game ball is inserted into the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65a, and the driving unit 760 is operated. You may control so that a control aspect and the control aspect of the lighting state of the light emission means 706 of the electrical decoration board | substrate 705 may be matched.

  For example, as an association with the control state of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning opening 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is turned on according to the number of holdings for which fluctuation is held. It is also possible to control so that a plurality of game balls enter the second prize opening 140 and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side is turned on in accordance with the number of reserves for which fluctuation is reserved. .

  In this case, by confirming the light emission mode of the light guide member 714, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls. In addition, by associating the incoming ball of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, it is possible to collect the player's line of sight in the light guide member second operation unit 700.

  For example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the first displacement manner described above, while the player has an advantage over the entering into the first winning opening 64. In many cases, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 140, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the second displacement mode described above, so that the game can be played from the difference in the displacement mode of the second motion unit 700. The player can easily grasp whether the ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140.

  In addition, as another example of associating the game ball entry with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be driven and controlled in relation to the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls. In other words, for example, if a game ball enters the first winning port 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning port 64 is the upper limit value, a prize ball is obtained, but the player cannot obtain a change opportunity. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player of this.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced by controlling the drive unit 760, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed. Can attract the attention of the player. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value), the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled so that the player has the number of retained balls close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value). ) Can be easily noticed.

  In addition, as another example of associating the game ball entry with the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705, It may be associated.

  In this case, for example, it may be associated with a game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or the number of balls expected to be entered when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round). You may make it correspond to having exceeded the number of game balls which entered the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning).

  As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is confirmed that a game ball has entered the specific prize opening 65a, or that a number of game balls exceeding the expected number have entered the specific prize opening 65a. The player can be grasped.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the attracting force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described. However, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the windowable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the attracting force acts in the left-right direction. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  73 (a) and 73 (b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73A illustrates a state where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73B illustrates a state where the energization is released and the electromagnetic force disappears.

  The window movable unit 2150 is supported coaxially with the auxiliary device 160 and is disposed so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and a biasing spring SP21 that biases the contact member 2190. With.

  A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is not excited. (See FIG. 73 (b)).

  The contact member 2190 includes a cushion portion 175a that is disposed so as to be able to contact the driven member 163, and a rotation member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

  The rotating member 2191 is disposed opposite to the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction to push the rotating member 2191 back toward the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

  A displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by electromagnetic force.

  On the other hand, in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and the rotating member 2191 is opposed to the urging force of the urging spring SP21 via the state shown in FIG. Is rotationally displaced. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced alone until the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state of FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the state of FIG. 73 (b), the driven member 163 can be oscillated and displaced by the changing urging force. Thereby, the variation of the displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

  A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described. However, in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down at a constant speed. A transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism using a rack and pinion (not shown)) that transmits the driving force is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  74 to 77 are front views of the first operation unit 3400 in the third embodiment. 74 to 77, the manner in which the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward is illustrated in time series.

  FIG. 78A to FIG. 78C are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first motion unit 3400. FIG. In FIG. 78 (a) to FIG. 78 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78 (a), the downward displacement amount of the lifting plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78C, the displacement amount of the relative displacement member 442 with reference to the lifting plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. .

  In the first operation unit 3400, a long hole portion 3406 having an L shape (a shape in which rectangles whose long sides are orthogonal to each other) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The long hole portion 3406 is formed with an opening having a size that allows the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  In FIG. 74, the cylindrical portion 444d is disposed at the upper end position of the elongated opening in the vertical direction of the long hole portion 3406, and the displacement up to FIG. To do. That is, in the displacement from FIG. 74 to FIG. 75, the left and right positions of the cylindrical portion 444d are not changed, so that the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, the section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 and the section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even when the lifting plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction. And can be configured.

  By configuring a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even when the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the driving force transmission is blocked with the auxiliary arm member 444 as a reference. However, this role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to the present embodiment, since the vertical direction portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 is improved). be able to).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 while maintaining the effect that the operation start timing of the lifting plate 430 and the wing member 460 can be shifted.

  In this embodiment, the transmission means 3410 makes it easy to move the lifting plate 430 up and down by a constant linear motion (see FIG. 78A). In this case, the synchronization described above in the first embodiment. If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is used as it is, the rotational displacement speed of the auxiliary arm member 444 greatly changes during the displacement.

  More specifically, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement in the vicinity of the second intermediate state of the first motion unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement in the vicinity of the retracted state or the extended state of the first motion unit 3400. (An angle change amount with respect to a displacement amount of the base end side portion 444a becomes small).

  For this reason, the relative displacement member 442 cannot be displaced at a substantially constant speed with respect to the lifting plate 430. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as an alternative to the lower left rotation gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, meshed with the upper right rotation gear 441, and connected to the relative displacement member 442. An arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 having an extending portion is disposed. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement mode between the lifting plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

  That is, the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a is not the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is displaced vertically corresponding to (proportional to) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a. Is converted again into the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip of the rotary gear 3441 with the arm, and the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced corresponding to the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip. The difference in displacement mode between the lifting plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (cancelled).

  Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 relative to the lifting plate 430 can be brought close to the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430.

  In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 may pass through the rotation shaft of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 and be guided to the relative displacement member 442. That is, by forming the path of the electrical wiring DH1 successively in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430, the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441, and the relative displacement member 442, the electrical wiring accompanying the displacement of the first operation unit 3400. It can be avoided that the path length of DH1 varies greatly.

  In this case, since the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decoration portion 493, it is easy to arrange the decoration board in the decoration portion 493 and execute the light emission effect by the light emitting means such as LED. Can do.

  A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operation unit 700 is not described has been described. However, the second operation unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. A detection device 4780 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 79A and 79B are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. 79A and 79B, illustration of the front lid member 770 and the electrical decoration board 777 is omitted except for the curved projecting portion 774, and the outer shape of the curved projecting portion 774 is an imaginary line. Illustrated.

  FIG. 79A shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4761 is placed at the lowered position under its own weight. In FIG. 79B, current is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the generated electromagnetic force and the load member 4761 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the load member 4761 is in contact with the lower restricting portion 764 in the lowered position and restricted in downward movement, and is in contact with the upper restricting portion 765 in the raised position. Restricted upward displacement.

  As compared with the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, the load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 except that the overhang portion 761d is changed to a thick overhang portion 4761f and a thin overhang portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

  The thick overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that extends from the extending tip of the rod-like extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b with the same thickness (front-rear width) as the rod-like extending portion 761b. In the process in which the load member 4761 is disposed at the raised position, the load member 4761 abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 and corresponds to a portion to stop receiving the load.

  The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is a plate (thinner width is shorter) than the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f and extends along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b from the leading end of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. Part. The upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) of the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g and the upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) of the thick-walled protruding portion 4761f are formed flush with each other.

  The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is configured to abut on the upper restricting portion 765 in the same manner as the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f in the process in which the load member 4761 is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is preferentially damaged as compared with the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f due to accumulation of fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

  From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the extending direction) of the thin-walled projecting portion 4761g and the upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the projecting direction) of the thick-walled projecting portion 4761f are formed. It is not necessary to form the same surface, it is sufficient that at least the upper surface is flush, and the position of the lower surface can be arbitrarily set. For example, by reducing the vertical width of the thin overhanging portion 4761g compared to the vertical width of the thick overhanging portion 4761f, the number of times of repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged can be reduced. The period until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is broken can be adjusted.

  The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower portion of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 disposed on the printed circuit board 4781 so that the thin protruding portion 4761g can be inserted into and removed from the detection groove.

  The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler-type detection device, and the thin-walled projecting portion 4761g blocks the detection light when the load member 4761 is lowered (see FIG. 79A), and is thin-walled when the load member 4761 is raised. The protruding portion 4761g is disposed above so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79B).

  The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be described. Usually, since the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This confirmation is performed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4), and when it is determined to be a malfunction, an alarm is generated or an error is displayed on the display device. This makes it easier for the hall clerk to notice.

  In addition, when the thin overhanging portion 4761g is broken (broken) and falls, the thin overhanging portion 4761g and the load member 4761 do not operate synchronously, so that the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection of the detection sensor 4782 are detected. The result does not correspond. When the position change of the load member 4761 does not correspond to the detection result of the detection sensor 4782, an alarm is generated on the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error is displayed on the display device. It can be made easier for the player and the hall clerk to notice that the part 4761g is broken (broken).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used as both the position detection unit that detects the position of the load member 4761 and the breakage detection unit that detects breakage (breakage) of the load member 4761. .

  According to the present embodiment, even when the thin overhang portion 4761g is damaged, the load member 4761 can be stopped at the raised position by the thick overhang portion 4761f coming into contact with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin wall overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and enter the maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, so that an unexpected disadvantage is given to the player. It can be avoided.

  As described above, a portion that breaks (breaks) preferentially among the portions that come into contact with the upper restricting portion 765 is provided, and the damage (break) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, whereby the thick overhang portion 4761f is broken. The load member can be replaced before the fatigue builds up enough to break.

  A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case of bending and deforming in relation to the rigidity of the vertical bar extension part 761c itself has been described. However, the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment applies a load to the vertical bar extension part 761c. A bending adjusting device 5780 for adjusting the bending deformation is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 80A and 80B are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. The deflection adjusting device 5780 is a box-shaped base member 5781 having a built-in metal coil, and an iron bar supported by the base member 5781 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. Adjustment member 5782 to be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a single-side excited state, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is driven to reduce the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (the deflection deformation is about half). State changes to In other words, in the first embodiment, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is employed as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is changed to the upper end position by energizing the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (both). ing.

  That is, with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 kept in one-side excitation state (see FIG. 80 (a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjusting device 5780 moves around the adjusting member 5882. By energizing the metal coil in the situation where it is arranged so as to be wound, the electromagnet is configured, and the adjustment member 5784 is driven upward, so that the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the bending of the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is increased. It can be applied to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c (see FIG. 80 (b)).

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the plate-like displacement member 730 is plate-shaped by cooperatively driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the adjusting device 5780 disposed on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side. The displacement member 730 can be maintained in the lower end posture (initial posture), the midway posture, and the upper end posture.

  Thereby, compared with the case where it is necessary to arrange | position electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 by left-right pair, arrangement | positioning of a drive means can be hardened. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the driving means can be solidified, it is possible to avoid the area required as a route through which the wiring passes is dispersed in various places (for example, left and right).

  Next, the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65a are formed in the winning port unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. The front side of the paper 10 will be described as the front side (or front), and the back side of the paper of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or rear).

  First, with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, a winning slot unit 930 and a pitching unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. 82, illustration of units other than the prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) disposed on the base plate 60 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the center opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

  The through-hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, in a front view, and the drive unit 960 and the specific prize opening unit 950 disposed in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

  The base board 60 is provided with a prize opening unit 930 from the game area (front side) side, and a ball feeding unit 970 is provided from the side opposite to the game area (back side), and is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 will be described later.

  Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

  As shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 86, the winning a prize opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning a prize opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front side of FIG. 83 (b)) of the front unit 940, A drive unit 960 disposed on the back surface (front side of FIG. 83B) of the specific prize opening unit 950 and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are mainly used. Formed in preparation.

  As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is larger than the through hole 60 a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 are other than the passage paths of the game balls (first winning port 64, second winning port 140, and specific winning port 65a) formed in the front unit 940 described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

  Part of the specific prize opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific prize opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and a game ball can be sent to the inside of the specific prize opening unit 950 through the specific prize opening 65a. Is done. A detailed description of the specific prize opening unit 950 will be described later.

  The drive unit 960 is disposed on the back side of the specific prize opening unit 950, and a part thereof (the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is disposed on the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit via the displacement member 966. Connected. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated and the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 will be described in detail. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In FIGS. 87A and 87B, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. And two (a pair of) wing members 945 disposed in a rotatable manner between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

  The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while having an outer shape in a front view that is substantially T-shaped. The back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and the base plate 60 penetrates through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

  The back base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by cutting out on the flow-down side of the game ball (the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) and the upper side of the first out-port 71 (FIG. 87 ( b) A specific winning port 65a that is located in the upper side and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the horizontal direction, a second winning port 140 that is formed to penetrate above the specific winning port 65a, and the first out port 71. And a first winning opening 64 formed by cutting out at the side edge.

  Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the thickness direction on the outer edge portion. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper) to the back side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper), and from the back side to the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is reduced in diameter.

  The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. Is done. Moreover, since the 1st through-hole 941a1 is diameter-reduced and formed toward the back side from the front side as mentioned above, the head part of a tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter part of a front side. Therefore, the head of the tapping screw can be prevented from protruding into the game area. Further, a positioning protrusion 942a is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1 so as to protrude from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a cylindrical shape.

  The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. The Thereby, the back surface base 941 (winning hole unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

  The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state in which the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

  Moreover, since the 2nd through-hole 941a2 is diameter-reduced and formed toward the front side from the back side as mentioned above, the head part of a screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter part on the back side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding to the back side of the back base 941. As a result, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific prize opening unit 950 when a specific prize opening unit 950 described later is disposed on the back side of the back base 941.

  The rear base 941 has an outer shape at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) in the direction of gravity along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the specific winning port 65a and the general winning port 63 (). The game balls that have not flowed into any of them can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))) through the first out port 71.

  The first winning port 64 is formed by cutting out an end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b)) opposite to the first out port 71 into a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed such that the inner edge is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball flowing into the inside of a first receiving portion 941g to be described later can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning port 64.

  At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941g that protrudes toward the game area (front side of FIG. 87 (a) and is formed in a cup shape) and the opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87 ( b) A first throwing portion 942g protruding in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the drawing.

  The 1st receiving part 941g is formed in the magnitude | size which can receive the game ball for 1 ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) can be caused to flow into the first receiving portion 941g.

  The first receiving portion 941g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g can be sent to the back side (the first pitching portion 942g side) through the first winning port 64.

  Further, the first receiving portion 941g is directed from the upper ends of both ends of the base plate 60 in the short direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second prize opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and inclined to the outside in the short direction. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and a side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the 1st receiving part 941g can be improved, and it can control that the game ball which flows down the flow-down area collides with the 1st receiving part 941g, and the 1st receiving part 941g is damaged.

  In addition, if the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, there is not enough game nails to change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be impaired. By causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. .

  Further, since the guide portion 941g1 is formed to be inclined toward the second winning opening 140 side toward the outer side in the short side direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)), a game that collides with the guide portion 941g1. The sphere can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it can be made to collide again with the game nail (not shown) arrange | positioned at the base board 60, and it can make it easy to give a change to the flow direction of a game ball. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's interest is impaired.

  The first pitching portion 942g is formed in a U-shape that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the opposing inner edges is larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first ball-throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (opposite to the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is a ball-throwing unit described later. It abuts against the edge of the inflow port 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first pitching portion 942g from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g via the first winning port 64 can be rolled to the back side and sent to the pitching unit 970.

  The first ball feeding portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which an upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball feeding unit 970 described later is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first pitching unit 942g and the pitching unit 970 will be described later.

  The second winning opening 140 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in a front view, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball sent between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))) through the second winning opening 140.

  The second winning prize opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (the game area side (the front side of FIG. 87 (a))) and the back side (the opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87). (B) the second ball-throwing portion 942c protruding to the front side of the paper surface)) is formed.

  The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that the protruding front end surface thereof comes into contact with a ball feeding guide portion 943d of the front base 943 described later.

  The second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140. The second pitching portion 942c is set to have a dimension in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87 (b)) larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which rolls the rolling part 943a of the front base 943 mentioned later falls from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

  The pair of second ball feeding portions 942c has a short dimension of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later in terms of a distance dimension between the opposing sides in the short direction of the base plate 60 (left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)). It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. In addition, the second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed by notching a second concave portion 942c1 on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the protruding tip. The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

  The rear base 941 is directed to the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (the upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) from the game area side of the back base 941 to the opposite side to the game area. A first shaft hole 941d that is recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e that are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941, and A projecting portion 941c that projects between the first guide wall 942b that is located on the outer side in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and projects on the back side, and the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. And formed with.

  The first shaft hole 941d can support a shaft member 945a that supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

  The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as an axis. The first opening 941e can be inserted through the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing | blade member 945 rotates, it can suppress that protrusion 945b contact | abuts to the inner surface of the 1st opening 941e.

  The protrusion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are positioned on substantially the same plane as the center position between facing wing members 945 described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension is set slightly larger than the dimension between the facing wing members 945 in the closed state. The Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in a closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being sent to the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when a later-described displacement member 966 is displaced, and the distance between the pair of first guide walls 942b is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction of 966.

  Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view, and extends in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protrusion 966a of the displacement member 966 is brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, so that the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

  The specific prize opening 65a is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the facing direction of the pair of wing members 945 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)), and a plate member 951 of a specific prize opening unit 950, which will be described later, inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area can be sent to the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

  The back base 941 surrounds the periphery of the specific winning opening 65a, and is erected from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a and standing portions 942f that are erected on the back side (opposite to the game area). And a recessed portion 941h provided.

  The standing portion 942f is set to have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific prize opening unit 950 described later. Thereby, it is possible to easily position and arrange the specific winning opening unit 950 inside the standing portion 942f.

  The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the bar member 952 serving as the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning unit 950 is inserted in the state where the specific winning unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the bar member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end face of the bar member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the stick member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

  Furthermore, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second ball-throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b)). And a second guide wall 942d projecting upward).

  The bulging portion 942h bulges to the back side of the back surface base 941, and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c. Accordingly, when a later-described displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) is disposed on the back side of the back surface base 941 (FIG. 87 (b) on the front side of the paper surface), the displacement member 966 is disposed between the back surface of the back surface base 941. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

  The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the opposing pair of second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance dimension of the displacement member 966 in the short direction. Is set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the short direction of the displacement member 966 can be restricted.

  The rear base 941 is halfway toward the one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) at the edge of the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction) of the specific winning opening 65a A second out port 941f formed by cutting out into a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side (the side opposite to the game area) of the base plate 60. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter.

  In addition, a third ball-throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U shape in rear view and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball sent to the back side via the inner side of the second out port 941f can be sent to the inner side of the third pitching part 942e.

  The third ball throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-view in back view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball sent from the second out port 941f Can be rolled to the back side. Note that a detailed description of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third throwing portion 942e will be described later.

  The front base 943 is formed in a substantially T-shape that is upside down and whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. The front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

  The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a that protrude from positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the back base 941 described above. It is formed.

  The 2nd receiving part 943c is formed in back view substantially U character, and the 2nd prize opening 140 of back base 941 is arranged inside in front view. In addition, a pair of wing members 945 described later is disposed on the open side (the open side of the U shape) of the second receiving portion 943c. Furthermore, the protruding distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be sent between the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between a pair of wing members 945 described later. it can.

  The second receiving portion 943c includes a ball feeding guide portion 943d that protrudes inward from the inner edge thereof, and a first concave portion that is recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of FIG. 87 (b)). 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion to the back base side.

  A pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)). Further, the pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portion 941b of the back surface base 941, and when the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 are combined, the end surfaces thereof come into contact with each other. . Thereby, the game ball that has flowed in between the facing of the pair of wing members 945 can be sent between the facing of the pitching guide portion 943d.

  The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (the lower side in the gravitational direction) between the facing of the pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravitational direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state in which the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back of the back base 941. It protrudes to the side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper).

  Thereby, the game balls sent between the pair of ball-sending guide portions 943d can be sent to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game balls are rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1, so that the back side of the back base 941 Can be sent to.

  The front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941 on the opening side (the upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of a shaft member 945a that supports a blade member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

  The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the back, and the second out port 941f of the back surface base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be caused to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a can be returned to the back surface via the second out port 941f. The ball can be sent to the side (opposite the game area).

  The second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a have a first recess 943ca and a second recess 944a1 that are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)). The first concave portion 943ca and the second concave portion 944a1 are fastened portions to which screws inserted into the second through holes 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Is done. Thereby, the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 can be fastened.

  A pair of wing members 945 are disposed with a second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 interposed therebetween in front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

  The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than the distance between the rear base 941 and the front base 943. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the back base 941 side surface (back surface).

  The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the wing member 945 can be rotated and the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are rotated. It can be disposed between the opposing surfaces. Accordingly, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the opposite side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the opposite direction.

  The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945. The tip of the protrusion 945b is disposed through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The size is set so as to protrude to the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the game area). A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966 c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is disposed inside. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the opposite side to the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 includes a projecting portion 966a projecting from one end side (the upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 90 (a) up and down direction) and the lateral direction (FIG. 90 (a) in the left and right direction) And a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction of the displacement member 966, and a contact portion 966a1 that is located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 966 and extends in the longitudinal direction. Is provided.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the projection 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 is set to have a width dimension larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, the protrusions 945b can be prevented from coming into contact with both inner surfaces facing the width direction of the sliding groove 966a2 and the operation of the wing member 945 being restricted.

  The contact part 966a1 is formed to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area which the displacement member 966 contacts with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960 described later can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge to the back side (the back base 941 side), and a horizontally-long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the back view. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a distal end (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the distal end of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

  The connection hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to the one-side contacted portion 966b2 on the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90A)). And the other-side abutted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

  The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface with which a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965 described later contacts. The displacing member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to an open state (see FIG. 92) by sliding the bulged portion 965e1 in contact with the one-side contacted portion 966b2.

  The other-side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface with which the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 described later contacts. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by causing the other side abutted portion 966b3 to come into contact with the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 and slidingly displace. Can do.

  Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. 91 illustrates a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 illustrates an open state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed in parallel with the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is continuous with the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (on the side of the specific winning opening 65a), and a second surface 945b2 that is continuous with the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (the connection hole 966b1 side), contacts the protrusion 945b, displaces the wing member 945 to the open state, and faces and projects the lower inner surface 966a4. An upper inner surface 966a3 that contacts the 945b to displace the wing member 945 in a closed state, and an inner side in the short direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 91) of the displacement member 966 toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side. And an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined in the direction.

  The displacement member 966 is arranged to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the rear base 941 by a transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific prize opening 65a (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second prize opening 140 (upper side in FIG. 91). Opened.

  Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is disposed inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is disposed on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside in the short direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 contacts the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact therewith. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is coupled to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, a facing portion is formed on one end side of the rotating member so as to be opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the projecting portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable because it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is equal to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval between the facing portions so that the projecting portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases accordingly. As a result, since the shakiness of the wing member is likely to occur, the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. The projection 945b protrudes from the pair of wing members 945, and the slide groove 966a2 into which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the slide groove 966a2 The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a slide displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b. Therefore, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space necessary for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for disposing other members can be secured.

  Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965. At the time of operation in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (the other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases as the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing the wing member 945 to the open state or the closed state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is on the lower side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation shaft (the insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Be positioned. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravitational direction (the other side in the gravitational direction) is set below the rotational direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) can be started and the initial operation when opening or closing can be performed smoothly.

  Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b across the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c). Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravitational direction (one side in the gravitational direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (self-weight). Can be made. Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) can be started and the initial operation when opening can be performed smoothly.

  Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set below the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The slide displacement toward the other side in the gravity direction 966 (upward in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

  Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b to the inclined surface 966a5. In addition to the displacement of the projection 945b in the gravity direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 in the closed state can be easily suppressed. In other words, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning port 140 side to the specific winning port 65a side (gravity direction one side (lower side in FIG. 92). Side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 contacts the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning port 140 side to the specific winning port 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing | blade member 945, the wing | blade member 945 can be displaced using the dead weight of the displacement member 966. FIG. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

  Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

  93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion 963, and a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion that are formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between the first and second housings 963, a coupling member 964 coupled to the solenoid 610, and pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and coupled to the coupling member 964. The transmission member 965 is mainly provided.

  The first housing portion 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 93 (a)), and the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover 962a. And a guide portion 962b projecting to the reference).

  The covering portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. The covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

  The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963 described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. Accordingly, the engagement portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are fastened, and thus the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

  The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 in the assembled state of the drive unit 960, and on the second housing portion 963 side (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). A through hole 962da penetrating in the direction is provided.

  The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Formed. Thereby, the 1st accommodating part 962 and the 2nd accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

  The guide portion 962b is connected to the opposing wall surface of the covering portion 962a and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, and the pair of arm portions 962e. The wall portion 962f is formed, and a projecting portion 962g that projects from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (on the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. In addition, the pair of arms 962e is set so that the distance between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance between both ends in the horizontal direction of a side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the sorting unit 980 described later. The part 981b is inserted.

  The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces on the distal end side (bending side) of the arm portion 962e described above, and has a shape in front view that is larger than the shape in front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93B) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B), and the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back surface base 941 described above. Is set to be approximately the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) (L3 = L4). Further, the wall 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93A) in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 93A) of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 from the upper end surface of the standing portion 942f. It is set substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5 = L6). Accordingly, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be disposed between the facing portions.

  The protruding portion 962g is formed so as to protrude from the outside in the opposite direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f to the opposite side of the arm portion 962e. It is set to be approximately the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 in the facing direction of the projecting portion 962g (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the projecting portion 962g is set such that the dimension in the gravity direction is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the upright portion 942f facing each other.

  Thus, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is disposed on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protruding portions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back surface base 941 by inserting the projecting portion 962g between the facing portions 942f.

  The second housing portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box-like body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). The second housing portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610, which will be described later (the left-right direction in FIG. 93B), when viewed from above. In addition, the second storage portion 963 includes a concave portion 963e that is recessed at a plurality of locations on both wall portions that extend in the longitudinal direction, and the first storage portion 962 side between the plurality of concave portions 963e. Engaging portion 963c projecting in the longitudinal direction, projecting portion 963b projecting in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85) ) And a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

  The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude in a semicircular arc shape on the outer side in the short direction of the second housing portion 963, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first housing portion 962. Accordingly, the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 962da of the first housing portion 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

  The recessed portion 963e is an opening through which air is circulated in a space formed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be cooled.

  The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes toward the first housing portion 962 from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side, and a tip thereof is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second housing portion 963. The Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first housing portion 962, and when the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first housing portion 962.

  Moreover, since the engaging part 963c is formed between the recessed parts 963e, the distance from the base end of the engaging part 963c to a front-end | tip can be lengthened. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first housing portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first housing portion 962.

  The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotation shaft 965c of a transmission member 965 described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first housing portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first housing portion 962 on the one side in the gravity direction, and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are combined. In such a state, it is possible to suppress the rotation shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the bearing portion 963d.

  The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. Provided with an annular part 961c disposed at the end of the coil part and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular part 961c and the main body part 961a.

  The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a can be pulled inward by the magnetism and inserted.

  The shaft portion 961b is formed of a metal material having magnetism and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is disposed in a direction in which the axial direction is directed toward the back surface base 941, and a portion on the back surface base 941 side is disposed in a state of protruding from the main body portion 961a.

  The annular portion 961c is disposed at an end portion of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964 described later is connected to the annular portion 961c. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the opposed portions of the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. Thereby, the annular part 961c can be urged in the direction away from the main body part 961a. Therefore, in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is interrupted (supplied), the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

  The connecting member 964 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back surface base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). And a standing portion 964b bent to the side.

  The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (FIG. 93 (b) the back side of the drawing surface). And a second recessed portion 964d which is located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and is recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

  The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on one side in the gravity direction in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

  As described above, the second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, and is opened from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

  The standing portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. Thus, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the projecting portion 965d abuts on the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

  The transmission member 965 is bent in a side view, and has a distal end portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while continuing to the distal end portion 965a. Part 965b.

  The rotating part 965b is formed such that the width dimension in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between the opposed bearing parts 963d formed on the second accommodating part 963. Is done. The rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides in the short side direction (FIG. 93 (b) vertical direction) of the second housing portion 963 at the end portion on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. And a projecting portion 965d projecting toward one end in the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 965c is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965 c, the separation distance between the projecting tips is set to be larger than the distance between the opposed bearing portions 963 d formed in the second housing portion 963. Thereby, a pair of rotating shaft 965c can be inserted and arrange | positioned inside the bearing part 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second housing portion 963 and the first housing portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable about the rotating shaft 965c.

  As described above, the protruding portion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in a top view. Further, the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in a state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is supplied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). It is set to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to twice the width dimension of the protruding portion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d and the insertion holes 964e on both end surfaces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with each other to restrict the rotation of the transmission member 965. Can be suppressed.

  The distal end portion 965a is formed such that the width dimension in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the distal end, and a standing portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotation portion 965b to one side in the gravity direction. Formed with.

  The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted into the connection hole 966b1. Accordingly, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93 (b). In FIG. 96 (a), the state before the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated, and in FIG. 96 (b), the state after the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated. In FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 provided between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in a direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96 (a)).

  When the connecting member 964 is pushed away from the main body 961a, the surface on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96 (a)) of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is set as the state which contacted the inner surface of. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96 (a)) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 toward the one side in the gravity direction is restricted by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the body portion 961a by the magnetic force generated in the body portion 961a. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (as compared to a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a (the right side in FIG. 96 (a)).

  When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 opposite to the solenoid 610 (left side in FIG. 96 (b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 are inserted. The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 96 (b)) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravitational direction is restricted by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first housing portion 962.

  Accordingly, when the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodation portion 962 or the second accommodation portion 963. It can be made to contact. Thereby, a player's cheating can be suppressed.

  For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first storage portion 962 or the second storage portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is increased. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Accordingly, an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, so that it is easy for the store operator to find the fraud.

  Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the displacement member 966, and the transmission member 965 extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the solenoid 610. The distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially U shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

  That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. When the distance between the rotating portion 965b and the rotation member 965b is set to be approximately equal to the distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased, The whole becomes larger.

  On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed from the axial direction of the rotation shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be approximately the same (the distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be equal to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes small.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 is changed. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while securing the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back side (the right side in FIG. 96 (a)) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. Accordingly, the space generated by bending the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively used to reduce the size of the transmission member 965. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently disposed in the space between the rolling portion 943a (a ball feeding unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. Can be achieved.

  Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 98A shows a state before the solenoid 610 operates, and FIG. 98B shows a state after the solenoid 610 operates.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the state where the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

  Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in FIG. 98 (a)), FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-side abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 abut, and the displacement member 966 slides to the other side in the gravity direction. Is done.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

  On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is interrupted, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is made uniform in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (the lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact with each other so that the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the one side in the direction of gravity (the specific prize opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, the wing member 945 is closed by interrupting the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

  In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed in a state where power supply (supply) to the main body portion 961a is cut off, the main body portion 961a can be closed due to disconnection of the wiring of the main body portion 961a or a player's illegal act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being in an open state and a state where the game ball easily flows into the second winning opening 140.

  Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connection hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, during the operation of sliding the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, only one of the pair of wing members 945 receives a load from the game ball. When acted, the position of the displacement member 966 is changed, so that the displacement member 966 is coupled to the pair of wing members 945 at two locations and also to the transmission member 965 at two locations. If this is the case, it is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and resistance when the displacement member 966 is slid and displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated). Occurring and inhibiting the opening or closing of the wing member. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two locations and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one location. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface between the one-side contacted part 966b2 and the other-side contacted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum outer dimension D2 (FIG. 98) of the protrusion 945b. It is set to be smaller than 3 times (see (a)). Thereby, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 are When the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. It can control that change is regulated. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, it is possible to easily suppress the contact between the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific prize opening unit 950. FIG. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific prize opening unit 950.

  As shown in FIG. 99 to FIG. 101, the specific prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entry member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened on the player side (the front side in FIG. 99), and the ball entry member 953 is opened. A plate member 951 disposed so as to cover the portion, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951 are provided. It is formed.

  The plate member 951 is formed from a colored translucent resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body 951a formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b that is cylindrically formed on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a, and a longitudinal direction of the main body 951a. A protrusion 951c protruding from the one end of the main body 951a toward the incoming ball member 953 and an engaging portion 951d protruding from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the incoming ball member 953 are formed.

  The main body 951a is formed to have a size that covers the open side of a ball entry member 953, which will be described later, in a front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

  The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the main body 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. The shaft hole 951b is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952 described later, and the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the incoming ball member 953 by supporting the incoming ball member 953 in a state where the bar member 952 is inserted into the axial hole 951b.

  The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by driving a drive unit 957 described later and the other side in the gravitational direction of the plate member 951 is inclined to the game area side, the main body 951a It can suppress that the game ball which flowed down falls from one side of the longitudinal direction of the main-body part 951a.

  The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to a tip 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, on the inside thereof, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body 951a can be removed from the main body 951a. It can suppress falling from the other side of the longitudinal direction.

  The ball entry member 953 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a box shape that is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, a standing wall 953b that is erected on the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f protruding from the opposite surface, an annular protrusion 953c protruding in an annular shape on the opposite surface of the main body 953a, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d protruding from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion toward the plate member 951; an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a; A projecting portion 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a projection 953h projecting from the open side edge of the main body portion 953a to the plate member 951 side, and two positions formed through the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a With an inlet 953j It is.

  The main body portion 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into a box-shaped inner portion, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball flowing from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in a front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Accordingly, the main body portion 953a (the incoming ball member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

  Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the separation distance on the outer side in the opposing direction of the pair of wing members 945 described above. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of wing members 945, the game ball can be flowed into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

  The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape that is larger than the diameter of the game ball. When the plate member 951 is opened, the game ball can flow into the main body 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

  The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge on the lower side in the gravity direction of the main body portion 953a, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, a game ball sent from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

  The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the side opposite to the opening side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in the three directions of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the back. Formed in size.

  The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Accordingly, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. In addition, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the standing wall 953b at a distal end portion that is separated from the proximal end side by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it can suppress that detection device SE1 and engagement part 953f engage, and detection device SE1 arrange | positioned at the main-body part 953a falls off.

  The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed so as to be biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the back, and the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is provided on one side. The detection hole SE1a is disposed at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j described later, and allows a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass therethrough.

  The annular protrusion 953c is formed to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion thereof.

  A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and a distance dimension between the facing portions is formed to be shorter than a longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d.

  The wall 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 penetrating in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction of the main body 953a (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (a)). The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after the plate member 951 is disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951, thereby It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

  Furthermore, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a projecting dimension that is smaller than the recessed distance of the recessed portion 941h formed in the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Accordingly, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming out.

  The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955 described later is inserted to the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. Is done.

  The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connection projection 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the projecting portion 953g are arranged on the same axis. The installation portion 953g and the connection protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize mouth unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize mouth unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

  The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude to the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to be sandwiched between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

  Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 99 (a)) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be hardly sandwiched between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

  The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow ports 953j are holes through which the game balls that flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a are sent to the passage member 955, and are formed as a pair in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

  Here, a game provided with a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance The machine is known. The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the entrance are collected on the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Into the ball one by one. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to arrive at the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and there is a problem that over winning is likely to occur. It was.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a pair of inlets 953j are formed at a predetermined interval (in two places), even when the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the inlets 953j The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inlet 953j can be shortened and the inlet 953j can be made to flow in a short time. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of the game ball into the ball entering member 953 is disposed at a connection portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 is disposed between the pair of inlets 953j.

  Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945) in the gravity direction. In addition, since the pair of wing members 945 are disposed in the game area, it is difficult for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Accordingly, there is a bias in the inflow position of the game ball that flows into the ball entry member 953 of the specific prize opening unit 950. In the present embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, so that the inflow of game balls flowing into the incoming ball member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be approached. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be flowed into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the over winning of the game ball to the ball entering member 953.

  The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and the outer shape in front view is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the above-described entrance member 953. The passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a that are recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of the respective detection devices SE1, and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b penetrating in the longitudinal direction, a pair of third openings 955c penetrating from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entering member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and concave in the gravitational other side of the third opening 955c. The rolling part 955d is provided, and a second recessed part 955f is provided between the pair of recessed parts 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

  The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957 described later are disposed. In addition, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that protrudes in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

  The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity is disposed, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in front view. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be disposed inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 protrudes toward the ball entry member 953 in a state where the detection device SE2 is disposed inside the third opening 955c.

  Further, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The projecting tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

  The rolling portion 955d is formed to be curved in an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling member 955d on the side of the plate member 951 is coupled to the third ball feeding portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning unit 950.

  The other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls flowing into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

  As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a serving as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (c)) of the passage member 955 is the second dimension of the drive unit 960 described above. It is set larger than the distance dimension in the short direction (up and down direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the accommodating portion 963.

  The second recessed portion 955 f is formed with an insertion hole 955 h that is formed through the passage member 955 in the middle in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955 g that protrudes toward the drive unit 957. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

  The protrusion 955g is formed in a columnar shape, and a fastening hole 955g1 is formed in a circular recess at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific prize opening unit 950), and is opposed to the long hole 963f formed in the second housing portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position to do. Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the channel | path member 955 (specific winning a prize port unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

  The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c that is disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

  The solenoid 957a includes a main body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the main body portion 957a1. Provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at an end of the coil portion and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

  The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 by the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body portion 957a1 and inserted. Is done.

  The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a metal material having magnetism and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is disposed in a state in which the axial direction is directed toward the passage member 955, and a part on the back surface base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

  The annular portion 957a3 is disposed at the end portion of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the opposed portions of the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular part 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body part 957a1. Therefore, in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. In addition, after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body 957a1 when the application (supply) of power is interrupted.

  The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. The case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2 and an opening 957b2 penetratingly formed on the opposite side to the open side.

  The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

  The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Accordingly, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 through the opening 957b2.

  The connecting member 957c is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c includes a first recessed portion 957c1 that is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 99 (b)) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. 957c1 includes a second recessed portion 957c2 that is located on the solenoid 957a side and is recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 that protrudes toward the ball entry member 953.

  The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is opened in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

  The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U shape that opens in one side in the direction of gravity in the rear view, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

  The engaging portion 957c3 is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape in a side view. The engaging portion 957c3 is provided with a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958 described later inside the bent portion. Thus, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

  The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the side. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b penetrating circularly in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a protruding in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion protruding to the plate member 951 side. 958c.

  As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. The shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

  As described above, the connecting portion 958a is disposed inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. Thus, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

  The front end portion 958c is inserted and disposed in the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the distal end portion 958c is displaced, and thus the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

  Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific prize opening unit 950 along the line CII-CII in FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific prize opening unit 950. FIG.

  102 (a) and 103 (a) illustrate the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) illustrate the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the incoming ball member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is the main body portion 951a in the main body of the incoming ball member 953. This is a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is interrupted, the shaft 957a2 is made to be a plate member by the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of projecting to the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed in the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also disposed on the plate member 951 side that is separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so that the connecting portion 958a is pushed out to the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in a direction rotating around the shaft hole 958b toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)).

  When the front end portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the front end portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entry member 953. To be rotated. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

  When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player performs an illegal operation to forcefully release the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connection member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), in a state where power is applied (supplied) to the body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the body 957a1. It is assumed that Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed in the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so that the main body portion 958a1 side is displaced with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. (Right side of FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b to the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 102B) is transmitted to the transmission member 965.

  When the distal end portion 958c is pushed up in the other direction of gravity, the distal end portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction to do. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be opened.

  Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the weight of the plate member 951, and therefore the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. It can suppress that force is applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, an inner portion of the main body 953a of the ball entering member 953 will be described. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific prize opening unit 950 along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104 (a). 104A shows a state where the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104B shows a state where the plate member 951 is attached. 104 (a) and 104 (b) show the closed state of the plate member 951.

  As shown in FIG. 104, on the inner side of the main body portion 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a inclined to one side in the direction of gravity from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 104 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 953a to the outside. A concave portion 954b that is recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c that protrudes from the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the concave portion 954b, and a surface on both sides in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. And a standing wall 954d that is erected in a row.

  The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of the game ball that rolls the game ball flowing between the pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing in between the facing of the inlet 953j can be rolled to the inlet 953j.

  The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (downward in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The concave portion 954b has a concave front end surface that is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, another time until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over winnings by suppressing the game balls from entering.

  The recess 954b extends linearly in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 104 (b)) substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, it is possible to easily receive the game ball rolling the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (the left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) in the recess 954b, and shorten the received game ball to the passage member 955. You can guide (inflow) in time. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Further, in the recess 954b, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104B) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thus, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be promptly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In addition, the recess 954b has a width dimension in the longitudinal direction of the rolling contact surface 953a2 that is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Accordingly, when a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received by the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). Formed. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled to the front of the inflow port 953j by using the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolls toward the passage member 955. Can be made. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced apart from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is changed to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. Two guide surfaces 954d1 are provided.

  The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is inclined from the opening 953a1 side to the inflow port 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It arrange | positions between the channel | path members 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a and project toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 104 (b) left-right direction) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). . That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. It can suppress rolling to 2 inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  The projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Are connected to the side surface of the concave portion 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 opens toward the rolling direction of the game ball on the inclined surface 954a of the game ball (the outer side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2) 953a1. Inclined to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball which rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955).

  That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is increased, and the rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is decelerated immediately before the recess 954b. Thus, the game ball can be prevented from rolling from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both end portions in the short direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so that when the plate member 951 is opened, The end of the plate member 951 can be positioned on one end in the gravitational direction (on the gravitational direction) side of the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a.

  Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. It can suppress rolling to 2 inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. Accordingly, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can do.

  That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is for a game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high rolling speed (fast) can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the standing wall 954d, and can be surely decelerated. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly introduced into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while preventing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In addition, the protruding portion 954c is such that a side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 at the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface facing the protruding portion 954c. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104B) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set to be smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction. Thereby, the game ball over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d to be surely decelerated, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Further, in the standing wall 954d, a separation distance L32 (see FIG. 104A) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d and reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  A projecting portion 954c is positioned on the extended line in the inclination direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d, and the rolling of the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be flowed into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In the protruding portion 954c, a distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recessed portion 954b to the protruding tip is set larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, the projecting portion 954c is formed continuously with the side surface of the recess 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d rolls. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the line CVIa-CVIa in FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a specific prize opening unit 950 and a drive unit 960 in FIG.

  105 (a) and 105 (b), the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951 and the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83 (a)) are connected. A part of the wiring HS2 is illustrated. In FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83A) of the prize opening unit 930 is a position where the specific prize opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap in a front view. Formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the game area of the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945).

  Here, conventionally, a second winning port 140, a pair of wing members 945 for opening or closing the second winning port 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning port 65a. In addition, a gaming machine is known that includes a plate member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a and a second drive unit that drives the plate member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to effectively use the space.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is disposed on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see FIG. 97). In other words, the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are gathered on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), thereby arranging other members and devices. Space can be secured on the back of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be used effectively.

  Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed in the vicinity of the central opening formed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is distant from the central opening. The movable body of the operation unit that is made visible to the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) by being disposed on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize it by retracting it to the back side of 60 (the side opposite to the game area).

  That is, the movable body of the operation unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (retraction), and is difficult to be seen by the player, and at the center opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), The operating means (driving unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed in the vicinity of the central opening is placed at a specific prize opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the unit 950 in a position overlapping the horizontal direction, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening during retraction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operation unit during normal (withdrawal). As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in the overhanging state, it is easy to give interest to the player.

  In addition, the projection area of the plate member 951 is set larger than the projection area of the pair of wing members 945 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 including two displacement members (the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members 945), the respective driving means (drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, each drive means can be easily disposed on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (a pair of wing members 945). A space can be formed.

  Furthermore, the plate member 951 is formed so that the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 105 (a) left-right direction). Are arranged side by side. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

  In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position spaced apart from the pair of wing members 945 from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81). The longitudinal direction is disposed orthogonal to the separating direction. Thereby, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be easily secured. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

  As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is provided on the back base 943. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 simultaneously with the operation of fastening and fixing the rear base 941 to the front base 943. Thereby, when attaching the front unit 940 and the pitching unit 970 to the base board 60 (game board 13), it can suppress that the drive unit 960 is forgotten to attach.

  The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set so that the positions of the end portions on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific prize opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion on the opposite side (rear side) of the specific prize opening unit 950. Thereby, wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily integrated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being scattered on the opposite side (rear side) of the gaming area of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wirings HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and objects.

  That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged in such a posture that the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (extracted) to the opposite sides of the main body 961a and the shaft 957a2 from the shafts 961b and 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

  The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush. Thereby, the shape of the partition member (not shown) which partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed can be simplified.

  That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed in different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the gravity direction. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the gravitational direction, both side surfaces in the gravitational direction between the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of the partition member becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the gravity direction, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

  The partition member is a conductor barrier for partitioning the region where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed and other regions and restricting electromagnetic waves from flowing between these regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

  Further, the transmission member 965 is disposed between the passage member 955 of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is disposed at the tip (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces with the rotation of the pair of wing members 945 is disposed, the second prize is obtained as compared with the conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members 945 only by the rotation members. A space can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140 on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the pitching path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 toward the specific prize opening unit 950, so that the second The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair in the specific prize opening unit 950 in front view. Established. In other words, the detection device SE2 is disposed between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. Thus, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific prize opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, and thus such fraud is performed. Can be difficult.

  Here, as described above, when the driving means (driving unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole penetrating from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 by a drill or the like is formed in the ball entry member 953 for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the store clerk to detect the fraud. There was a fear.

  In other words, since the board member 951 is disposed on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the fraudulent clerk is regarded as the ball entry member 953. It is difficult to discover.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, for example, when a drilling process is performed using a tool such as a drill, the detection is performed. Since the detection substrate SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, an illegal act can be found by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 is closed by closing the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect an illegal act by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, since the location where the fraud is added and the portion where the fraud has been applied becomes invisible.

  In addition, since the detection device SE1 is the same product (off-the-shelf product) as the detection devices (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detect other game balls, a degree of freedom is secured in the size of the outer shape. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the detection devices SE1 facing each other. For this reason, when the player drills the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a possibility that the cheering of the player cannot be notified to the store clerk.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. Accordingly, the wiring HS3 can be disposed in a gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the facing of the pair of detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. Thereby, since it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 recognize a detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect fraud by notifying the error.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to enable drilling, the wiring HS3 is damaged (disconnected) along with the illegal act. ) Can be made easy. Alternatively, it can be recognized that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and the illegal act can be easily suppressed.

  An annular projection 953c is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other so that a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed together. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and a fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (the lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is driven by a screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since 960 can be concealed, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is easily formed between the pair of detection devices SE1. Since the unshielded region on the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws, the illegal action can be made more difficult.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953 and arranged. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be drawn (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the opening side of the ball entry member 953, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. Alternatively, it is easy to recognize that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily suppress the illegal act.

  Therefore, when the player penetrates a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill. Thereby, since it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 recognize a detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect fraud by notifying the error.

  Furthermore, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c. This makes it difficult for the force in the shearing direction to act on the connection portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning hole unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning hole unit 950 in the discharging direction, thereby detecting A force in the shearing direction acts on a connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion-type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shear direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharging direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1. The direction of the force acting on the wire HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring HS3 from being disconnected at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

  Further, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased toward the end opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1. Accordingly, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is drawn out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular protrusion 953c), so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screw and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  Next, the overall configuration of the ball sending unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the pitching unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the pitching unit 970. FIG. 108A is an exploded perspective front view of the pitching unit 970, and FIG. 108B is an exploded perspective rear view of the pitching unit 970.

  As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the pitching unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 provided on the player side (game area side) and having a space through which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980 And a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

  The distribution unit 980 includes openings (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) connected to the first prize port 64 and the second prize port 140 of the above-described prize port unit 930, and the openings (inlet 982d and side wall 981b). ) Can be received inside through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 from the game area. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

  The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 includes a plurality of openings (a first insertion hole 991a to a second insertion hole 991d on a surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball sent through the distribution unit 980 from the opening. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 112A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109A, and FIG. 112B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 disposed on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. The distribution unit 983 arranged in a possible state and the cover member 987 arranged mainly at the position corresponding to the distribution unit 983 on the back side of the back base 985 are formed.

  The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating in the thickness direction of the base portion 985a. 985b to 985g), a concave portion 985h provided in the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the concave portion 985h. Formed in preparation.

  The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape at the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the gravitational direction opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through a front base 981 described later. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw that passes through a passage unit 990 described later. Thereby, the back surface base 985 (sorting unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

  The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position that overlaps a part of the other side in the gravitational direction of openings 985b to 985f described later. The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game balls can be easily flown into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The recess 985h is recessed toward the opposite side of the front base 981 (FIG. 109 (b), the front side of the drawing), and is formed at a substantially central position in the short side direction (FIG. 109 (b), left-right direction) of the base portion 985a. Is done. The concave portion 985h is formed on the inner side with a size capable of accommodating a part of a sorting portion 983 described later, and includes a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

  The opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed at both ends in the short direction of the base portion 985a, respectively, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) goes to the opposite side to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball which flows in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the short direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravitational direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Similarly to the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed so as to incline downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) moves toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball which flows in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. The openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 in the space that opens to the front base 981 side, and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space that opens on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. The passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 communicating with the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are mainly provided.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between opposing front and rear bases 981 and 985, which will be described later, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. The Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be caused to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed to have a size that allows game balls to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

  The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 that are recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are sent (the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing a detection device SE3, which will be described later, on the inner side thereof, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in the rear view. Accordingly, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side (the side opposite to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

  Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set in parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are substantially aligned. Placed in position. Thus, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the game ball can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball which passes 1st channel | path TR1 and 2nd channel | path TR2 is detectable.

  In addition, since the detection device SE3 has the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a formed in parallel to the direction of gravity, it is possible to easily use the weight of the game ball when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the connection portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. The detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed continuously with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it can suppress that the length dimension of the gravity direction of intermediate channel 985e2 and 985f2 becomes large. As a result, the back base 985 can be prevented from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

  The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and are formed to have a size through which a game ball can pass. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described later in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can be flowed into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and can be sent to the passage unit 990 through the spaces.

  The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so as to incline downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) goes to the opposite side to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between opposing front and rear bases 981 and 985, which will be described later, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. The Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be caused to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies. The accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, and an inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as an outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in the cylindrical body. The projecting dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be slightly large due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semi-annular bodies are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

  The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a position on the opposite side across the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. The projecting portion 986e includes a fastening hole that is recessed in a circular shape on the shaft. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing a tip of a screw that passes through a cover member 987 described later, and the cover member 987 is fastened to the back surface base 985 by screwing the screw in a state where the cover member 987 is in contact. Can be fixed.

  The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can be generated in the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a by being disposed in the housing portion 986b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988c arrange | positioned at the distribution part 983 mentioned later can be repelled, and the distribution part 983 can be made easy to displace.

  The front base 981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (blue in this embodiment). The front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 in a front view, and is expanded from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (the side opposite to the rear base 986). It is mainly provided with a protruding portion 982.

  The base plate 981a is formed in a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the thickness direction in the outer peripheral edge portion thereof, and a first guide wall protruding toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

  The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball-feeding unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. .

  The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular ring shape, and a pair of first guide walls 981f are formed in the short direction with a bulging portion 982 described later interposed therebetween. In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed with the semicircular open portion facing the substantially central side in the short direction of the base plate 981a.

  The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed in two places in the short direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of a bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between two locations.

  The inner edges of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back surface base 985 described above. Accordingly, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

  The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side into the fastening hole 986d. Thus, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

  The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion. The through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning port 140 of the above-described winning port unit 930. When the winning port unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the second winning port 140 is provided. It is formed at a position that overlaps the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the box.

  The side wall portion 981b is formed to have a size such that the standing front end surface is in contact with the second ball feeding portion 942c of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. The side wall 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) positioned on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a. Inclined downward toward the side.

  Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 protruding from the standing tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radial separation of the game balls in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be hardly caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  The bulge portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof. A game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside. And a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the pitching passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an inflow port 982d formed by notching the upper end portion in the direction of gravity, and is bent and erected toward the back base 985 at a substantially intermediate position when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided with a standing wall 982a and concave portions 982e to 982j that are recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

  The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion in the state where the winning opening unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930. It is formed at the overlapping position.

  In addition, the inflow port 982d includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes to the opposite side of the back surface base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the inner edge shape of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the above-described winning opening unit 930. When the winning opening unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is in contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

  Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inlet 982d on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first pitch from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1. It is set larger than the distance dimension to the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, when the game ball sent to the first pitching portion 942g through the first winning port 64 flows into the inlet 982d, the inflow port 982d (the bulging portion 982) and the first pitching portion 942g It is difficult to get caught in between.

  The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is spaced a predetermined distance from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 in a front view. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the standing direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

  The standing wall 982a is set such that a distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed in a space through which the air can pass.

  The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a distribution unit 983 described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either one. The sorting unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately sent to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it can suppress that the pitch of the game ball which flows into the 1st winning opening 64 becomes monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  On the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c projecting in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the back base 985 is formed. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

  As described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back surface base 985, when combining the front base 981 and the back surface base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is used as the bearing portion 985j. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 by inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

  The abutting portion 982a1 is formed on a rotation locus of the distributing portion 983 described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is restricted by the abutting action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

  The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

  The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game ball can be flowed into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

  The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game ball can be flowed into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

  The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

  The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows into the first passage TR1, and the flowed game ball can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

  The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows into the first passage TR1, and the flowed game ball can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

  The concave portion 982g is formed between the concave portion 982h and the concave portion 982j, and the concave direction is set in parallel with the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be reduced in size. .

  The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

  The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is inclined and extended toward the back surface base 985 toward the one side in the gravitational direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the game ball flowing down by bringing the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f and easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h, the recess 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the standing front end surface is lowered toward the rear base 985 side (FIG. 109 (b) front side of the paper surface). Be inclined. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is easy to flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

  The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. Thus, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, thereby opening the game ball 985e. And can flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and the durability can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball-feeding unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning hole unit 930) disposed on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 are difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are played by the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1. There was a problem that it was difficult for the person to see.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, the standing dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the game balls sent to the opening 985e and the opening 985f (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) easily visible even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned on the back base 985 side as it goes in the flow direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring the rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

  The distribution portion 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape in front view. Further, the distributing portion 983 penetrates through a T-shaped action portion 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the action portion 983a, and a connecting portion of the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. Through-hole 983c, a contact portion 983d bulging in a circular shape around the axis of the through-hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e formed by connecting to the back base 985 side of the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. And is mainly provided.

  The through hole 983c is a hole into which the shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 is opposed, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state in which the sorting portion 983 can be rotated by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the sorting portion 983. 985 is disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by being rotated to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b The distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the pitching of the game ball is restricted to one of the first path TR1 and the second path TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b is configured such that the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the game ball is sent to the other of the second passage TR2 from the state where the delivery of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1. Can be switched to a restricted state.

  The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in a front view. In addition, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state where a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the sorting portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

  The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when the through hole 983c is viewed in the axial direction. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 985h of the back surface base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from being inhibited by the game ball sent from the inflow port 982d to the inside of the sorting unit 980 being caught inside the recess 985h.

  Further, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 which is provided on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the radially outer end toward the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the back base 985 side.

  The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is disposed in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, the magnetic field 988c is applied with magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back base 985, and the distributing unit 983 rotates around the through hole 983c to change the extending direction of the operating part 983a to one side or the other side. It can be in a tilted state.

  Further, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a state of being repelled, and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, so that the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is housed in the housing portion 983e1. Can be prevented from exiting. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

  Note that the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic adhesion force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and stagnating inside the distribution unit 980.

  The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985 h of the back base 985. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape when viewed from the front side by side in the direction of gravity.

  The first recessed portion 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back surface base 985 described above, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b is accommodated by accommodating the tip of the accommodation portion 986b in the first recess 987a in a state where the magnetic body 988b is accommodated in the accommodation portion 986b as described above. It is possible to suppress the escape from the portion 986b.

  The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back surface base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. The second recess 987b is formed such that the inner shape of the recessed portion is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can be positioned and disposed by accommodating the second recess 987b in the projecting portion 986e of the back surface base 985, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the projecting portion 986e. Can be concluded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the sorting unit 983 when a game ball flows into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following description, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from a state in which the game ball is sent to one side of the first path TR1 to a state in which the game ball is sent to the other side of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description in the case of restricting the sending of game balls to one of the first passages TR1 from the state of restricting the delivery of game balls to the other of the second passages TR2 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), as described above, the game is distributed to the distribution 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined to the second passage TR2 side. In addition, the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113A).

  When a game ball is sent to the sorting unit 983 in this state, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. It is said. Note that the amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state on the first passage TR1 side.

  Accordingly, the distributing unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. In addition, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state where the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, each time the game ball is sent, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b to send the game ball one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

  Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that sends a game ball that passes through, a third passage member 993 that is disposed on the second passage member 992 and sends a game ball that passes through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. A detection device SE4 disposed between three passage members 993 is mainly provided.

  The first passage member 991 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 includes a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) on the distribution unit 980 side, and one side in the gravitational direction (lower in the gravitational direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. A second insertion hole 991b that is formed to penetrate the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d that are formed to be adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and an outer periphery in front view And a plurality of through-holes 991f formed in a circular shape.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st penetration hole 991a can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  Further, an annular ring protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 2nd penetration hole 991b can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

  Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes a recessed portion 991c1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Accordingly, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside and to reduce the size of the ball sending unit 970 as a whole.

  The third insertion hole 991c includes a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2, and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (the left direction in FIG. 114 (a)).

  The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

  Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes a recessed portion 991d1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Accordingly, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Furthermore, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is horizontal. The second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b is formed so as to be inclined downward. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2, and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (right direction in FIG. 114 (a)).

  The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in a front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole. A sixth insertion hole 992c that penetrates to one side in the gravity direction of 922 (lower side in the gravity direction) and a standing wall 992a that stands on the inner periphery of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly formed.

  The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

  The standing wall 992a is erected from the entire edge portion of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 5th penetration hole 922 can be rolled to the 3rd channel | path member 993 side (FIG. 114 (b) right side).

  On the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a, an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end portion on the first passage member 991 side are formed. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. In the engaging portion 992d, the wiring of the detecting device SE4 and the detecting device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted between the engaging portion 992d and the standing wall 992a. Thereby, since wiring of detection device SE3 and detection device SE4 can be locked, it can control that detection device SE3 and detection device SE4 slip out from distribution unit 980 and passage unit 990.

  The protruding wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in front view on both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating through the semicircular shaft. The projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

  The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. The Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

  In addition, a guide wall 992c1 that is erected toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 standing on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction, and gravity. And a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

  The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed on the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimension is set to be substantially the same as the dimension at the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

  The detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

  The second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f that protrudes toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular protrusion 992f is provided with a circular hole fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through the third passage member 993, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st penetration hole 991a can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  Further, an annular ring protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 2nd penetration hole 991b can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  The third passage member 993 is formed in a plate-like shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed so as to penetrate at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from an edge portion of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction Mainly comprising a standing wall 993e standing on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

  The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

  The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge in the three directions excluding the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the seventh insertion hole 993a toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992 side). Is done. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 7th insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the opposite side to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side (FIG. 114 (b) right side).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be disposed closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the sorting unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the outer shape in the gravity direction of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be reduced in size.

  In the state in which the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the standing wall 993e has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the first wall portion 992c2 facing the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

  In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravity direction is formed on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game balls are sent. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

  That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, and therefore, the inner position of the detection hole SE1a is increased due to a slight displacement of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In this embodiment, the first wall 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravitational direction is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent. Since it is formed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface. As a result, it is possible to easily insert the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c into the detection hole SE1a.

  The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. In the state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 facing the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the long side in the direction orthogonal to the axis is set substantially the same. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

  The concave portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 992f. It is formed in a larger inner edge shape. The concave portion 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion so as to be coaxially formed with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f. Accordingly, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted into the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to thereby form the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  According to the pitching unit 970 configured as described above, the pitching unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, and the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. Is provided on the back side (opposite to the game area) of the front unit 940, so that a game that flows down the game area by replacing the pitching unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. Another game form can be made without affecting the flow of the ball.

  With reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, another unit (exchange unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-section of the exchange unit 1980 along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the distribution unit 980 mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the game area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the game area side. Formed in preparation.

  The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a to the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

  In addition, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is disposed on the game board 13.

  That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specification of the distribution unit 980 and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specification of the replacement unit 1980 are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, the game area (the front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, so it is difficult for the player to determine which specification, but the color arrangement of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 is different. By making it, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10).

  The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (exchange unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 in accordance with the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted therein. The bulging portion 1982 is formed to have a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the gravity direction.

  The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside and flow down. . Further, the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a position in the same gravity direction as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be sent to the opening 985d in the order of flow into the inflow port 982d.

  The rear base 1985 has an outer shape in front view substantially the same as the outer shape of the rear base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and communicates with the opening 985d communicating with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982 and the internal space of the through hole 981c. And an opening 985g.

  According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as described above, since the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980 as described above, the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980. Replacement (specification change) can be easily performed.

  Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed The machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting the game board (combined use) by replacing the entering unit with another entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the incoming ball unit is disposed on the front surface of the game board, for example, a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages needs to be secured in front of the game board in advance. For this reason, when a ball entering unit with a small number of passages is used, there is a problem in that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (entrance ball unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first and second passages TR1 and TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d. A prize opening unit 930 arranged on the front side, and arranged on the back side of the prize opening unit 930 through a through hole 60a of the base plate 60 and connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the prize opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. There is no need. Therefore, when the specification of the game board 13 is changed while the game board 13 (the base plate 60 and the front unit 940) is diverted (combined) by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the exchange unit 1980, the front face of the game board 13 is used. Can be used effectively.

  Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light transmissive material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the winning a prize opening unit. At the same time, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmissive material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate, Then, a seal is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since the base plate 60 can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmissive material) resin material, the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 flows through the front unit 940 and the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light transmissive material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed from a colored translucent (light transmissive material) resin material. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the unit 940. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down by changing the position in the front-rear direction, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the game ball path of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a pitching path TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 branched from the pitching path TR0. The distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a gaming machine having a different specification by changing from the sorting unit 980 having a large number of game ball passage paths to the replacement unit 1980 having a small number of passing paths, it is possible to suppress an operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980. In the case of changing from two distribution units 980 to one replacement unit 1980 with one downflow passage, the number of downflow passages of the distribution unit 980 is sufficient if one detection sensor is provided in the passage unit 990. There is a possibility that the detectors SE3 are disposed by the amount. On the other hand, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the ball sending passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from mistaken the number of the arrangements.

  On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls to the second winning opening 140 is disposed in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom of the passage arrangement can be increased accordingly.

  Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140 to the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the replacement unit 1980 is disposed in the front unit 940 (winning slot unit 930), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, the replacement unit 1980 is positioned by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a. Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

  Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of displacement (step) in the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as with the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of displacement (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 will be described. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the connection between the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball sending unit 970 is in a state of abutting in the front-rear direction (left and right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portions formed in the ball feeding unit 970 are It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

  More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d are provided with a second protrusion 982d1 formed in the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b are provided with a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the second ball-throwing portion 942c.

  Further, the second ball feeding portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are disposed in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

  Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicated with the first passage of the first member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine having two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of a game board is known. The game ball flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage and then flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be provided with interest.

  In this case, if there is a positional shift (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member is ensured. It is requested to do. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning those members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming the first member, the gaming board is inverted to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the gaming board. A separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is necessary, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed in the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 is opposed to the protruding portion 962g of the drive unit 960. A wall 942d is inserted. When the ball feeding unit 970 is disposed on the front unit 940, the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the arms 962e from which the protruding portions 962g are protruded.

  That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. With. Accordingly, the front unit 940 and the ball sending unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

  The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side in the facing direction of the pair of second ball feeding portions 942c of the front unit 940. As a result, the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b has the protruding portion 962g engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and the arm portion 962e engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. Positioning of the pitching unit 970 with respect to 940 can be performed effectively. That is, the positioning of the ball feeding unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) in the connection portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since the guide part 962b (arm part 962e) can be directly positioned (the connecting part of the second ball feeding part 942c and the side wall part 981b), compared with the case where the other part is positioned by the guide part 962b, Generation | occurrence | production of position shift (step) can be suppressed effectively.

  The drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening for disposing the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, the processing man-hour is reduced accordingly. The product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) on the front unit 940 including the second ball-throwing portion 942c. When each of the ball feeding units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the attachment workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the state where the drive unit 960 is disposed in the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. The Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the attachment workability can be improved accordingly.

  Further, in a state where the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engageable with the ball feeding unit 970 from the opposite side to the front unit 940. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball feeding unit 970 simultaneously with the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other. When the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e, the wall portion 962f, and the front unit 940 are connected to each other. The displacement member 966 described above is disposed between the rear surface base 941 and the opposite surface. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is disposed at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is inserted in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and dust and foreign matter can be prevented from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably prevent the pair of wing members from being opened or closed by suppressing the sliding of the projecting portion 966a due to dust or foreign matter entering the sliding groove 966a2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, the connection state will be described using the connection between the second ball-throwing portion 942 c and the side wall portion 981 b as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXXb of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of game board 13 in a -CXXb line. 121 (a) and 121 (b) illustrate a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). The

  As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set such that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

  Here, a game provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through an upstream end connected to the downstream end of the first passage member. The machine is known. However, in the structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected in this way, a positional shift between the two is unavoidable, so the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem in that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  Further, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60 as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning slot unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 may be separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (FIG. 120 (a) left-right direction). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, and the smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface side can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the space K1 formed between the rolling part 943a of the game ball of the second throwing part 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the game ball of the side wall part 981b, and the second throwing part A space K2 formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different in the rolling direction of the game ball (FIG. 121 (a) left-right direction). . Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball rolled from the 2nd ball-throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b enters into both the clearance gap K1 and the clearance gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second ball sending portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

  Next, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966. A concave portion 8966a6 is provided that is recessed toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in the rear view. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed in a plate shape that is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966 c is formed so that the inner edge shape in front view is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the displacement member 8966 is disposed inside the front unit 940 in a state where it is disposed. Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

  Further, the displacement member 8966 includes a projecting portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 122 upper side) to the short side direction (left and right direction in FIG. 122), and the other end in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) And a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the back side (the front side in FIG. 122).

  The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 that is formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and an abutting portion 966a1 that is located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966 and extends in the longitudinal direction. Prepare.

  The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted. The sliding groove 8966a2 extends in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and the concave portion 8966a6 extends to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

  The recess 8966a6 is set such that the width dimension in the lateral direction is larger than the maximum dimension between the opposed outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b. In addition, the side surface on the moving side of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (the left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

  Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the projection 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is recessed into the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside. Accordingly, the protrusion 945b can be displaced by bringing the protrusion 945b into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2.

  That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, the drive can be restricted from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6. And the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in a closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), the protrusion 945b can be received as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

  Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has been described with respect to the case where the distal end is disposed inside the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is used. The tip of the projection protrudes from the coupling hole 966b1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  123A and 123B are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 123A and FIG. 123B correspond to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945. In FIG. 123 (b), the closed wing member 945 is illegally operated (forced release) by the player and is released from the closed state. The engagement state in the middle of displacement is shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is bent in a side view, and extends to the distal end portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 9965a. The rotating portion 965b is continuous and is extended to the connecting member 964 side.

  As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the distal end portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotary shaft 965c is reduced as the tip portion 9965a is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a protrudes from the coupling side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to the one end in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). And an installation portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 9965e is formed such that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the insertion portion 9965e is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 966b1, and the end of the tip is connected to the connection hole. It protrudes from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the coupling hole 966b1 to the engagement portion 9965e3 protruding to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the coupling hole 966b1. And a bulging portion 965e1.

  The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is formed at a position separating a slight gap from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123B, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other and transmitted. The displacement of the member 9965 can be restricted.

  More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the one-side contacted portion 966b2 of the coupling hole 966b1 contacts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is displaced toward the rotational shaft 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. Thereby, since the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is similarly regulated.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is rotated before the displacement member 966, whereby the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are moved. It can suppress contacting. Accordingly, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965.

  As described above, the protrusion 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 is connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when driving is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, and the rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes the insertion portion 9965e and the engagement portion 9965e3 projecting from the distal end of the insertion portion 9965e, and displaces the displacement member 966 with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only disposed at the inner end of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the insertion of the transmission member 10965 is performed. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). 124 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 according to the ninth embodiment is bent in a side view, and extends to the distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 10965a. It is formed from a rotating portion that is continuous and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

  As in the sixth embodiment, the distal end portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotary shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a protrudes from the connection side between the rotation shaft 965c and the insertion portion 10965e to be inserted into a connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, which will be described later, at one end of the distal end portion 10965a. And a standing portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted into the connection hole 10966b. The insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion bulging from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connection hole 966b1. 964d1.

  The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape that curves around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recess 10966d of a displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

  The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed at a substantially central position when viewed from the front so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 124A). The second opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second ball feeding portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941, and the second ball feeding portion 942c is inserted inside. It is arranged with. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the opposite side to the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  Further, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes in the short direction from one end in the longitudinal direction, a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the back side, and a surface opposite to the bulging portion 966b. And a recessed portion 10966d that is recessed.

  The concave portion 10966d is formed to be continuous with the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes a contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed to be curved around the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap from the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged opposite to each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connection hole 966b1.

  The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed on the radially inner side with respect to the abutted surface 10966d1 having the rotation shaft 965c as the center.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposite side contacted portion 966b3 and the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connection hole 966b1 is the insertion portion in the front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 (see FIG. 124A) of 10965e in the gravity direction. Thus, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

  According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, when the solenoid 610 is driven, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Is done. Thereby, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contacted surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c. , The contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state with a slight gap from the contacted surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 are displaced without interference.

  As described above, since the distance dimension between the other side abutted part 966b3 of the coupling hole 966b1 and the one side abutted part 966b2 is formed larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, the insertion portion 10965e disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out of the recess 10966d. Accordingly, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid. Accordingly, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contacted surface 10966d1. Thus, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced to the inside of the recess 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Accordingly, the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, and the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back side by the rotational displacement. Accordingly, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the distal end of the insertion portion 10965e. When the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contacted portion One side in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 10965e is brought into contact with 966b2 and the engagement portion 10965e3 is brought into engagement with the displacement member 10966, and the other side in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 10965e (the bulging portion) is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity until the position 965e1) contacts, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without rotating. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly retained from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 to the outside, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 is released from the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

  Next, the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. However, the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is separated from the second winning opening 140. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. FIG. 126 (a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) illustrates the open state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140. In the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the second ball feeding portions 942c is set substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball feeding portion 942c.

  The pair of second guide walls 11194b is formed with a gear tooth flank first tooth surface 11942b1 on opposite side surfaces thereof. In addition, the pair of second guide walls 11194b is set such that the separation distance between the facing walls is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) of the displacement member 11966 described later. Is disposed.

  The first gear surface 11942b1 meshes with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966 described later. As a result, the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11192b1 can be rotated by the displacement member 11966 being slid.

  The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 11967, and a shaft on the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968 is formed.

  The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the thickness direction at a substantially central position in front view. The first member 11967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and the second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding projection 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of the sandwiched short direction.

  The support portion 11966d protrudes toward the first member 11967 and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Accordingly, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

  The sliding projection 11966e is provided on the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Accordingly, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

  The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially portal shape when viewed from the front, and has second tooth surfaces 11968a1 of gear tooth surfaces on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction), Horizontal direction of the sliding groove 11968b formed in the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extending direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (FIG. 126 (a) vertical direction) and the inner edge formed in the gate shape And an edge portion 11968c that is inclined in the thickness direction on the end face.

  The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are engaged with the first gear GY1, respectively. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

  As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding projection 11966e.

  Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

  The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion of the blade portion 11968c is more than the inner surface of the second ball feeding portion 942c on the other end side in the gravitational direction when the wing member 945 is closed. It is arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the front-end | tip of the blade part 11968c can be arrange | positioned in the gravity direction other end side rather than the rolling surface of the game ball which flows in from the 2nd prize winning opening 140. FIG.

  In addition, the projecting distance of the second ball-throwing portion 942c is set to a length that makes contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the second ball feeding portion 942c is set to be substantially the same position as the tip position of the second ball feeding portion 942c. Accordingly, the foreign matter inserted into the second winning port 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface and the blade portion and 11968c flowing from the second winning port 140.

  According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is closed, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. And the second ball-throwing portion 942c can be disposed below the tip of the gravitational direction, so that the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is cut off by an unauthorized operation in a state where the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement of the game ball entering from the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 11966.

  On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, whereby the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement amount of the first member 11967 is set larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount double the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 The rolling part 943a, which is the rolling surface, can be separated by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in an open state, it is possible to allow the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 to flow down.

  That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball that flows down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed, and the edge of the path Since the blade portion that comes into frictional contact with the end portion (the end portions of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c) is provided, the illegal thing that is illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 is cut. Can do.

  For example, the detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) detects the passage of the game ball by adhering the tip of the thread to the game ball, causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 and passing the rolling part 943a. In the state where the game ball has reached (1), the other end of the thread is operated (drawn and pulled), and the game ball is reciprocated to cause the detection device SE4 to detect a plurality of times. According to the tenth embodiment, in response to such an illegal act, even if the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. When 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passages of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is taken as the blade portion 11968c. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the second ball feeding portion 942c are pressed against the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c. A thread | yarn can be cut | disconnected between the edge part of the rolling part 943a or the 2nd ball-throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  Next, the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. However, the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is separated from the second winning opening 140. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. FIG. In FIG. 128 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 128 (b), the open state of the wing member 945 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140. In the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a is set to be short, and the protruding tip surface is set to a position where it abuts the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. The

  In addition, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 are provided on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted through shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

  The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposing direction on one end side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the opposite side surface. The distance dimension between the facing portions of the pair of contact portions 12942b2 is set slightly larger than the width dimension in the short direction of the first member 12967 described later. Accordingly, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

  The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate as viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivotal support on the rear base 941. The first gear GY1 meshed with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968 are mainly provided.

  The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back surface base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface thereof includes the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

  The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two-stage gears each having a different size, and includes a small-diameter small-diameter gear GY2a and a large-diameter large-diameter gear GY2b. Further, as described above, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back surface base 941, and the tooth surface of the small-diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large-diameter gear GY2b. The surface meshes with the second member 12968.

  The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 12966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c, and the second opening. Sliding projections 12966e are provided so as to project annularly on both sides in the short direction across 12966c, and third tooth surfaces 12966f of gear tooth surfaces are formed on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

  The second opening 12966c is set such that the shape of the inner edge in front view is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c includes a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

  The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, and the pair of wing members 945 is provided. In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

  The sliding protrusion 12966e protrudes on the second member 12968 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Accordingly, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

  The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. Accordingly, the first gear GY1 can be rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is engaged with the small-diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, and thus the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

  The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body in a front view, and is disposed in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outer side in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (the vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). And is formed with a sliding groove 12968b that is formed in the shape of an elongated hole in the plate thickness direction, and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the connecting portion that connects the pair of extending portions. Is done.

  As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the gravitational direction by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

  The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a mesh with the large-diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2. Accordingly, the second member 12968 is slid and displaced by the rotation of the second gear GY2. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated when the first member 12967 is slid and displaced by the transmission member 965. Accordingly, the second member 12968 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the first member 12967.

  Note that the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to have opposite slide displacement directions, and the displacement amount of the second member 12968 is set to be larger by the small diameter second gear GY2.

  The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion of the blade portion 6683 is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball-throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) On the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) than the inner surface of. That is, the second member 12968 is disposed at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 in a front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning port 140. it can.

  For example, the tip of a thread is bonded to the game ball, and the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling unit 943a and the second ball feeding unit 942c, and the detection device SE4. In the state in which the game ball has reached the detection position, there is an illegal act of causing the detection device SE4 to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out and pulling) the other end of the thread and reciprocating the game ball. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 opened, the pair of wing members 945 is displaced from the opened position to the closed position. When the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. Can be sandwiched and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second member 12968 is located on the other side in the gravitational direction with respect to the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 enters the second winning port 140. Be placed. As described above, in a state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is disposed outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can block the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, so that the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is set to the tenth distance. The number can be smaller than that of the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the gaming ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is performed through the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966 has been described. In the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 is used. The transmission of the drive from the blade member 945 to the blade member 945 is performed with one member. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 930 along the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line in FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line only for the sake of easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 are closed, and the shaft portion 961b projects from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are in a state of being opened.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment is disposed on the back side (the right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific prize opening unit 950, and the shaft of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-coupled. It arrange | positions in the state which faced the direction (FIG. 129 (b) up-down direction). In addition, a transmission member 13965 is coupled to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

  The transmission member 13965 is erected from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and from the end of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. And an engaging portion 13965j.

  The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at the end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Accordingly, the transmission member 13965 can be slid and displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction.

  The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping with the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 13965j is set to have a standing dimension that exceeds the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 and overlaps the protrusion 945b in a front view.

  Further, a support portion 13965j1 that is substantially C-shaped in a side view protrudes from the standing tip of the engaging portion 13965j. The support portion 13965j1 is set such that the facing distance inside the opening is larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

  Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the gravitational direction, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the gravitational direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. When the protrusion 945b is displaced, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). In other words, the space for arranging the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 is concentrated on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space for arranging other members and devices becomes the pair of wing members 945 (second winning prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

  Next, the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is described. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 130A and FIG. 131A are rear views of a winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXb-CXXXb line in FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) shows the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line in FIG. 131 (a). FIG.

  In FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is shown by chain lines. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The opened state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case of being done is illustrated. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning port 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning port 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and the second opening 966c is located at substantially the center position when viewed from the front. It penetrates and forms in the plate | board thickness direction (FIG.130 (b) left-right direction).

  The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) from the one end side (FIG. 130 (a) upper side) to the short side direction (FIG. And a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the rear side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge on the back side (the back base 941 side), and a horizontally-long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in an inner portion in the back view. The connection hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the distal end (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the inner edge shape is set larger than the outer shape of the distal end of the transmission member 965.

  The connection hole 14966b1 is configured such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is set to be substantially square, and the one-side abutted portion 966b2 on the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))). And the other-side abutted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

  The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed such that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 966b3.

  Further, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball Diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connection hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravitational direction and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side contact is made. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

  As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set such that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is greater than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -The diameter of the game ball), the free movement of the displacement member 14966 allows the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140 to be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), the displacement member 14966 Is disposed in the path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 14966.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is disposed and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall. Positioned and positioned inside the portion 981b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb line of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

  First, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a box shape and is disposed to face each other, a first housing portion 15962 and a second housing portion 963, a first housing portion 15962, A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second storage portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a support member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first storage portion 15962 and the second storage portion 963. And a transmission member 965 connected to the main body.

  The first housing portion 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. 132 (a)), and the back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover portion 962a. And a guide portion 15962b projecting to the reference).

  The drive unit 15960 is formed in a space between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 that are formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 that is pivotally supported by the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 and connected to the connection member 964 are mainly formed. Is done.

  The first housing portion 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 93 (a)), and the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover 962a. And a guide portion 15962b projecting to the reference).

  The guide portion 15962b is connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, the wall portion 962f formed in a front portal structure, and the wall portion A protruding portion 962g that protrudes from 962f on the opposite side to the covering portion 962a (the back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e are located on the other side in the gravity direction and protrude from the wall portion 962f. The second arm portion 15962j and the third arm portion 15962h projecting on the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j across the wall portion 962f are mainly formed.

  The arm portion 15962e protrudes from the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the projecting position in the gravity direction of the arm portion 15962e is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

  The second arm portion 15962j is formed to be connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of facing portions 962e is set smaller than the width dimension between the facing portions of the pair of arm portions 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second arm portion 15962j is set such that the distance dimension in the gravitational direction is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing side portions of the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 980 in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the sorting unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall 981b.

  The pair of second arm portions 15962j is set such that the distance dimension on the outer side in the opposing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side walls 981b in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, when the distribution unit 980 (ball feeding unit 970) is disposed in the winning a prize opening unit 930, the positioning can be performed by disposing the second arm portion 15962j inside the side wall portion 981b.

  The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between facing the arm portions 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is provided with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the rear base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

  In the protruding portion 15962h1, the protruding distance from the end portion of the second arm portion 15962j to the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is disposed inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

  Accordingly, the upstream end portion of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed in a different position in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the timing and the side surface when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface, and the influence of the game ball is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can combine the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140 It becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can easily allow a dimensional effect or a mounting intersection.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second pitching portion 16942c of the winning unit 930 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is disposed inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c. The protrusion 16942c2 is disposed inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has a standing front end surface with a winning hole unit in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. It is formed in a size that comes into contact with the tip of the second ball sending portion 16942c of 930.

  Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed in the standing base end side on the standing distal end surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radial separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and the recessed shape in side view is a shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball feeding portion 16942c described later in side view. Are set to be substantially the same.

  Accordingly, when a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be hardly caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  In addition, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the erected base end side is inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which rolls the rolling surface of the through-hole 981c bounces upward in the switching part of the rolling path | route of the game ball.

  In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball collided with the recessed distal surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 Can be pressed to the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced up and bouncing at the recessed front end surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to protrude from the protruding front end surface of the second ball feeding portion 16942c, and the outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. Thus, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the gaming ball is recessed in the dent portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. Can be prevented from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to smoothly pass (flow down) the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed with different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the side step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Further, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. The bottom surface downstream end of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed at a position different from the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a on the downstream side in the game ball passing direction, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball-throwing portion 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively low rigidity and may be broken. According to the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, the bottom surface upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be maintained in different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side The timing of passing through the step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the effect of the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the game ball, so that the game ball can flow (pass) smoothly. be able to.

  In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning prize opening unit 930 side and the concave notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the concave notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, thereby the rolling part 943a. The position shift of the sorting unit 980 to the upper side in the gravity direction can be restricted. That is, at the level difference where the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a, it is easy for the game ball to jump up. Compared to the opposite step, it is easy to inhibit the smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for smooth flow of the game ball that the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be prevented from being displaced in the gravity direction above the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second pitching portion 17942c of the winning unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall 981b and the end of the second recess 942c1 of the second ball throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in a side view. In the sixteenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball-throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in a side view. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment is formed such that the distal end surface 17981b3 of the standing distal end is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the distal end side. . In other words, the front end surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

  On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed such that the leading end surface 17942c3 of the projecting leading end face is inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball feeding portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b in the state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

  Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the game ball passing direction, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the game ball passing direction. Compared to the case of (sixth embodiment), the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, for example, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having the recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment. The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection mold can be moderated. Improvements can be made.

  Next, a displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the 18 embodiment is the second It is arranged on the rolling path of a game ball that enters from the winning opening 140. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a), and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment as viewed from the back, and FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 135 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line in FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

  135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the opened state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 being forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a), and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b), and 137 (b), only the pair of wing members 945, the rear base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. The

  As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 135 (a)) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that is bent substantially L-shaped when viewed from the back, and extends from the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the gravitational direction, and from the end portion of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 below the gravitational direction. And a transmission portion 18966a7 that is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction. Thereby, when a pair of wing member 945 is made into a closed state, it can control that the game ball which passes the 2nd prize opening 140 flows in into penetration hole 981c of ball sending unit 970 from rolling part 943a.

  Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball feeding portion 942c. That is, in the rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball feeding portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

  Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the seventeenth embodiment, the rotation range on the tip end portion 965a side is set larger when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension in the gravitational direction on the front end portion 965a side is set to be larger, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension in the gravitational direction of the second winning opening 140.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896g can be disposed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. An opening in the mouth 140 can be arranged.

  Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity by the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The protrusion 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a first after the protrusion 945b slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b relative to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission portion 18966a6. Without sliding, it slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6. On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is pushed and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7 when sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. Thereby, a pair of wing member 945 is displaced to an open state.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball feeding unit 970 from the rolling portion 943a.

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing member 945 is rotated by the projection 945b of the wing member 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966g is disposed below the inner periphery of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction, and the side surface on the front side is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and Since it abuts against the projecting tip of the second ball-throwing portion 942c, a second prize is awarded between the blade portion 18966g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball-throwing portion 942c in accordance with the movement of the second ball-throwing portion 942c. The biased object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut.

  That is, the displacement member 18966 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, Since the blade portion 18966g is rubbed against the edge portion of the passage (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c), it is illegally inserted from the second winning port 140 into the passage of the game ball. The feature can be cut.

  For example, the detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) detects the passage of the game ball by adhering the tip of the thread to the game ball and causing the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140 and passing through the rolling portion 943a. In the state where the game ball has reached (see), there is an illegal act that the detection device SE4 detects a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread and reciprocating the game ball. According to the seventeenth embodiment, in response to such a fraud, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 18966 is slid, and when the blade portion 18966g crosses the path of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 18966g to roll. When pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c, and when 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the projections 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut (folded) by an illegal act of the player, the through-holes of the displacement members 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is disposed on the lower side in the gravity direction. Thereby, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the flow of the game balls entering from the second winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 18966.

  In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the tip end portion 18965a is displaced downward in the gravitational direction. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in a direction to close the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 is forcibly opened by the player's fraud, the displacement member 18966 can be prevented from being forcibly opened in the same manner. As a result, the player's cheating can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 162, a winning opening unit 19930 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  First, with reference to FIG. 138, a winning opening unit 19930 disposed on the base plate 19060 of the game board 13 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13 in the eighteenth embodiment. Note that illustrations of units other than the prize winning unit 19930 disposed on the base plate 19060 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81), etc.) are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the base plate 19060 has a through hole 19060a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 19060 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 138) of the center opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

  The through hole 19060a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 19940, which will be described later, in a front view.

  The base plate 19060 is provided with a front unit 19940, which will be described later, from the front (front) side, and a distribution unit 19980 and a passage unit 19990, which will be described later, from the rear (rear) side, and the front unit 19940 and the distribution unit 19980, The passage unit 19990 is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 19930 will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 139 (b) is a rear view of the winning port unit 19930. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning port unit 19930. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 19930, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning port unit 19930.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the winning opening unit 19930 includes a front unit 19940, a distribution unit 19980 disposed on the back side of the front unit 19940 (FIG. 139 (b) on the front side of the paper), and the front unit. It is mainly provided with a passage unit 19990 disposed on the back side of 19940 and on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the sorting unit 19980.

  The front unit 19940 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is larger than the through hole 19060a (see FIG. 138) of the base plate 19060. Therefore, by arranging the front unit 19940 on the base plate 19060, the opening of the through hole 19060a can be closed. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 passes through the through hole 19060a from a space other than the passage path (the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140) of the gaming ball formed in the front unit 19940. Can be suppressed.

  The distribution unit 19980 includes an opening U8 that is continuous with a first winning port 64 of a front unit 19940, which will be described later, and the back side of the game board 13 through the first winning port 64 from the opening U8 (FIG. 139 (b) in front of the drawing). The game ball sent to the side) can be received inside (see FIG. 138). A detailed description of the distribution unit 19980 will be described later.

  The passage unit 19990 can receive a game ball sent from the opening U9, which will be described later, to the back side of the game board 13 (the front side of FIG. 139 (b)) through the second winning opening 140 (FIG. 138). reference). A detailed description of the passage unit 19990 will be given later.

  Next, the front unit 19940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. 143 (a) is a front view of the front unit 19940, FIG. 143 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 143 (c) is a CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line in FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front unit 19940. FIG. 144A is a perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 144B is a perspective rear view of the front unit 19940. FIG. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 19940.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the front unit 19940 is disposed with a back base 19941 fastened to the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138) and a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball on the back base 19941. The front base 19943 and two (a pair of) wing members 945 disposed in a rotatable state between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 are mainly provided.

  The rear base 19941 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular outer shape in front view and a predetermined plate thickness. The back base 19941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. When the front unit 19940 is disposed on the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), the through hole of the base plate 19060 is inserted through the back base 19941. The inside of 19060a (see FIG. 138) can be visually recognized.

  The back base 19941 is cut out at the edge of the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and a first winning port 64 that is formed in a position continuous with an opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980 described later, and the first prize. An intermediate port 19941h formed penetrating below a port 64 (lower side of FIG. 143 (b)) at a position continuous with an opening U7 of a distribution unit 19980 described below, and connected to an opening U9 described below below the intermediate port 19941h. It mainly includes a second winning opening 140 formed so as to penetrate the position.

  The back base 19941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the thickness direction at the outer edge portion. Furthermore, a positioning projection 942a is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1 of the through hole 941a so as to protrude in a columnar shape from the back surface of the back base 19941.

  The back base 19941 is formed with a plurality of fastening holes 19941i and fastening holes 19941j on the side of the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990 (see FIG. 142) around the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. The fastening hole 19941i is a hole for screwing a screw through which a sorting unit 19980 described later is screwed, whereby the front unit 19940 and the sorting unit 19980 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 19941j is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 19990 described later is screwed, whereby the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed.

  The first winning opening 64 is formed in a substantially U-shape that opens on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction) in the rear view. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed such that the inner edge is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball flowing into a first receiving portion 19941g of the front base 19943 described later can be sent to the back side (FIG. 143 (c) right side) of the game board 13 through the first winning port 64 (FIG. 138). reference).

  The intermediate port 19941h is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view, and has an inner edge dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball sent through an opening U8 and an intermediate port 19941h, which will be described later, can be sent to the front side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138).

  The second winning opening 140 is formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. The second winning opening 140 is disposed between the wing members 945 facing each other. Thereby, a game ball sent between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140 (see FIG. 138).

  The second winning opening 140 has a first opening 19941e on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of each edge on both sides in the lateral direction (FIG. 143 (b) both sides in the left and right direction). It is formed in an arc shape centering on the axis of the hole 19941d. The first opening 19941e can be provided with the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing | blade member 945 rotates, it can suppress that protrusion 945b contact | abuts to the inner surface of the 1st opening 19941e.

  The back base 19941 is formed with first shaft holes 19941d formed in two circular shapes on the outer side in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140 (FIG. 143 (b) outer side in the left-right direction).

  The front base 19943 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with an outer shape when viewed from the front. The front base 19943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-like body. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 19943 and the back base 19941.

  The front base 19943 includes a first receiving portion 19941g that protrudes toward the back base 19941 at positions corresponding to the first winning port 64, the intermediate port 19941h, and the second winning port 140 of the rear base 1994. The intermediate receiving part 19943e and the second receiving part 19943c are mainly provided.

  The first receiving portion 19941g is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the back, and the first winning port 64 of the back base 19941 is disposed inside the front view. Moreover, the 1st receiving part 19941g is formed in the magnitude | size which can receive the game ball for one ball inside. As a result, the game balls flowing down from the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the first receiving unit 19941g (the first winning port 64) to the front side (the left side in FIG. 143 (c)) of the gaming board 13 are transferred to the first receiving unit. It can be made to flow inside 19941g (see FIG. 138).

  Further, the first receiving portion 19941g is formed with a protruding portion 19941g1 protruding downwardly inclined toward the back base 19941 side on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the front surface of the upper surface of the protruding portion 19941g1. The connecting portion with the base 19943 side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) is formed to be curved. The game ball that flows in with a velocity component on one side in the gravitational direction (lower in the gravitational direction) inside the first receiving portion 19941g and the projecting portion 19941g1 come into contact with each other so that the game ball is on the back side (FIG. 143 (c) ) Provide velocity component to right side). Thereby, the game ball is sent to the opening U8 provided on the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the first winning opening 64 through the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 161).

  The opening surrounded by the front base 19943 and the ends on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the pair of first receiving portions 19941g is the entrance for entering the game ball into the winning unit 19930.

  The intermediate receiving portion 19943e is formed of a plate-like body protruding on one side in the gravity direction on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first receiving portion 19941g, and the lower surface 19943e1 of the intermediate receiving portion 19943e is the first It is curved toward the receiving portion 19941g side (the upper side in FIG. 143 (b)). Thereby, the game ball passing through the intermediate port 19941h can be sent to one side in the gravity direction via the passage TR3.

  The second receiving portion 19943c is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the back, and the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the second receiving portion 19943c in a state where the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 are fastened (combined). Is disposed on the inner side of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 19941 (on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) with respect to the lower edge of the second winning opening 140). In addition, a pair of wing members 945 described later is disposed on the outside in the opposing direction of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 (the outer side in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)). The distance between the outer surfaces of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear base 19941 side (right side in FIG. 143 (c)).

  The distance from the edge on the other side in the gravitational direction 140 (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 19941 to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the front base 19943 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball flowing down between a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, can be sent to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1, and the game ball is rolled on the upper surface 19943c2, so that the rear side of the back base 19941 (see FIG. 143 (c) right side).

  The front base 19943 is an annular ring that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941 on the outer side in the opposing direction of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 (FIG. 143 (b) outer side in the left-right direction). A protrusion 943b is provided. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941, and the other end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the second shaft hole 943b1 of the annular protrusion 943b of the front base 19943. . Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 facing each other.

  Next, the distribution unit 19980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

  First, the configuration of the distribution unit 19980 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 147 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 19980. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective front view of the sorting unit 19980, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective rear view of the sorting unit 19980. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 19980.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the sorting unit 19980 includes a first side base 19981 which will be described later in the axial direction of the sorting member 19983, the first side base 19981, and the shaft member 988 a of the sorting member 19983. A second side base 199885 disposed on the side opposite to the one cover member 199887; a sorting member 19983 disposed in a rotatable state between the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985; A first cover member 199887 disposed on the opposite side of the first side surface base 19981 to the second side surface base 19985 and a second cover disposed on the opposite side of the second side surface base 19985 from the first side surface base 19981. A member 19988, a detection device SE5, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) of magnetic bodies 988b are mainly provided.

  The arrangement member on which the distribution member 19983 is arranged includes the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 199885 (first member) itself, but the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base are included. Not limited to 19985 (first member), but directly or indirectly connected to the second member on which the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 199885 (first member) are disposed, or to the second member. A third member is also included. For example, the winning member unit 19930 is exemplified as the second member, and the third member is directly or indirectly connected to the gaming board 13 in addition to the gaming board 13 on which the winning hole unit 19930 is disposed. The various members (for example, the outer frame 11, the inner frame 12, the glass unit 16, etc.) are illustrated.

  The sorting member 19983 includes a pair of action parts 19983a, an intermediate plate 19983b formed between the pair of action parts 19983a, a through hole 983c, a contact part 19983d, a wall part 19983e, a magnetic body 988c, It is mainly provided with.

  In the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment, the pair of action portions 19983a and the intermediate plate 19983b are disposed at an approximately right angle, and pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction (FIG. 147 (a ) It is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to a symmetry plane extending in the left-right direction).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 151, the 1st side surface base 19981 and the 2nd side surface base 199885 are demonstrated. 151A is a side view of the first side base 19981 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLIa in FIG. 149, and FIG. 151B is a side view of the first side base 19981 in the direction of arrow CLIb in FIG. 151 (c) is a side view of the second side surface base 199885 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIc in FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 (d) is a side view of the second side surface base 199885 in the direction of the arrow CLId in FIG. FIG.

  The first side surface base 19981 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is an upper surface plate 19981a formed from a plate-like body that is vertically long when viewed from above, and a game from the upper surface plate 19981a to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). A lower surface plate 19981b formed from a plate-like body that is spaced apart by a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere and is vertically long when viewed from above, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) The front plate 19981c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is connected to the end of the front plate, and the opposite side of the player of the upper plate 19981a and the lower plate 19981b (right side of FIG. 151 (a)) Back plate 19981d formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in the back view and is connected to the end of the upper plate 199 and the upper surface plate 199 at the approximate center in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983. 1a and a lower plate 19981b are connected to each other and a central plate 19981e formed from a substantially rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the side, and a player side of the front plate 19981c (left side in FIG. 151 (a)). And the bulging portion 19982 is mainly provided.

  The player side means the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the opposite side to the player means the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The same applies to the following.

  The upper surface plate 19981a is provided with circular fastening holes 19981f and 19981g on its upper surface side (upper side in FIG. 151 (a)) and a projecting portion 19981h formed to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19981a toward the upper surface side. Is done. The fastening hole 19981f is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through a second side base 199885 described later. As a result, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 199885 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 19981g is a hole into which a screw for inserting a first cover member 19987 described later is screwed. Accordingly, the first side surface base 19981 and the first cover member 199887 can be fastened and fixed.

  The projecting portion 19981h is formed at an approximate center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d, and is inclined to the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction). A recess 19981h1 for forming a part of the detection device SE5 is formed. On the upper surface of the projecting portion 19981h, a notch portion is formed for allowing a wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE5 to pass therethrough.

  The lower surface plate 19981b is formed with a recess 19981i that is recessed from the upper surface of the lower surface plate 19981b toward the lower surface side. The recess 19981i is formed at the approximate center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d, and is inclined toward the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A part of the detection device SE5 is formed in a shape that can be disposed. Further, an opening U1 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (the left side in FIG. 151 (b)) on the first cover member 19987 side (the front side in FIG. 151 (b)) than the center plate 19981e described later. The opening U1 is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is formed at a position continuous with a passage TR7 of the passage unit 19990 described later.

  The front plate 19981c is formed closer to the first cover member 19987 than the center plate 19981e (FIG. 151 (b) on the front side of the sheet).

  The center plate 19981e is formed with a rear end portion connected to the front surface of the back plate 19981d, and a part of the detection device SE5 is disposed from the projecting portion 19981h of the top plate 19981a to the recess 19981i of the bottom plate 19981b. A recess 19981j is formed. Further, an opening U2 is formed on the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) from the recess 19981j. The opening U2 is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  Further, between the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b, the center plate 19981e and the back surface plate 19981d are connected, and the overhanging portion 19981e1 projecting to the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) front side on the paper surface). Is formed. The overhanging portion 19981e1 is formed to be bent in an arc shape toward the center plate 19981e and the back plate 19981d when viewed from above (see FIG. 153).

  The bulging portion 19982 is connected to a side plate 19982a formed from a plate-like body that is vertically long and substantially rectangular when viewed from the side, and one side of the side plate 19982a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). A lower surface plate 19982b formed from the side plate 19982a, a game ball guide wall 19982c connected to the rear plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and a side surface of the side plate 19982a from the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) (protruding portion toward the front side of the paper surface) and a front view projecting from the side surface of the side plate 19982 a toward the first cover member 19987 side (FIG. 151 (b) the front side of the paper surface). It is formed mainly including an overhanging portion 19982e and a housing portion 986b formed from a vertically long and substantially rectangular plate-like body.

  The side plate 19982a includes a fastening hole 19981f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a fastening hole 19981g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a first cover. It is mainly provided with a concave portion 19982f formed to be concaved toward the member 19987 side.

  The concave portion 19982f is a portion in which the wall portion 19983e of the sorting member 19983 is disposed, and protrudes in an annular shape toward the second side surface base 19985 (the front side in FIG. 151 (a)). A bearing portion 982c is provided.

  The lower surface plate 19982b includes a front-side contact portion 19982b1 and a back-side contact portion 19982b2 for restricting the rotation of the sorting member 19983. The front side contact portion 19982b1 is formed to be inclined to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction) toward the back plate 19981d (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and the back side contact portion 19982b2 is formed on the back plate 19981d. As it goes, it is inclined to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

  The game ball guide wall 19982c includes a first curved wall 19982c1 disposed on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction) and a first curved wall 19982c1 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the first curved wall 19982c1. The second curved wall 19982c2 is connected to the first curved wall 19982c1, and the first curved wall 19982c1 is curved toward the opposite side to the player (right side in FIG. 151 (a)). The curved wall 19982c2 is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

  The lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed in an arc shape centering on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

  The overhanging portion 19982e is formed with a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)). The guide wall 19982e1 is formed in an annular shape, and its inner edge shape is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941i of the back base 19941 described above (see FIG. 143 (b)).

  The second side base 19985 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is a top plate 19985a formed from a plate-like body that is vertically long when viewed from above, and a game from the top plate 19985a to one side in the gravitational direction (lower in the gravitational direction). The lower surface plate 19985b formed from a plate-like body that is vertically long and substantially rectangular and is opposed to each other with a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b (left side of FIG. 151 (d)) The front plate 19985c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, which is connected to the end of the front plate), and the opposite side of the player of the top plate 199885a and the bottom plate 19985b (FIG. 151 (c) left side) ) And a back plate 19985d formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in a rear view when viewed from the back, and an end of the first side base 19981 side (FIG. 151 (c) front side of the paper). Up A side plate 19985e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side and connected to the plate 19985a and the bottom plate 19985b, and a player side of the front plate 19985c (right side in FIG. 151 (c)). And a bulging portion 19986 that is mainly formed.

  The upper surface plate 19985a has a circular through hole 19985f and a fastening hole 19985g on the upper surface side (the upper side in FIG. 151 (a)), and a projecting portion 19985h formed to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19985a toward the upper surface side. Formed in preparation. As described above, the first side base 19981 and the second side base 199885 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 199885f into the first side base 19981. Further, the fastening hole 19985g is a hole for screwing a screw through which a second cover member 19988 described later is inserted. As a result, the second side base 19985 and the second cover member 19988 can be fastened and fixed.

  The projecting portion 19985h is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting portion 19981h of the first side surface base 19981, and is inclined to the back plate 19985d side (the left side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction). It is formed. Further, the projecting portion 19985h includes a concave portion 19985h1 in which a part of a detection device SE5 described later is disposed.

  The lower surface plate 19985b is formed with a concave portion 19985i that is recessed from the upper surface of the lower surface plate 19985b toward the lower surface side.

  The concave portion 19985i is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portion 19981i of the first side surface base 19981, and is inclined to the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Is done. Further, the concave portion 19985i is formed in a shape in which a part of a detection device SE5 described later can be disposed. Further, an opening U3 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (d)). The opening U3 is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is formed at a position continuous with a passage TR8 of the passage unit 19990 described later.

  The front plate 19985c is formed with a circular fastening hole 19985g on the front side (left side in FIG. 151 (d)).

  The side plate 199885e is formed with a recess 19985k for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 at a position corresponding to the recess 19981j formed in the center plate 19981e of the first side base 19981.

  Further, an opening U4 is formed on the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) from the recess 19985k, and an opening U5 is formed on the back plate 19985d side (left side in FIG. 151 (c)) from the recess 19985k. The opening U4 and the opening U5 are each formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  The bulging portion 199886 includes a side plate 199886a formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in a side view, and a front surface that projects from the side surface of the side plate 19986a toward the second cover member 19988 (right side in FIG. 147 (a)). It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 199886e formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in the vertical direction.

  The side plate 19986a has a through hole 19985f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a fastening hole 19985g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the first side surface. It is mainly provided with a bearing portion 985j that protrudes in an annular shape toward the base 19981 (the front side in FIG. 151 (c)).

  The overhanging portion 199886e is formed with a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  Returning to FIG. 150 from FIG. The first cover member 199887 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in side view, and has circular through holes 199887a around the both ends in the longitudinal direction and the first side base 19981 side ( As shown in FIG. 147 (a) on the right side, the first side base 19981 is mainly formed with a substantially rectangular projecting portion 199887b disposed in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19981c of the first side surface base 19981. As described above, the first side base 19981 and the first cover member 199887 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 199887a into the first side base 19981.

  The overhanging portion 199887b on the back plate 19981d side (FIG. 147 (b) right side) of the first side surface base 19981 is curved in an arc shape toward the side opposite to the first side surface base 19981 (FIG. 147 (a) left side). It is formed.

  The second cover member 19988 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in a side view, and has circular through holes 19988a around the both ends in the longitudinal direction, and the second side surface base 19985 side ( Referring to FIG. 147 (a) (left side), a projecting portion 19988b having a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed mainly in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19985c of the second side surface base 199885 is formed. As described above, the second side base 19985 and the second cover member 199988 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through-hole 19998a into the second side base 19985.

  The overhanging portion 19988b on the back plate 19985d side (the right side of FIG. 147 (b)) of the second side surface base 199885 is curved in an arc shape toward the opposite side (the right side of FIG. 147 (a)). It is formed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153, the configuration inside the distribution unit 19980 will be described.

  152 (a) and 152 (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 19980 along the line CLIIa-CLIIa in FIG. 147 (a), and FIG. 153 is the sorting unit along the line CLIII-CLIII in FIG. 152 (a). FIG. In FIG. 152 (a), the lower surface of the action portion 19983a of the sorting member 19983 and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface 19981 described later contact. A state in which the sorting member 19983 is arranged at a position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) is illustrated, and in FIG. 152 (b), the lower surface of the action portion 19983 a of the sorting member 19983 and a first side base 19981 described later. A state is shown in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at a position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”) where the front surface contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed in the bulging portion 19982 contacts.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the sorting unit 19980 is assembled, the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b of the first side surface base 19981, the side surface plate 19982a of the bulging portion 19982 and the expansion of the second side surface base 19985. An opening U6 is formed from the side plate 19986a of the protruding portion 199886, and the side plate 19982a, the lower surface plate 19982b, the projecting portion 19982d of the first side base 19981, and the protruding portion 19986 side of the second side base 19985. An opening U7 is formed from the face plate 19986a, and on the other side of the opening U7 in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction), the side plate 19982a, the projecting portion 19982d, the game ball guide wall 19982c and the bulging portion 19982 of the first side base 19981 The bulging portion 199 of the two side bases 19985 Opening U8 is formed from six side plates 19986A. As described above, the opening U7 is disposed at a position continuous with the intermediate port 19941h of the back base 19941, and the opening U8 is disposed at a position continuous with the first winning port 64 of the back base 19941.

  Further, on the back plate 19981d side (the right side in FIG. 152 (a)) of the first side surface base 19981 with respect to the opening U6, the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 19981b, the center plate 19981e and the second side surface base 19985 of the first side surface base 19981. The passage TR4 surrounded by the side plate 19985e, the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 19981b, the center plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981, and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 and the lower surface plate 19985a. The passages T6 surrounded by the 19985b, the side plate 19985e, and the second cover member 19988 are formed. The passage TR4, the passage TR5, and the passage TR6 are formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. The passage TR4, the passage TR5, and the passage TR6 are configured such that the back plate 19981d side (opposite to the player) of the first side surface base 19981 is inclined downward to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). It is formed extending from the left side of FIG. 152 (a) to the opposite side of the player.

  Further, a recess 19981h1 formed in the protrusion 19981h of the first side base 19981, a recess 19981i formed in the lower surface plate 19981b, a recess 19981j formed in the center plate 19981e, and a protrusion 19985h of the second side base 199885 are formed. The detection device SE5 is disposed in a region surrounded by the recess 19985h1, the recess 19985i formed in the lower surface plate 19985b, and the recess 19985k formed in the side plate 19985e, with the detection hole SE1a disposed in the passage TR4. As described above, the arrangement area of the detection device SE5 is formed so that the opposite side to the player (the right side in FIG. 152 (a)) is inclined downward to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The axis of the detection hole SE1a of the device SE5 is such that the player side (left side in FIG. 152 (a)) is inclined upward in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity), and the direction in which the passage TR4 extends and the detection of the detection device SE5 The axial direction of the hole SE1a is arranged in the same direction.

  The sorting member 19983 is disposed inside the sorting unit 19980 in a state in which the shaft center of the shaft member 988a is disposed in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 152 (a)).

  In the sorting member 19983, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j in a state where the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c, and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. Thus, the side plate 19982a (first side base 19981) of the bulging portion 19982 and the side plate 199886a (second side surface base 19985) of the bulging portion 199886 are rotatably supported. Therefore, the sorting member 19983 can sort the game balls to be sent in the front-rear direction (FIG. 152 (a) left-right direction).

  As described above, the wall portion 19983e of the sorting member 19983 is disposed inside the recess 19982f of the side plate 19982a. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which flowed into the distribution unit 19980 contact | abuts on the side surface of the wall part 19983e, and can suppress that the flow-down of a game ball is inhibited.

  In the housing portion 986b, the magnetic body 988b is repelled from the magnetic body 988c of the sorting member 19983, and the magnetic body 988c on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) with respect to the bearing portion 982c of the recess 19982f. It is arranged on the movement trajectory.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position, from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c. The distance dimension L44 is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a distance dimension L45 from the contact portion 19983d of the sorting member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U6, and the game ball is rotated by the rotation of the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U7.

  In the state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position, the magnetic body 988c disposed on the sorting member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b disposed on the housing portion 986b (first side surface base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 152 (a)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the sorting member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U6 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. Force to act. Therefore, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the first position acts on the sorting member 19983. Thereby, even when the external force which rotates toward the 2nd position is applied to the distribution member 19983, it can suppress that the distribution member 19983 rotates toward the 2nd position.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position, the distance dimension L46 from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is a game. It is formed smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the distance dimension L47 from the contact portion 19983d of the sorting member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U7, and the game ball is rotated by the rotation of the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U6.

  Further, in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position, the magnetic body 988c disposed on the sorting member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b disposed on the housing portion 986b (first side base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 152 (b)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the sorting member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U7 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. Force to act. Accordingly, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the second position acts on the sorting member 19983. Thereby, even when the external force which rotates toward the 1st position is given to the distribution member 19983, it can suppress that the distribution member 19983 rotates toward the 1st position.

  Next, the configuration of the passage unit 19990 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

  154 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 19990, FIG. 154 (b) is a top view of the passage unit 19990, FIG. 154 (c) is a side view of the passage unit 19990, and FIG. (D) is sectional drawing of the channel | path unit 19990 in the CLIVd-CLIVd line | wire of FIG. 154 (a). FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective front view of the passage unit 19990, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990. FIG. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 19990, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, the passage unit 19990 includes a first passage member 19991 and a solenoid holding member disposed on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the first passage member 19991 from the player. 19992, a second passage member 19993 disposed on the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) of the solenoid holding member 19992, a solenoid 610 disposed on the inner side of the solenoid holding member 19992, and an annular portion of the solenoid 610 The transmission member 19965 connected to the reference numeral 961c, a displacement member 19966 connected to a first engagement portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965 described later, and a detection device SE6 are mainly provided. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is detected by the detection device SE6.

  The first passage member 19991 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is connected to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate 19991a and the bottom plate 19991a formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the top. A pair of side plates 19991b formed from a plate-like body and a back of the bottom plate 19991a connected to the opposite side of the player (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) and formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The face plate 19991c is connected to the opposite side to the player of the back plate 19991c, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d disposed at a predetermined distance away from the other side of the bottom plate 19991a in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction), and the side surface It is mainly provided with a pair of guide plates 19991e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape.

  A first fastening portion 19991b1 and a second fastening portion 19991b4 are formed on the outer surfaces of the pair of side plates 19991b. In addition, projecting portions 19991b7 are formed on the back surfaces of the pair of side plates 19991b so as to project to the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)).

  The first fastening portion 19991b1 includes a first guide wall 19991b2 and a circular first through hole 19991b3. The first guide wall 19991b2 has an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the rear base 19941 described above. As described above, the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the first through hole 19991b3 into the fastening hole 19941j.

  The second fastening portion 19991b4 is formed with a second guide wall 19991b5 and a circular second through hole 19991b6. The second guide wall 19991b5 is formed so that its inner edge shape is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992, which will be described later. The second through hole 19991b6 is a hole for inserting a screw that is screwed into a fastening hole 19992c1 of a solenoid holding member 19992, which will be described later. Accordingly, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is recessed from the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) toward the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)). Part 19991d1. A detecting device SE6 described later is disposed in the recessed portion 19991d1.

  On the player side (FIG. 154 (a), the front side of the paper surface) of the detection device housing portion 19991d, an opening is formed so that a wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be inserted. Further, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed to be inclined toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) toward the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)), and on the upper surface 19991d2. A game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed to protrude from the edge portion in a substantially U shape that is open on the player side when viewed from above. The size of the inner edge of the game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  In addition, an opening formed with a size larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed on the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device housing portion 19991d on the solenoid holding member 19992 side (the right side in FIG. 154 (d)) with respect to the back plate 19991c. The Thereby, the game balls flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 can be sent to a pair of guide plates 19991e described later.

  The pair of guide plates 19991e is formed such that the distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through an opening formed on the lower surface of the detection device housing portion 19991d is moved to one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). The game ball can be discharged from the passage unit 19990 (winning port unit 19300).

  The solenoid holding member 19992 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a housing portion 19992a that is substantially rectangular in top view, and a regulation portion 19992b that is formed on the player side of the housing portion 19992a from a plate-like body that is horizontally long in front view. And a pair of side plates 19992c formed from a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in a side view.

  The accommodating part 19992a is a part for disposing a solenoid 610, which will be described later, inside, and the accommodating part 19992a and the solenoid 610 are fastened and fixed by screws. In addition, an opening is formed on the player side (left side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the housing portion 19992a, whereby the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be disposed closer to the player side than the housing portion 19992a.

  The restricting part 19992b is a part for restricting the displacement of the transmission member 199965, which will be described later. The contact part of the restricting part 19992b and the transmission member 199965 is opposite to the player of the transmission member 199965 (FIG. 154 (d)). Displacement to the right) is restricted.

  The side plate 19992c has a fastening hole 19992c1 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), a fastening part 19992c2 on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and a notch on the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (c)). Part 19992c5.

  The fastening hole 19992c1 is a hole for screwing the above-described screw inserted through the first passage member 19991. Accordingly, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The fastening part 19992c2 is formed with a guide wall 19992c3 and a circular through hole 19992c4. The guide wall 19992c3 is formed so that its inner edge shape is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993 described later. The through hole 19992c4 is a hole through which a screw screwed into a second passage member 19993 described later is inserted. Thereby, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second passage member 199993 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally long and substantially rectangular in top view. The second passage member 19993 is provided with a passage TR7 and a passage TR8 at both longitudinal ends, and a fastening hole 19993a is formed on the player side (the lower side in FIG. 154 (b)) of the passage TR7 and the passage TR8.

  The passage TR7 and the passage TR8 are formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Further, the passage TR7 and the passage TR8 extend in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 154 (d)) and are formed at positions that are continuous with the opening U1 and the opening U3 formed in the above-described distribution unit 19980.

  The fastening hole 19993a is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through the solenoid holding member 19992 described above. Thereby, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

  The transmission member 19965 is formed between a pair of first engagement portions 19965a formed from a horizontally long plate-like body in side view and a pair of first engagement portions 19965a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in rear view. The body is mainly provided with a second engaging portion 19965b formed from a body, and a pair of first engaging portions 19965a and a pair of connecting portions 19965c connected to the second engaging portion 19965b.

  The distance between the inner facing surfaces of the pair of first engaging portions 19965a is formed larger than the distance between the outer sides of a pair of main body portions 19966g of a displacement member 19966 described later. Further, the pair of first engaging portions 19965a includes a through hole 19965a1 that is substantially rectangular in a side view when viewed from the side (on the lower side in FIG. 154 (b)). The inside of the through hole 19965a1 is formed so that a transmission part 19966e of a displacement member 19966 described later can be disposed, and the player side of the through hole 19965a1 has a notch cut out on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A notch portion 19965a2 is formed.

  The second engaging portion 19965b is a portion for connecting the transmission member 19965 and the solenoid 610, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 from the end surface on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction). A first recessed portion 19965b1 that is recessed, and a second recessed portion that is recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b on the solenoid 610 side (right side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the first recessed portion 19965b1. Part 19965b2.

  The first recessed portion 19965b1 is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) in a cross-sectional view. Moreover, the groove width of the first recessed portion 19965b1 is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 19965b1.

  The second recessed portion 19965b2 suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the second engagement portion 19965b when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 as described above. It is a notch, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) is opened in the rear view, and is formed by opening the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)).

  The connecting portion 19965c is a portion that connects the first engaging portion 19965a and the second engaging portion 19965b, and thereby, the displacement of the second engaging portion 19965b can be transmitted to the first engaging portion 19965a. .

  The displacement member 19966 includes a pair of main body portions 19966g formed from a horizontally long plate-like body in a side view, and projecting portions formed to project to the player side (the lower side in FIG. 154 (b)) of the pair of main body portions 19966g. 19966a, the rotating shaft 19966d, the transmission part 19966e, and the connection part 19966f which connects a pair of main-body parts 19966g are mainly provided and formed.

  The distance between the inner facing surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g and the protruding portion 19966a is formed to be larger than the dimension in the short direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 154 (b)) of the detection device housing portion 19991d of the first passage member 19991 described above. Is done.

  The protruding portion 19966a is formed with a recessed portion 19966a1 recessed on the solenoid 610 side (upper side of FIG. 154 (b)), and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is disposed on the recessed portion 19966a1 (FIG. 159 (b)). See) possible.

  The rotation shaft 19966d is formed in an annular shape that protrudes outward in the opposing direction from the side surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g. A base portion 19966d1 is formed on the rotating shaft 19966d at the connecting portion with the main body portion 19966g with a size larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 19966d.

  The transmission portion 19966e is a portion for transmitting the displacement of the transmission member 19965 described above to the displacement member 19966, and is a pair of main body portions 19966g on the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) of the rotation shaft 19966d in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. It projects from the side surface toward the outside in the opposite direction.

  The connecting portion 19966f is a portion for connecting a pair of main body portions 19966g, and a side surface portion 19966f1 formed of a plate-like body that is vertically long in a side view on the lower surface of the pair of main body portions 19966g and a pair of side surface portions 19966f1. And a lower surface portion 19966f2 formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from above.

  Since the connecting portion 19966f connects the pair of main body portions 19966g, it is possible to suppress the relative displacement of one main body portion 19966g with respect to the other main body portion 19966g.

  In the situation of assembling the passage unit 19990, as described above, the inner edge shape of the second guide wall 19991b5 of the first passage member 19991 is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992, and the solenoid Since the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19992c3 of the holding member 19992 is formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993, the positioning of the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 and The solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be easily positioned. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the passage unit 19990 can be suppressed.

  In a state in which the passage unit 19990 is assembled, the detection device SE6 is disposed inside the recessed portion 19991d1 of the first passage member 19991, and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6 includes the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device housing portion 19991d. It is arrange | positioned in the position which continues with the opening formed. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 of the first passage member 19991 can be inserted through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6.

  Further, a passage TR9 surrounded by the back plate 19991c of the first passage member 19991, the pair of guide plates 19991e, and the restriction portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 is formed. The passage TR9 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball.

  As described above, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed to project outward from the side surface of the main body portion 19966g in the opposite direction, and the through-hole 19965a1 formed in the first engagement portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Therefore, the game ball sent to the passage TR9 can flow down in the passage TR9.

  The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 of the transmission member 19965, and is a coil spring disposed between the solenoid 610 and the second engagement portion 19965b of the transmission member 19965. Due to the urging force (not shown), the transmitting member 19965 is given an urging force that is displaced to the player side (left side of FIG. 154 (d)). Here, the displacement of the transmission member 199965 to the player side (the left side in FIG. 154 (d)) is restricted by the contact between the second engagement portion 199965b of the transmission member 199965 and the restriction portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992. .

  Further, the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 is rotatably disposed in a region surrounded by the side plate 19991b and the protruding portion 19991b7 of the first passage member 19991 and the notch 19992c5 of the side plate 19992c of the solenoid holding member 19992. At the same time, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is disposed in the through-hole 19965a1 of the first engagement portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965.

  Further, the solenoid holding member 19992 is disposed on the opposite side to the player (the right side in FIG. 154 (d)) with respect to the first passage member 19991. Accordingly, the solenoid 610 is disposed on the opposite side to the player with respect to the detection device housing portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991.

  When electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 610a of the solenoid 610, the ring portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the transmission member 19965 connected to the ring portion 961c of the solenoid 610 are on the opposite side of the player (see FIG. 154 (d) right side), and as described above, the displacement of the transmission member 199965 is restricted by the contact between the restriction part 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 and the transmission member 1999965. By displacing the transmission member 19965 to the opposite side of the player, the inner surface of the through hole 19965a1 of the transmission member 19965 and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 abut, and a rotational force is applied to the displacement member 19966.

  Returning to FIG. 142 from FIG. In the situation where the winning opening unit 19930 is assembled, as described above, the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19982e1 of the distribution unit 19980 is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the fastening hole 19941i of the front unit 19940, and the first unit of the passage unit 19990 is formed. Since the inner edge shape of one guide wall 19991b2 is formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the front unit 19940, the positioning of the front unit 19940 and the distribution unit 19980 and the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 are the same. Can be easily positioned. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the winning opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

  In a state where the winning opening unit 19930 is assembled, the lower surface plate 19982b of the bulging portion 19982 formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, and the detection device housing portion formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. An opening U9 is formed from the upper surface 19991d2 of 19991d and the projecting portion 19966a formed on the displacement member 19966. As described above, the first winning port 64 of the front unit 19940 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980 are formed at a continuous position. The intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980 are disposed at a continuous position, and the second winning port 140 and the opening U9 of the front unit 19940 are formed at a continuous position.

  Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c of the front unit 19940 is formed on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) than the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device housing portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. Is done.

  Further, the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device housing portion 19991d formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990, and the pair of game ball guide portions 19991d3 are surrounded. A passage TR10 is formed. The passage TR10 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and as described above, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device housing portion 19991d is directed to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 139 (b) the front side of the page). As it is formed, it is inclined to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). In addition, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, whereby the passage TR10 is on the opposite side (FIG. 139 (b) from the player side (FIG. 139 (b) back side of the drawing)). ) It extends to the front side of the paper). Thereby, the game ball sent to the passage TR10 flows down to the opposite side to the player.

  As described above, the solenoid 610 is disposed on the side opposite to the player (the front side in FIG. 139 (b)) from the passage TR10 (detection device housing portion 19991d), and thus the pair of first members of the transmission member 19965. The passage TR10 formed inside the opposing surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g of the engaging portion 19965a and the displacement member 19966 can be shortened.

  Further, the opening U1 and the opening U3 of the distribution unit 19980 and the passage TR7 and the passage TR8 of the passage unit 19990 are formed at continuous positions. As a result, a part of the passage TR5 (part on the side opposite to the player (the front side in FIG. 139 (b))) and the gravity of the passage TR5 disposed on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) across the opening U1. A passage TR11 extending in the direction of gravity is formed by the passage TR7 disposed on one side in the direction (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, a part of the passage TR6 disposed on the other side in the gravity direction across the opening U3 (a part on the side opposite to the player) and the passage TR8 disposed on the one side in the gravity direction extend in the gravity direction. A provided passage TR12 is formed. Accordingly, the passage TR11 is formed on the first cover member 19987 side (the right side in FIG. 139 (b)) of the distribution unit 19980 from the passage TR4, and the passage TR12 is on the second cover member 19998 side (see FIG. 139 (b) on the left side.

  Thereby, the game ball sent to the first winning port 64 of the front unit 19940 passes through the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is sent to the inside of the distribution unit 19980. Further, in the distribution unit 19980, the game ball sent to the player side (the front side in FIG. 139 (a) by the rotation of the distribution member 19983) passes through the opening U7, so that the front unit 19940 The ball is sent to the intermediate port 19941h. Further, the game ball sent to the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 19940 passes through the opening U9 and is sent into the passage unit 19990.

  In addition, the game balls sent to the openings U1 and U3 of the distribution unit 19980 are discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 and the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160, the rotation operation of the wing member 945 by the rotation operation of the displacement member 19966 will be described.

  158 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 along the line CLVIII-CLVIII in FIG. 139 (a), FIG. 158 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the wing member 945. The open state of is shown. 159 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) when the wing member 945 is closed, and FIG. 159 (b) is the winning opening when the wing member 945 is closed. 5 is a side view of a unit 19300. FIG. 160 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) when the wing member 945 is opened, and FIG. 160 (b) is a winning opening when the wing member 945 is opened. 5 is a side view of a unit 19300. FIG. In FIGS. 159 (a) and 160 (a), the front base 19943 of the front unit 19940 is omitted, and in FIGS. 159 (b) and 160 (b), the wing member 945, the solenoid 610, the transmission member 19965, and Only the displacement member 19966 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, in a state where the winning opening unit 19300 is assembled, the protrusion 945 b of the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit 19940 is projected from the displacement member 19966 disposed on the passage unit 19990. The concave portion 19966a1 formed in the portion 19966a is disposed inside.

  The closed state of the wing member 945 is a state where the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is interrupted, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is separated from the main body 961a. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 connected to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the player side (left side in FIG. 159 (b)), and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed in the first engagement portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Inside the through-hole 19965a1 is arranged on the opposite side to the player (right side of FIG. 159 (b)).

  Next, the opened state of the wing member 945 will be described. The power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 610a of the solenoid 610, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the main body portion 961a are close to each other. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 coupled to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the opposite side (right side in FIG. 160 (b)) to the player, and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is displaced from the first engagement portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. It is arranged on the player side (left side in FIG. 160 (b)) inside the through-hole 19965a1 formed in.

  Here, a notch portion 19965a2 that is notched to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed on the player side of the through-hole 19965a1 formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. The transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 can rotate about the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as the rotation axis. Thereby, the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is displaced in the axial direction of the shaft portion 961b, and the displacement member 19966 can rotate. In other words, the displacement member 19966 can be rotated by an easy configuration of the solenoid 610 and the transmission member 19965, and the manufacturing cost of the winning a prize opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the displacement member 19966 rotates with the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as the rotation axis, the displacement (rotation) region of the displacement member 19966 in the passage unit 19990 can be reduced. Thereby, the prize opening unit 19930 can be reduced in size.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the flow of the game ball sent to the winning a prize unit 19930 will be described.

  161 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position. FIG. 161 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 along the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line in FIG. 161, and FIG. 162 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 along the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line in FIG. 162 (a). It is.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is sent to the distribution member 19983, the game ball is opened to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is sent between the action portion 19983a on the side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)). As described above, the action part 19983a is set such that the connection position with the contact part 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 19983d of the intermediate plate 19983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 19983a on the opening U7 side.

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the sorting member 19983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 983c as a rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When a position exceeding (a) vertical direction) is reached, the game ball sent to the sorting member 19983 is sent to the opening U7. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is inclined to the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 161 (b)) of the distribution unit 19980, and the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the second position. It is said. Note that the rotation of the sorting member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the action portion 19983a on the opening U7 side and the front side contact portion 19982b1 on the first side surface base. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction acting on the magnetic body 988c disposed on the sorting member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b disposed on the first side surface base 19981 is an intermediate position radially outward from the through hole 983c. The plate 19983b is switched from the state acting on the opening U6 side (the right side in FIG. 161 (b)) to the state acting on the opening U7 side.

  Therefore, the sorting member 19983 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 983c as a rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the action portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (the left side in FIG. 161 (b)) of the sorting member 19983 and the front side contact portion 19982b1 on the first side surface base. The abutted state can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is sent to the distribution member 19893, the game ball is opened to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is sent to the action unit 19983a on the side (right side of FIG. 161 (b)). As described above, the action part 19983a is set such that the connection position with the contact part 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 19983d of the intermediate plate 19983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the sorting member 19983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 983c as a rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When a position exceeding (a) vertical direction) is reached, the game ball sent to the sorting member 19983 is sent to the opening U6. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is inclined to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980, and the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the first position. It is said. Note that the rotation of the sorting member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side and the back-side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface base 19981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction acting on the magnetic body 988c disposed on the sorting member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b disposed on the first side surface base 19981 is an intermediate position radially outward from the through hole 983c. The plate 19983b is switched from the state acting on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) to the state acting on the opening U6 side.

  Therefore, the sorting member 19983 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 983c as a rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 161 (a)) of the sorting member 19983 and the back side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface 19981 Can be maintained in contact with each other. Therefore, each time the game ball is sent, the allocating member 19983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 19983b to send the game ball to the opening U7 and the opening U6 one by one.

  In the state in which the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the first position, an angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b and the horizontal line HL, In the state where the distributing member 19983 is disposed at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction and the horizontal line HL is the same. Formed at an angle. Therefore, the first position and the second position of the sorting member 19983 are disposed at positions symmetrical in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 161 (a)) in the side view.

  The game ball passing through the opening U7 passes through the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and is sent to the passage TR3. The game ball sent to the passage TR3 is brought into contact with the intermediate receiving portion 19943e, so that the direction in which the game ball is sent is changed from the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (b)) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Then, it flows down the passage TR3. The game ball flowing down the passage TR3 comes into contact with the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c, so that the direction in which the game ball is sent from the one side in the gravitational direction (the lower side in the gravitational direction) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 161 ( b) Changed to right side) and sent to the second winning opening 140.

  The game ball passing through the second winning port 140 passes through the opening U9 formed from the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990, and is sent to the passage TR10. The game ball flowing down the passage TR10 to the opposite side (right side in FIG. 161 (b)) from the player hits the game ball guide portion 19991d3 of the detection device housing portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. The contact direction of the game ball is changed from the opposite side of the player to the one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) by contact, and an opening formed in the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device housing portion 19991d, the detection hole of the detection device SE6 The ball is sent to an opening formed in the lower surface of SE1a and the detection device housing portion 19991d.

  The game ball sent to the opening formed in the lower surface of the detection device housing portion 19991d passes through the passage TR9 and is discharged from the winning unit 19930. Here, when the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, the number of game balls that have passed through the second winning opening 140 can be measured by the detection device SE6.

  The passages TR3 and TR7 and the passage TR9 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as “fifth passage” hereinafter.

  Here, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138), a number of nails (not shown) arranged on the front side of the game board 13, or various members (servants) such as a windmill, Game balls distributed by the contact of the distribution member 19983 or by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 has a velocity component in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161 (b)). May flow down in preparation. When the game ball flowing down does not have or slightly includes a velocity component in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983, the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 does not contact the wing member 945. On the other hand, the velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is large, and the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 abuts on the wing member 945 and is displaced out of the passage TR3. Since the winning opening 140 is not passed, the number of game balls is not measured by the detection device SE6.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the flow of the game ball that has passed through the opening U6 will be described. The game balls that flow down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) and are distributed by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 are in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (FIG. 162 (a) vertical direction). When the velocity component is not provided or slightly provided, the flowing game ball does not contact the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down through the passage TR4.

  The velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is larger than the velocity component at which the game ball does not contact the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4. When the game ball flows down with the velocity component, the game ball contacts the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4. When the game ball that flows down rebounds toward the passage TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4 due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the gaming ball flows down the passage TR4. On the other hand, due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the game ball flowing down is opposite to the path TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4, in other words, toward the path TR5 or the path TR6. In the case of rebounding, the game ball that flows down passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and is sent to the passage TR5 or the passage TR6.

  When the game ball does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR4, the game ball flowing down comes into contact with the overhanging portion 19981e1 formed on the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981. Is changed from the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) to the second cover member 19988 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) and sent to the opening U5. The game balls that have passed through the opening U5 are discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930. Here, the game ball flowing down is a game ball that has passed through the opening U6 by passing through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 disposed in the passage TR4, and does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U3. The number of game balls flowing down the passage TR4 can be measured by the detection device SE5.

  The passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which the game balls distributed by the sorting member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as “fourth passage” hereinafter.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the passage TR4 (part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (part of the fifth passage) are substantially in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 161 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). They are formed at the same position. In other words, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are formed at positions that overlap each other when viewed from above.

  Therefore, the prize opening unit 19300 can be reduced in size in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 161 (a)), and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

  As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can recognize the detection device SE5 disposed in the distribution unit 19980. In addition, since the detection device SE5 has the detection hole SE1a disposed along the extending direction of the passage TR4, the player can visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5, and the entertainment of the game Can be increased. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is inclined so that the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) rises to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction). Therefore, in the state where the prize winning unit 19930 (see FIG. 138) is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the base plate 19060, the detection device SE5 arranged in the distribution unit 19980 is arranged. The player can easily recognize that the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a.

  Further, since the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is disposed in the passage TR4 that forms the upstream side of the fourth passage, the detection hole SE1a can be brought close to the sorting member 19983. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball distributed to the distribution member 19983 is inserted through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. Thereby, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The game ball that passes through the opening U2 and is sent to the passage TR5 abuts on a curved portion formed on the overhanging portion 19987b of the first cover member 199887, so that the game ball is sent in the direction of the first cover member 19987. It is changed from the upper side (FIG. 162 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and flows down the passage TR5. The game balls flowing down the passage TR5 are sent to the passage TR11 and come into contact with the back plate 19981d of the first side surface base 19981 so that the direction of the game balls is sent from the side opposite to the player in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity). Changed to lower). The game balls are discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

  The game ball that passes through the opening U4 and is sent to the passage TR6 abuts on a curved portion formed on the overhanging portion 19998b of the second cover member 19988, so that the game ball is sent in the direction of the second cover member 19988. It is changed from the lower side (FIG. 162 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and flows down the passage TR6. The game balls flowing down the passage TR6 are sent to the passage TR12 and come into contact with the back plate 19985d of the second side base 199885, so that the direction of the game balls is sent from the side opposite to the player in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity). Changed to lower). The game balls are discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

  As described above, in the game balls flowing down the fourth passage, the game balls flowing down the passage TR4 on the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) from the detection device SE5 are sent to the passage TR12. At the same time, the game balls flowing down the passage TR6 are sent to the passage TR12 which is a part of the fourth passage, and are discharged from the winning unit 19930. In other words, the passage TR6 branched from the fourth passage upstream of the detection device SE5 is joined to the fourth passage on the downstream side of the detection device SE5. Therefore, the passage TR12 can serve as both a passage for sending the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 and a passage for sending the game ball flowing down the passage TR6.

  Thereby, in the distribution unit 19980 (winning port unit 19930) in which a plurality of downflow passages are formed, the arrangement of the downflow passages of game balls can be suppressed, and the distribution unit 19980 (winning port unit 19930) can be downsized.

  Further, as described above, the passage TR12 is formed on the second cover member 19988 side (the lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) with respect to the passage TR4, and therefore, on the side opposite to the player from the passage TR10 (FIG. 162 (a)). On the right side, a space in which another member is disposed on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the passage TR4, in this embodiment, a space in which the solenoid 610 is disposed can be secured. The mouth unit 19930) can be downsized.

  Here, in the fourth passage and the fifth passage formed on both sides of the sorting direction of the sorting member 19983 (FIG. 162 (a) left and right direction), the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 (FIG. 162 ( a) The passage in the vertical direction is not formed, and therefore the fourth passage and the fifth passage are formed at the same position with respect to the axial center direction of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983. In the present embodiment, a part of the fifth passage is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fourth passage. In other words, the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage are viewed from the top. Overlapping is formed. Further, as described above, the passage TR4 (part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (part of the fifth passage) are opposite to the player from the player side (left side of FIG. 162 (a)) (see FIG. 162 (a) right side). Further, the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 formed on both sides in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 of the passage TR4 are formed to extend to the opposite side to the player side, like the passage TR4.

  As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 199885 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can send a game ball to any of the passages TR4, TR5, and TR6. It is possible to visually recognize whether the game is interesting or not.

  Further, the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a (see FIG. 148) of the second side surface base 199885 are formed of plate-like bodies that are vertically long and substantially rectangular. Therefore, the other side (gravity direction) of the passage TR4 formed in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 (FIG. 162 (a) vertical direction) and communicated with the passage TR4 through the opening U2 and the passage TR6 communicated with the passage TR4 through the opening U4. Information related to the game, for example, “out” can be displayed on the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 in the upper direction).

  Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and to the other side 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a sorting unit having a second passage through which sorted game balls pass is known. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the passage is arranged along the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction of the base plate, and accordingly, there is a space for arranging other members. There was a problem of decreasing.

  On the other hand, in the sorting unit 19800 in the present embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is arranged in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), and as shown in FIG. The game balls distributed by 19983 are sent to the fifth passage formed on the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) or the fourth passage formed on the opposite side (right side in FIG. 161 (a)). Is done. As described above, the passage TR4 (part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (part of the fifth passage) are on the opposite side (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161 (a) left) from the player side. a) Since it is formed extending to the right side), compared with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 (see FIG. 112) formed in the above-described distribution unit 980, the distribution in the width direction of the base plate 19060 is performed. The unit 19980 can be reduced in size.

  In particular, the distribution unit 19800 in the present embodiment is formed so that the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage overlap each other when viewed from above, so that the distribution unit 19980 in the width direction of the base plate 19060 can be further reduced in size.

  Also, as described above, the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is sent to the opposite side (the right side in FIG. 161 (a)) to the player, and the first winning port 64 is set. The ball is sent to the sorting unit 19980 by passing. Accordingly, the game ball sent to the sorting unit 19980 has a velocity component toward the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position, the game flows down with a velocity component to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the sorting unit 19980. The ball rebounds by the intermediate plate 19983b of the distributing member 19983 or flows down on the intermediate plate 19983b, so that the velocity component of the game ball is changed from the opening U6 side to the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980 (left side in FIG. 161 (a)). ), And comes into contact with the action portion 19983a disposed on the opening U7 side of the sorting unit 19980. Thereby, the sorting member 19983 rotates and the game ball is sent to the fifth passage.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position, it flows down with a velocity component to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the sorting unit 19980. The game ball abuts against the action unit 19983a disposed on the opening U6 side of the sorting unit 19980 in a state where the velocity component to the opposite side to the player is held. Thereby, the sorting member 19983 rotates and the game ball is sent to the fourth passage.

  Therefore, in the state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position and the state where the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL is formed at the same angle. The sorting member 19983 can send the game balls flowing into the sorting unit 19980 to the fourth passage faster than the delivery to the fifth passage. In other words, the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 can have different pitching times to be sent to the flow-down passage according to the distribution direction. As a result, the player can be provided with playability, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, conventionally, a game ball flowing down a passage formed larger than the outer shape of the game ball flows down the passage with a velocity component different from the axial direction of the detection hole of the detection device disposed in the passage. Therefore, there is a case where the traveling direction of the game ball flowing down the passage does not become uniform (hereinafter referred to as “game ball rampage”) by colliding with the side wall of the passage. When the detection hole of the detection device is inserted in a state where the game ball is rampant, there is a problem that the detection device erroneously recognizes that a plurality of game balls have been inserted through the detection hole (hereinafter referred to as “chattering”).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162, in the sorting unit 19800 in the present embodiment, an opening U2 and an opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4 on the sorting member 19983 side (left side in FIG. 162 (a)) with respect to the detection device SE5. Is done. When the game ball is thrown into the passage TR4 in a state of being rampant, the game ball is inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 with the rampage converged by contacting the opening U2 or the opening end of the opening U4. And chattering can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, when a part of the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 can be inserted in the state where the game ball has converged, and chattering is prevented from occurring. it can. In other words, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4, the cross-sectional area of the passage TR4 in the front view can be increased. That is, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the winning opening unit 19930, the displacement area of the game ball in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) can be enlarged.

  Therefore, the rampage of the game ball can be converged by expanding the region where the friction (resistance) generated by sliding or rolling the passage TR4 acts. Therefore, the occurrence of chattering can be suppressed, and the detection device SE5 can be disposed at a position close to the sorting member 19983, so that the player can easily recognize that the game ball is inserted through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. Thereby, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, conventionally, when an external force is applied to the arrangement member by hitting by a player or the like, there is a problem that the sorting member may be rotated due to the influence of inertial force. That is, when a game ball distributed to one side is guided to a winning opening to which a higher game value is given than a game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting a gaming machine to the arrangement member By applying an external force, the distributing member is rotated by inertial force, and the posture of the distributing member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. In other words, the game balls are distributed without passing through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. It can suppress that chattering generate | occur | produces in detection apparatus SE5 by discharging | emitting from the unit 19980 (winning prize unit 19930).

  The passage TR4 includes a detection device, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 do not include a detection device. Therefore, after passing through the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the passage TR4 flows down, and the game device is detected by the detection device SE5, and passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. Thus, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball is not detected by the detection device and is discharged from the winning unit 19930.

  As a result, the winning opening unit 19930 indicates that the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 without passing through the opening U2 or the opening U4 after the game ball is distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983. It has a playability that makes you expect. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Note that examples of the destinations of game balls that flow down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 and are discharged from the winning unit 19930 include an out port, a winning port, and a game area.

  Here, the game area in the present embodiment will be described. The game area means an area through which a game ball can pass (flowing down, rolling) and can be detected by a detection device.

  For example, on the downstream side of the sorting member 19983 of the winning opening unit 19930, an area upstream of the detection device SE5 in the path TR4, the path TR3 and the path TR10 are formed as game areas. In other words, the detection device SE5, the detection device SE6, the opening U2, and the opening U4 are formed as boundaries of the game area downstream of the sorting member 19983 of the winning opening unit 19930.

  Further, as described above, the first side base 19981 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. Therefore, after the game balls are distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the first side base 19981 is allowed to pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4. First, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. Therefore, the winning opening unit 19930 has a game property that makes the player expect the game device to be detected by the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, the sorting unit 19980 includes a magnetic body 988b disposed in the housing portion 986b formed in the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981, and a magnetic member disposed in the sorting member 19983. Since the body 988c is disposed in a repulsive state, the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position or the second position even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10, such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10. The state where it is installed can be maintained.

  As described above, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 in the present embodiment is disposed in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), whereby the sorting member 19983 is the first member. The position is displaced from the second position or from the second position to the first position.

  Accordingly, when an external force such as a player hitting the glass unit 16 is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the inertial force generated in the sorting member 19983 acts on the player side (the left side in FIG. 161 (a)). In a state where the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the first position, the distribution member 19983 is illegally displaced from the first position to the second position.

  As described above, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is detected by the detection device SE6. Therefore, when the player taps the glass unit 16 and improperly displaces the sorting member 19983 from the first entry to the second position, the sorting member 19983 placed in the second position flows into the sorting unit 19980. A ball is sent to the passage TR4, and a game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. That is, the state changes from a state in which a game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 to a state in which a game ball is detected by the detection device SE5, and the number of prize balls to be paid out decreases.

  Thereby, it can suppress that a player strikes the glass unit 16 and improperly displaces the distribution member 19983 from the 1st position to the 2nd position.

  It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out by detecting the game ball by the detection device SE6 and the number of prize balls to be paid out by detecting the game ball by the detection device SE5 may be set to the same number. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out by displacing the sorting member 19983 does not change. Therefore, it can suppress that a player strikes the glass unit 16 and displaces the distribution member 19983 illegally.

  In addition, although the winning opening unit 19930 in this embodiment is distributed by the sorting member 19983 and the detection device is disposed in both the passages through which the game balls flow down, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The detection device may be disposed only in one of the flow-down passages.

  Thereby, even after a game ball is sent to the winning opening unit 19930, it is possible to give the player game characteristics. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the detection device may not be provided in both the downflow passages. In this case, the game ball discharged from the winning port unit 19930 may be sent to the out port or may not be sent to the out port.

  Accordingly, no detection device is provided in the winning opening unit 19930, and the game balls discharged from the winning port unit 19930 are not sent to the out port, and the path TR9, the path TR11, or the path TR12 formed in the winning port unit 19930 is formed. Is formed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the game balls discharged from the winning unit 19930 are sent to the front side of the base plate 19060, so that the winning unit 19930 is used as a game area. be able to. In other words, the game area formed in the pachinko machine 10 can be enlarged by providing the passage in the front-and-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction) of the prize-winning unit 19930, so that the player can have gaming characteristics. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Moreover, although the distribution member 19983 in this embodiment demonstrated the case where it arrange | positions in the distribution unit 19980, it is not necessarily restricted to this, It may be arrange | positioned in any position in the game area mentioned above. good.

  Thereby, it is possible to give the player game playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the sorting member 19983 in the present embodiment is disposed inside the sorting unit 19980 in a state where the shaft center of the shaft member 988a is disposed in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 161 (a)), and the ball is sent. Although the case where the game balls are distributed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A game ball that is disposed inside the sorting unit 19980 with the axial center of the shaft member 988a disposed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction) and is sent in the left-right direction (FIG. 161 (a) on the paper surface). (Vertical direction) may be assigned.

  Thereby, the game balls sent to the distribution unit 19980 can be distributed in various directions, and the game can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which game balls distributed by the sorting member 19983 pass are collectively referred to as the fourth passage, but the passage TR6 formed on one side in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 and The passage TR12 may be integrated into the sixth passage. In this case, the passage TR4 is joined to the side of the sixth passage.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 is offset from the passage TR4 to the passage TR6 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) in the front view and sent to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Thereby, the space which arrange | positions the solenoid 610 of the channel | path unit 19990 in the gravity direction one side (gravity direction lower side) of channel | path TR4 is securable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a winning opening unit 20930 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed toward one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) (see FIG. 112) has been described, but in the nineteenth embodiment, Part of the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 is formed with a depth passage extending from the front base 20981 side (left side in FIG. 163) toward the rear base 20985 side (right side in FIG. 163). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 20980 in the nineteenth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109 (a). In FIG. 163, the second passage TR2 in the sixth embodiment is illustrated by a chain line. Further, since the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 are formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft member 988a of the distribution portion 983, only the second passage TR202 will be described, and the description of the first passage TR201 will be omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 163, the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the nineteenth embodiment is downstream of the distribution unit 983, from the front base 20981 side (left side in FIG. 163) to the rear base 20985 side (right side in FIG. 163). It is formed with a depth passage TR202a extending toward the end. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the second passage TR2 is connected to the front base 981 side of the inflow passage 985f1 (see FIGS. 110 to 112), whereas the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the nineteenth embodiment. Is connected to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the inflow passage 985f1.

  The second passage TR202 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the extension dimension of the depth passage TR202a toward the opposite side of the player is a dimension that is twice or more the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.

  Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and to the other side 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a sorting unit having a second passage through which a sorted game ball passes is known.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the passage is arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members accordingly. There was a problem that decreased.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the depth passage TR202a is sent to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163) rather than the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), and then sent to the inflow passage 985f1. Is done. Accordingly, the depth passage TR202a can be disposed using a space in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 163) with a relatively large space. Therefore, the distribution unit 20980 can be downsized in the width direction, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a winning opening unit 21930 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the passage TR4 (the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base of the sorting unit 19980) is formed on a flat surface has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the twentieth embodiment, The protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (part of the fourth passage), and the flow-down speed of the game ball is reduced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 21930 in the twentieth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 164, in the sorting unit 21980 of the winning opening unit 21930 in the twentieth embodiment, the back surface 19981d side (right side in FIG. 164) of the first side surface base 21981 is closer to the opening side U21 than the opening U6. A passage TR214 surrounded by the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 21981b, the center plate 19981e, and the side surface plate 19985e (see FIG. 153) of the second side surface base 19985 is formed. In the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the formation range of the passage TR214, there are a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a between the opening U6 and the detection device SE5 (in this embodiment, 2 Formed).

  The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in cross section, and is formed continuously on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 164).

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) and the protrusion 21981b1 can be reliably brought into contact with each other, and the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1 so that the flow speed of the game ball flows down. Becomes smaller.

  Further, the protrusion 21981b1 disposed on the downstream side is disposed inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 164). Therefore, when the game ball and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other in a state where the game ball is rampant, the protrusion 21981b1 is displaced in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 164) or the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 164). Can be granted.

  Thereby, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and can pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and even after passing through the opening U6 by the sorting member 19983, Can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 21981b1 disposed on the downstream side is disposed inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 164). FIG. 164 can prevent the game ball to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface from abutting against the center plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side surface plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985. Damage to the center plate 19981e or the side plate 19985e of the second side base 199885 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153).

  In addition, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 without contacting the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985, and can pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. (See FIG. 153), it is possible to increase the interest rate of the game by increasing the passing speed of the game ball.

  Here, the projecting dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 on the upper surface plate 19981a side (the upper side in FIG. 164) is formed approximately one-tenth of the diameter of the game ball. . Thereby, the game ball flowing down the passage TR214 can get over the protrusion 21981b1 and flow down in the passage TR214. That is, it is possible to suppress the gaming ball and the protrusion 21981b1 from coming into contact with each other and restricting the flow of the gaming ball in the passage TR214.

  Further, the distance between the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 disposed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 is formed to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the upper protrusion 21981b1 having a projecting dimension of approximately one-tenth of the diameter of the game ball on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 again hits the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b. It is possible to prevent the downstream projecting portion 21981b1 from getting over without contacting the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b. Therefore, it is possible to reliably reduce the flow-down speed of the game ball by the protrusion 21981b1.

  Further, as described above, the sorting member 19983 sends the game ball flowing into the sorting unit 21980 to the opening U6 (fourth passage) earlier than the throwing to the opening U7 (fifth passage).

  Therefore, the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 21980 are distributed to the opening U6, and the time detected by the detection device SE5 disposed in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and detected in the fifth passage. It is formed shorter than the time detected by the device SE6. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 is different from the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6.

  The passing distance of the game ball from the opening U6 to the detection device SE5 disposed in the fourth passage (passage TR214) is detected from the opening U7 in the fifth passage (between the passage TR9 and the passage TR10). It is formed smaller than the passing distance of the game ball to the device SE6.

  Therefore, the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 21980 are distributed to the opening U6, and the time detected by the detection device SE5 disposed in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and detected in the fifth passage. The time detected by the device SE6 is formed shorter. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 is different from the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6.

  Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means that detects the game ball distributed to the one side, and the other side There is known a gaming machine provided with a second detection means for detecting game balls distributed to each other. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means, There was a problem that the degree of freedom of design was low.

  That is, when the display means displays the fact that a game ball has been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means and notifies the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls. ), The time required to reach the sorting member and the game balls distributed to one side are detected by the first detection means, and until the game balls distributed to the other side are detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, there is a difference in the time from the arrival at the sorting member to the display according to the sorting direction, and the fun of the game is impaired.

  Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the paths for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detecting means or the second detecting means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the sorting member, and the first detecting means and the first detecting means 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distributing member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

  On the other hand, the lower surface of the passage TR214 in this embodiment (the lower surface plate 21981b formed on the first side surface base 21981 of the distribution unit 21980) is formed with a protrusion 21981b1. Accordingly, the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) is reduced, and the time from when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 21980 until it is detected by the detection device SE5 can be increased. Therefore, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  Further, since the passage TR3 (a part of the fifth passage) extends in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 164), the game ball freely falls down the passage TR3 and flows down. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be increased as compared with the form in which the game ball rolls down the passage. Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  Therefore, when the sorting member 19983 is arranged at a position where the game ball sorting time differs depending on the sorting direction, or the length of the pitching path from the sorting member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the pitching path of the pitching passage to the detection device SE6. Even when the lengths are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is enhanced. While being able to suppress damage, the freedom degree of design is securable.

  In addition, although the case where two protrusions 21981b1 in this embodiment were formed was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, One protrusion or 3 or more protrusions 21981b1 may be formed.

  In the case where one protrusion 21981b1 is formed, the player can be provided with playability even after passing through the opening U6 by the sorting member 19983, and the game ball excessively passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4. The passage of the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153), and the entertainment of the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  When three or more protrusions 21981b1 are formed, the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) can be further reduced, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference between the time until the detection and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of design freedom.

  Further, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted depending on the number of protrusions 21981b1 formed. Can enhance the interest of Moreover, the adjustment means can be achieved by the protrusion 21981b1 that can be easily formed, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where two protrusions 21981b1 having the same shape are formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 is not necessarily limited to this, and each protrusion 21981b1 is separately provided. It may be formed in the shape of

  For example, when the projecting dimension of the downstream projecting part 21981b1 is larger than the projecting dimension of the upstream projecting part 21981b1, the downstream projecting part 21981b1 is compared with the contact between the upstream projecting part 21981b1 and the game ball. The contact between the protrusion 21981b1 and the game ball increases the probability that the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153). That is, as the game ball approaches the detection device SE5, the probability that the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, that is, does not pass through the detection device SE5 increases, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, for example, when the protruding dimension of the downstream protrusion 21981b1 is smaller than the protruding dimension of the upstream protrusion 21981b1, it is possible to suppress the rampage of the game ball at a position close to the detection device SE5. The occurrence of chattering can be suppressed, and the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lost and to secure the degree of freedom of design.

  In the present embodiment, the protrusion 21981b1 is described as being formed continuously on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed intermittently in the left-right direction, or the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed inclined in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 164).

  When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed intermittently in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), the game ball abuts against the end of the protrusion 21981b1 in the left-right direction, and the game ball is displaced in the left-right direction. The Therefore, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The protrusion 21981b1 is formed uniformly and continuously on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), and rearward as it proceeds to the left side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 164). When the ball is tilted to the right side (right side in FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1, thereby being displaced leftward and passing through the opening U2. It becomes easy to pass through the passage TR5.

  When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed to be inclined rearward (right side of FIG. 164) as it proceeds to the right (front side of FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (path TR214) comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1. Thus, a displacement in the right direction is given, and it becomes easy to pass through the passage TR6 through the opening U4 (see FIG. 153).

  When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed to be inclined rearward (right side in FIG. 164) as it goes from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 164) of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage The game ball flowing down (passage TR214) is displaced in the left-right direction by coming into contact with the projecting portion 21981b1, and easily passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 through the opening U2 or the opening U4 (FIG. 153). reference).

  Therefore, even after passing through the opening U6 by the sorting member 19983, it is possible to give the player a game. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined forward (to the left in FIG. 164) from the center to the both ends in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164) of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage The game ball flowing down (passage TR214) is brought into contact with the protrusion 21981b1, thereby being displaced in the center in the left-right direction, and can be inserted through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 with the rampage converged. , Chattering can be prevented from occurring.

  Moreover, although the protrusion 21981b1 in this embodiment demonstrated the case where it was formed in the cross sectional view substantially rectangular shape, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The protrusion 21981b1 may be formed in the cross sectional view semicircle. . In this case, damage to the protrusion 21981b1 due to contact with the game ball can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (part of the fourth passage) has been described. It may be formed. Thereby, even when the dimension of the passage TR214 in the vertical direction (FIG. 164 vertical direction) is small, the game ball is clogged in the passage TR214, that is, the game ball is above the protrusion 21981b1 and the first side surface base 19981. It is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from being suppressed by coming into contact with the face plate 19981a.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, the distribution member 19983 may be formed so that the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly in the two directions is shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the passage TR3 is not necessarily limited thereto. A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further differentiated (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a winning opening unit 22930 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR214 and the detection device SE5 has been described (see FIG. 164), but in the twenty-first embodiment, the passage TR224 (of the fourth passage). A protrusion 21981b1 is formed between a part of the openings U2 and U4 and the detection device SE5. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 22930 in the twenty-first embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 165, in the distribution unit 22980 of the prize opening unit 22930 in the twenty-first embodiment, the first side surface base 22981 is closer to the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 165) of the first side surface base 22981 than the opening U6. A passage TR224 surrounded by the upper surface plate 22981a, the lower surface plate 22981b, the center plate 22981e, and the side surface plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR224 and the detection device SE5 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a. 2 in the embodiment). In addition, since the distance between arrangement | positioning of the several protrusion 21981b1 is the same as the distance between arrangement | positioning in 20th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, that is, formed on the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) of the distribution unit 22980, so that it is related to the game. The protruding portion 21981b1 having no gap can be formed at a position far from the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the protrusion 21981b1, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 10.

  The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section, and is formed continuously and uniformly over the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165). 21981b1 and the central plate 22981e are integrally formed.

  Thereby, the deflection of the center plate 22981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR224) and the center plate 22981e can be suppressed, and the damage to the center plate 22981e can be suppressed.

  The game ball that does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) and flows down the passage TR224 abuts against the protrusion 21981b1, so that the flow speed of the game ball decreases, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is reduced. The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 19983 is disposed at a position where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the pitching path from the sorting member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the pitching path to the detection device SE6 Even when the lengths of the game balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, thereby Can be prevented from being damaged, and design freedom can be ensured.

  Further, since the projecting portion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, the game ball can open the opening U2 or the opening U4 by the contact between the gaming ball and the projecting portion 21981b1. It is possible to suppress passing the ball to the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

  Here, the passage TR224 in the present embodiment includes the detection device SE5, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153) do not include the detection device. Therefore, the game result differs between when the game ball flows down the passage TR224 and when it flows down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. Therefore, it can suppress that the game result distributed by the distribution member 19983 to the opening U6 side contacts the protrusion 21981b1, and a game result differs.

  In the present embodiment, the protrusion 21981b1 is described as being formed uniformly and continuously on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed to be inclined in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 165) in the left-right direction.

  When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed to be inclined to the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) as it proceeds to the left side (FIG. 165, back side of FIG. 165) or the right side (FIG. 165, front side of FIG. 165), the game flows down the fourth passage (path TR224). When the ball abuts against the protrusion 21981b1, a leftward or rightward displacement is imparted, and the game ball abuts against the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side surface plate of the second side surface base.

  Therefore, due to the frictional force generated between the game ball and the central plate 22981e of the first side base 22981 or the side plate of the second side base, the flow speed of the game ball decreases, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  Further, the game ball is given a displacement in the left direction (the back direction in FIG. 165) or the right direction (the front direction in FIG. 165) and hits the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side surface plate of the second side surface base. By touching, it is possible to suppress the rampage of the game ball. Thereby, it can suppress that chattering generate | occur | produces.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, the distribution member 19983 may be formed so that the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly in the two directions is shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the passage TR3 is not necessarily limited thereto. A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further differentiated (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a winning opening unit 23930 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, the case has been described in which the opening U2 of the passage TR224 (part of the fourth passage) and the protrusion 21981b1 are formed between the opening U4 and the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 165). In the embodiment, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR234 (a part of the fourth passage), the opening U2, and the opening U4. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 23930 in the twenty-second embodiment, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 166, in the distribution unit 23980 of the winning opening unit 23930 in the twenty-second embodiment, the first side surface base 23981 is closer to the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 166) of the first side surface base 23981 than the opening U6. A passage TR234 surrounded by the upper surface plate 23981a, the lower surface plate 23981b, the central plate 23981e, and the side surface plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the opening U6 of the passage TR234 and the openings U2 and U4 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 23981a (two in this embodiment). It is formed. In addition, since the distance between arrangement | positioning of the several protrusion 21981b1 is the same as the distance between arrangement | positioning in 20th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section, and is formed continuously on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 166). 21981b1 and the center plate 23981e are integrally formed.

  Thereby, the deflection of the center plate 23981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) and the center plate 23981e can be suppressed, and the damage to the center plate 23981e can be suppressed.

  The game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other, so that the flow speed of the game ball decreases, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5. And the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 19983 is disposed at a position where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the pitching path from the sorting member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the pitching path to the detection device SE6 Even when the lengths of the game balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, thereby Can be prevented from being damaged, and design freedom can be ensured.

  In addition, the game ball flows down toward the region where the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR234 are formed in a state where the flow-down speed of the game ball is reduced by the protrusion 21981b1, and therefore the game ball passes through the passage. It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize that the player has flowed down TR234, or that a ball is being sent to passage TR5 or passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

  Further, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR234 and the openings U2 and U4, that is, the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the detection device SE5, the opening U2 and the opening U4, and the sorting member 19983. Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can prevent the player from visually recognizing the game ball, and the player can play the game ball in the path TR234, the path TR5, or the path TR6. It is possible to visually recognize which passage is passed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 2981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described. A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a winning opening unit 24930 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the center of gravity is arranged on the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 19983 has been described (see FIG. 161). However, in the twenty-third embodiment, the center of gravity position of the sorting member 24983 is one action part. 24983a is biased and is formed with a different rotational speed of the sorting member 24983. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 24930 in the 23rd embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. FIG. 167 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the action portion 24983a disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)) of the sorting member 24983 is from the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 167 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that protrudes to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In other words, the sorting member 24983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the sorting member 24983 in the direction connecting the action portion 19983a and the action portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the standing direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity is located closer to the action portion 24983a (left side in FIG. 167 (a)) than the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount by which the protrusion 24983a protrudes.

  Further, the front-side contact portion 24982b1 of the lower surface plate 24982b formed on the bulging portion 24982 of the first side surface base 24981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed to protrude from the action portion 24983a of the sorting member 24983. A concave portion 24982b3 formed in a shape is provided. Accordingly, the protrusion 24983a1 protruding from the action part 24983a of the sorting member 24983 can be arranged inside the recess 24982b3, and the sorting member 24983 can be arranged in the second position.

  That is, the distribution member 24983 can form an inclined state similar to the second position of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment, and is thereby disposed on the opening U7 side (the left side in FIG. 167 (a)). The game balls arranged between the action part 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b are distributed from the distribution member 24983 to the front unit 19940 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)) and pass through the opening U7 and the intermediate port 19941h. The ball can be sent to the passage TR3.

  The protrusion 24983a1 is formed to be sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, in the state in which the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the first position, the center of gravity of the sorting member 24983 in the front-rear direction is located on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 167 (a)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. To do. Thereby, the distribution member 24983 can maintain the state arrange | positioned in a 1st position.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in a state where the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the second position, the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) When the ball flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 24980, and is sent to the distribution member 24983, the game ball is on the side of the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 ( A ball is sent between the action portion 19983a arranged on the right side of FIG. 167 (a), and the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 24983 is disposed at the first position. .

  As described above, the center of gravity of the sorting member 24983 in the direction connecting the action part 19983a and the action part 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the standing direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is closer to the action part 24983a than the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 167 ( a) Since it is located on the left side), the rotational speed of the sorting member 24983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the sorting member 19983 (see FIG. 161) in the eighteenth embodiment. The rotation speed of the sorting member 24983 that is displaced from the position to the second position is larger than that of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 24980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

  In addition, as a result, even when the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, the time until the detection device SE5 detects the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161), and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of design freedom.

  Moreover, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983, The structure of the distribution unit 24980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of design freedom can be increased with respect to the layout of the fourth passage or the fifth passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction ( 1), when the inertial force in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)) acts on the distribution member 24983, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member 24983 The angle formed by the direction connecting the center of gravity (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 24983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 24983 (the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)) is the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the sorting member 19983 in the form (see FIG. 161). Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force is applied to the sorting member 24983 in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)). The displacement of the minute member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the distribution member 24983 in this embodiment was provided with the action part 24983a in which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be disposed on the action portion 24983a of the sorting member 24983.

  That is, in the sorting member 24983 in this embodiment, the projecting portion 24983a1 is integrally formed with the action portion 24983a disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. The weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to protrude from the lower surface of the action part 24983a, or may be embedded inside the action part 24983a, like the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment.

  By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

  When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to suppress the concave portion 24982b3 from being disposed in the front-side contact portion 24982b1, and the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it can suppress that a weight member protrudes from the lower surface of the action part 24983a, damage to the distribution member 24983 at the time of an assembly can be suppressed.

  Moreover, although the recessed part 24982b3 of the front side contact part 24982b1 in this embodiment demonstrated the case where it was formed in a shape a little larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 which protrudes and is formed in the action part 24983a of the distribution member 24983, The shape is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed sufficiently larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1. Further, the concave portion 24982b3 of the front contact portion 24982b1 may be formed with a through-hole having a width larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1.

  As a result, even when dust or the like is accumulated in the concave portion 24982b3 of the front contact portion 24982b1, the lower surface of the action portion 24983a (the lower side in FIG. 167 (a)) and the upper surface of the front contact portion 24982b1 (FIG. 167 ( a) the upper side) can be in contact with each other, and the sorting member 24983 can be arranged in the second position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, a winning opening unit 25930 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-third embodiment, a case has been described in which the center of gravity of the sorting member 24983 is arranged so as to be biased toward the one action portion 24983a and the rotational speed of the sorting member 24983 is different (see FIG. 167). In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the center of gravity of the sorting member 25983 is biased toward the one action portion 24983a and an external force is applied to the sorting member 25983, the sorting member 25983 is prevented from rotating. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  168 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 25930 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 168 (a), the distribution member 25983 is in the first position. FIG. 168 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 25983 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the action portion 24983a disposed on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 168 (a)) of the sorting member 25983 is in the direction of gravity from the lower surface (lower side of FIG. 168 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that protrudes to one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the sorting member 25983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the sorting member 25983 in a direction connecting the action portion 19983a and the action portion 24983a (a direction perpendicular to the standing direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity is positioned closer to the action portion 24983a (right side in FIG. 168 (a)) than the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount by which the protrusion 24983a protrudes.

  Further, the back-side contact portion 25982b2 of the lower surface plate 25982b formed on the bulging portion 25982 of the first side surface base 25981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed to protrude from the action portion 24983a of the sorting member 25983. A concave portion 24982b3 formed in a shape is provided. Accordingly, the protrusion 24983a1 that is formed to protrude from the action portion 24983a of the sorting member 25983 can be disposed inside the recess 24982b3, and the sorting member 25983 can be disposed at the first position.

  That is, the distribution member 25983 can form an inclined state similar to the first position of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment, and is thereby disposed on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)). The game balls arranged between the action part 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b are distributed from the sorting member 25983 to the detection device SE5 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)), passed through the opening U6 and sent to the passage TR4. Can be done.

  Since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed to be sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), in the state where the distribution member 24983 is disposed at the second position, the distribution member in the front-rear direction. The center of gravity of 25983 is located on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 168 (b)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. Thereby, the distribution member 25983 can maintain the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd position.

  Further, the position of the center of gravity of the sorting member 25983 is located closer to the opening U6 (the right side in FIG. 168 (a)) than the position of the center of gravity of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the sorting member 25983 is disposed at the first position, and external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). When inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 168 (a)) acts on the dividing member 25983, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distributing member 25983 The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 168 (a)) is the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983 can be reduced.

  Further, the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to protrude from the lower surface (lower side in FIG. 168 (a)) of the action part 24983a to the one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). It is located on the one side in the direction of gravity with respect to the gravity center position of the sorting member 19983 in the embodiment.

  Therefore, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the sorting member 25983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983 (FIG. 168 (a) ) And the direction of arrow F <b> 1) are formed smaller than the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Further, the distance between the shaft center of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the sorting member 25983 can be reduced.

  Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983 can be reduced, and the moment acting on the sorting member 25983 by the inertial force can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 168 (a)) is applied to the sorting member 25983, the vibration is applied. Displacement of the minute member 25983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is relatively easy to form the protrusion 24983a1 on the action part 24983a of the sorting member 25983, compared to a method of reducing the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983, such as using a vibration-proof rubber. Product cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, the distribution path 25983 may be formed shorter than the fourth path formed on the side where the game balls are quickly distributed among the two directions. . In this case, the rotation speed of the sorting member 25983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment (see FIG. 161), and the first position is shifted to the second position. The rotational speed of the displacing distribution member 25983 is larger than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 25980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced (see FIG. 161).

  In addition, as a result, even when the sorting member 25983 is arranged at a position where the game ball sorting time differs depending on the sorting direction, the time until the detection device SE5 detects the game ball flowing into the sorting unit 25980 The difference from the time until the detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled and the degree of design freedom can be secured (see FIG. 161).

  Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted by the distribution member 25983, the structure of the distribution unit 25980 The design cost can be reduced and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the fourth passage or the fifth passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a winning opening unit 26930 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-third embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is biased toward the one action part 24983a (see FIG. 167), but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, one action part 26983a has a magnetic property. By arranging the body 26983a2, the rotation speed of the sorting member 24983 is formed differently. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 169 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 26930 in the 25th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 169 (a), the distribution member 26983 is in the first position. FIG. 169 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 26983 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the action portion 26983a disposed on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 169 (a)) of the sorting member 26983 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is a magnetic body from the bottom surface to the inside. 26983a2 is buried.

  In addition, a magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded from the upper surface to the inner side of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed in the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The magnetic body 26982b4 is disposed at a position facing the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed at the action portion 26983a in a state where the sorting member 26983 is positioned at the first position. In addition, the magnetic body 26982b4 is disposed so as to repel the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed in the action portion 26983a.

  Here, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed in the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed in the action portion 26983a is the gravity acting on the sorting member 26983 located in the first position. It is formed smaller than the resultant force of the repulsive force between the magnetic body 988c disposed on the sorting member 26983 and the magnetic body 988b disposed on the housing portion 986b (see FIG. 150). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position, the state where it is arranged at the first position is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed on the back contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the action portion 26983a causes the action portion 26983a of the sorting member 26983 to The lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the one side base 26981 does not come into contact with the back side contact portion 26982b2, but the action portion 26983a of the sorting member 26983 and the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981 A state in which the rear surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b to be formed approaches and the force acting on the sorting member 26983 is balanced is referred to as a first position.

  In a state where the distribution member 26983 is disposed at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) flows into the first receiving portion 19941g of the front unit 19940, and When the ball is passed through the first prize opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 26980 and sent to the distribution member 26983, the shaft member 988a is rotationally displaced about the axis of rotation, and the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position. It is in a state to be installed.

  As described above, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the action portion 26983a acts on the sorting member 26983. The rotation speed of the sorting member 26983 displaced to the second position is larger than that of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in a state where the sorting member 26983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) is the first of the front unit 19940. When it flows into the receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 26980, and is sent to the distribution member 26983, it is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as a rotation axis, The sorting member 26983 is placed in the first position.

  As described above, since the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed at the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed at the action portion 26983a acts on the sorting member 26983, the second position starts from the second position. The rotation speed of the sorting member 26983 that is displaced to one position is smaller than that of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 26980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In addition, in this way, even when the sorting member 26983 is arranged in a state where the game ball sorting time differs depending on the sorting direction, the time until the game ball flowing into the sorting unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until the detection by the detection device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  In the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is embedded inward from the lower surface of the action portion 26983a, and the magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded inward from the upper surface of the back-side contact portion 26982b2, that is, the magnetic body. The case where the exposed surface of the 26983a2 and the lower surface of the action portion 26983a form the same surface and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 form the same surface has been described. It is not something that can be done.

  For example, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 may be formed on the inner side (upper side of FIG. 169 (a)) of the action portion 26983a, and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 may be formed from the upper surface of the back-side contact portion 26982b2. May also be formed on the inner side (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)).

  Thereby, it can suppress that the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 contact | abut, and can suppress that the magnetic body 26983a2 or the magnetic body 26982b4 breaks.

  Further, due to variation in dimensional tolerances, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 is formed on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the lower surface of the action portion 26983a, or the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 is on the back side. It is possible to suppress the outer side (upper side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the contact portion 26982b2 from being formed, and the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 can be prevented from contacting each other.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the magnetic body 26983a2 or the magnetic body 26982b4 breaks. Moreover, it can suppress that the distribution member 26983 is not fully rotated and is not arrange | positioned in a 1st position.

  In addition, by inserting a spacer or the like between the magnetic body 26983a2 and the action portion 26983a, or between the magnetic body 26982b4 and the back-side contact portion 26982b2, the sorting member 26983 is disposed at the first position. , The distance between the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 can be adjusted.

  Thereby, the magnitude of the force acting on the distribution member 26983 can be adjusted, and the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily performed. Can be adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 26983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 are disposed in a repulsive state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26983b4 may be disposed in an adsorbing state. .

  Thereby, in a state where the sorting member 26983 is arranged at the first position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the sorting member 26983. Even in the case where the inertial force in the front side direction is applied, the displacement of the sorting member 26983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is disposed on the action portion 26983a disposed on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the distribution member 26983, and the first side surface base 26981 is expanded. Although the case where the magnetic body 26982b4 is disposed in the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed in the protruding portion 26982 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening U7 side of the sorting member 26983 ( The magnetic body 26983a2 is disposed on the action portion 19983a disposed on the left side of FIG. 169 (a), and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The magnetic material 26982b4 may be disposed in a state of being adsorbed thereto.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the sorting member 26983 is disposed at the second position. (Refer to FIG. 1) When the inertial force in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)) acts on the distribution member 26983, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member The angle formed between the direction connecting the center of gravity of 26983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 26983) and the direction of inertial force acting on the sorting member 26983 (the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)) is 18th. It is formed smaller than the sorting member 19983 in the embodiment (see FIG. 161). Thereby, the rotation direction component of the inertia force which acts on the distribution member 26983 can be made small.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force is applied to the sorting member 26983 in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)). The displacement of the minute member 26983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170, a winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 disposed at the first position, the angle at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage, and the second position. In the above description, the game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 arranged in the above, and the angle at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fourth passage is arranged at the same angle. (See FIG. 161) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, a game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 disposed at the first position, and the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage. The game balls are sent to the sorting member 19983 disposed at the second position, and the angles at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game balls to the fourth passage are arranged at different angles. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  170 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 170 (a), the sorting member 19983 is in the first position. FIG. 170 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 27930 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment, the front-side contact portion 19982b1 and the back-side contact portion 27982b2 of the lower surface plate 27982b formed on the bulging portion 27982 of the first side surface base 27981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 170 ( a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to the vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 27982b2 is formed so as to protrude upward (upward in FIG. 170 (a)) from the upper surface of the front surface side contact portion 19982b1.

  As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

  Therefore, in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position, a position at which the game ball sent to the sorting member 19983 is sent to the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 170). (A) The rotation angle at which the tip of the action section 19983a disposed on the left side is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) is such that the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position. In the state, the tip of the action part 19983a disposed at the position where the game ball sent to the sorting member 19983 is sent to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 170 (a)). Can be made smaller than the rotation angle that is rotated to a position that faces one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 27980 described above to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In addition, in this way, even when the sorting member 19983 is arranged in a state in which the game ball assignment time is different depending on the assignment direction, the time until the game device flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until the detection by the detection device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  The distribution unit 27980 in the present embodiment adjusts the position of the upper surface of the front-side contact portion 19982b1 projecting upward (upward in FIG. 170 (a)) to detect the time by the detection device SE5. And the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be easily adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171, a winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment will be described. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 disposed at the first position, and the angle at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is the second position. A case has been described in which a game ball is sent to the distribution member 19983 disposed in the position, and the distribution member 19983 is disposed to be smaller than an angle at which the game ball is rotated to send the game ball to the fourth passage (see FIG. 170), in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 disposed at the first position, and the angle at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is determined. The game ball is sent to the sorting member 19983 arranged at the second position, and is arranged to be larger than the angle at which the sorting member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fourth passage. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  171 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 171 (a), the sorting member 19983 is in the first position. FIG. 171 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 28930 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the front-side contact portion 19982b1 and the rear-side contact portion 28982b2 of the lower surface plate 28982b formed on the bulging portion 28982 of the first side surface base 28981 are vertically oriented (FIG. 171 a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to the vertical direction), and the upper surface of the rear side contact portion 27982b2 is formed to be recessed below the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (downward in FIG. 170 (a)). The

  As a result, the angle θ5 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the distribution member 19983 is disposed at the second position. It is formed smaller than the angle θ3.

  Further, the position of the center of gravity of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation center. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position (see FIG. 1). ) When the inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 171 (a)) acts on the distribution member 19983, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 The angle formed by the direction connecting the two members (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distributing member 19983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distributing member 19983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 171 (a)) is the vibration in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than the dividing member 19983. Thereby, the rotation direction component of the inertia force which acts on the distribution member 19983 can be made small.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 19983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 171 (a)), the vibration is applied. Displacement of the dividing member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 28980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a winning opening unit 29930 in the 28th embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the sorting member 19983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to a symmetrical plane extending in the left-right direction through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 147). In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the sorting member 29983 is formed in an asymmetric shape with respect to a symmetrical plane that passes through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b and extends in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 172 is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 29930 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, corresponding to the section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 172 (a), the distribution member 29983 is in the first position. FIG. 172 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 29983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 29930 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the angle θ6 formed by the action line SL and the intermediate line TL connecting the pair of action parts 19983a of the sorting member 29983 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 172 (a)) is It is formed smaller than the angle θ7 formed by the action line SL and the intermediate line TL on the U7 side (left side in FIG. 172 (a)). In other words, in the sorting member 29983, the intermediate plate 19983b is inclined with respect to the pair of action portions 19983a, passes through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and is in the left-right direction (FIG. 172 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). It is formed in an asymmetric shape with respect to the symmetry plane extending in the direction.

  Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 29983 is disposed at the first position, the position at which the game ball sent to the distribution member 29983 is sent to the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 172). (A) The rotation angle at which the tip of the action section 19983a disposed on the left side is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) is that the sorting member 29983 is disposed at the second position. In the state, the tip of the action part 19983a arranged at the position where the game ball sent to the sorting member 29983 is sent to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 172 (a)). Can be made smaller than the rotation angle that is rotated to a position that faces one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 29980 described above to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In addition, as a result, even when the distribution member 29983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until the detection by the detection device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution in two directions of the distribution member 29983, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, a winning opening unit 30930 in the 29th embodiment will be described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the state of the contact surface of the distribution member 30983 with the game ball differs between the state in which the distribution member 30983 is disposed at the first position and the state in which the distribution member 30983 is disposed at the second position. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 173 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 30930 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is in the first position. FIG. 173 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 30983 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 30983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 30980, and is sent to the distribution member 30983, the game ball is on the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 side (FIG. 173). (B) The ball is sent between the action part 19983a on the right side. As a result, the distribution member 30983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), and the distribution member 30983 is disposed at the first position. .

  Here, the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distributing member 30983 are formed of a rubber-like elastic body on the side surface on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. A rubber sheet 30983f is provided. Therefore, the game ball in contact with the rubber sheet 30983f rebounds and is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction).

  The game ball displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) comes into contact with the sorting member 30983 again by its own weight, so that the member 30983 is rotationally displaced from the second position to the first position by the load of the game ball, and the fourth A game ball is sent to the passage (passage TR4). That is, it is possible to delay the game ball being sent to the fourth passage (passage TR4) by displacing the game ball to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction).

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 30980 described above to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In addition, even when the sorting member 30983 is arranged in a state where the game ball sorting time is different depending on the sorting direction, the time until the detection device SE5 detects the game ball flowing into the sorting unit 30980 is detected. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of design freedom.

  Note that the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 are detected by changing the thickness or shape of the rubber sheet 30983f or by disposing rubber sheets having different elastic moduli. The difference from the time until can be easily adjusted.

  Further, a rubber formed of a rubber-like elastic body on the side surface on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the sorting member 30983 and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Since the sheet 30983f is disposed, the center of gravity of the sorting member 30983 is located on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) with respect to the center of gravity of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the sorting member 30983 is disposed at the first position, and external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). When inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)) acts on the dividing member 30983, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distributing member 30983 The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 30983) and the direction of inertial force acting on the sorting member 30983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)) is the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 30983 can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 30983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)), the vibration is applied. Displacement of the minute member 30983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the distribution member 30983 according to the present embodiment has been described with respect to the case where the game ball is displaced (bounces back) in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity) due to the rubber sheet 30983f being disposed, The speed component of the game ball may be reduced by bringing the game ball and the rubber sheet 30983f into contact with each other.

  For example, when the rubber sheet 30983f is viscous, the game ball slides or rolls on the rubber sheet 30983f, so that the velocity component toward the opening U6 (the right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced.

  In addition, for example, when the rubber ball 30983f is greatly deformed by the contact of the game ball (the game ball sinks), the opening U6 side (FIG. 5) is caused by the frictional force acting between the game ball and the rubber sheet 30983f. The velocity component to 173 (a) right) is reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 30983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the rubber sheet 30983f demonstrated the case where it formed from a rubber-like elastic body, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, members having different materials (elastic modulus) such as a resin film, a gel-like sheet, or a metal plate are exemplified.

  In the present embodiment, the elastic plate 30833 has a rubber-like elasticity on the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Although the case where the rubber sheet 30983f formed from the body is disposed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the game ball is formed on the surface of the intermediate plate 19983b, the contact portion 19983d, and the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. A protrusion having a smaller dimension may be formed. Thereby, the velocity component to the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced by the frictional force acting between the game ball and the protrusion.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The sorting member 31983 in the thirtieth embodiment is formed with different rotational resistance depending on the rotational direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  Further, in the sorting member 31983 in this embodiment, the shaft member 31988a is extended in the axial direction (FIG. 174 (a) left-right direction) with respect to the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Has the same configuration, and a pair of action portions 19983a and an intermediate plate 19983b are arranged at a substantially right angle, and pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction and extend in the left-right direction. It is formed in a symmetrical shape (see FIG. 161).

  FIG. 174 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 31930, and FIG. 174 (b) is a side view of the winning unit 31930. In the winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment, the side plate 31986a formed on the bulging portion 31986 of the second side surface base 31985 is formed in an annular shape toward the first side surface base 19981 side (left side in FIG. 174 (a)). A protruding bearing portion 31985j is provided, and the inside of the bearing portion 31985j is formed to penetrate in the axial direction.

  One end of the shaft member 31988a of the sorting member 31983 is disposed outside the second cover member 31988 (right side in FIG. 174 (a)) through the bearing portion 31985j, and the other end of the shaft member 31988a is It is inserted into the bearing portion 982c (see FIG. 151) of the side plate 19982a formed on the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981. Therefore, the shaft member 31988a is rotatably disposed by the bearing portion 31985j and the bearing portion 982c. Further, one end of the shaft member 31988a is formed in a substantially D shape when viewed in the axial direction, and a one-way gear WG described later is disposed.

  The one-way gear WG is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between an inner ring and an outer ring. A gear meshed with the third gear GY3 is engraved on the outer periphery of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. Further, the shaft hole of the one-way gear WG is formed in the same shape as the substantially D-shape at one end of the axial viewing shaft member 31988a.

  Further, the distribution member 31983 and the shaft member 31988a are fastened and fixed by a set screw (not shown). Thereby, the rotation of the sorting member 31983 is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way gear WG.

  When the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is not rotated. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is rotated.

  The second cover member 31988 has a third gear GY3 at a position meshed with the one-way gear WG, a second gear member GY4 at a position meshed with the third gear GY3, and a second mesh position at a position meshed with the fourth gear GY4. 5 gears GY5 are provided.

  Therefore, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4. And the fifth gear GY5 does not rotate. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is rotated. Thus, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate.

  Here, when the rotation of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the third gear GY3 and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 rotate, the meshing of the gear teeth between the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 is performed. Friction occurs on the surface.

  Similarly, when the rotation of the third gear GY3 is transmitted to the fourth gear GY4 and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 rotate, the gear teeth meshing surfaces of the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 When friction is generated and the rotation of the fourth gear GY4 is transmitted to the fifth gear GY5 and the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5 rotate, the gear teeth mesh between the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5. Friction occurs on the surface.

  Therefore, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate, that is, when the rotation of the distributing member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. The rotation of 31983 is performed when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 do not rotate, that is, when the rotation of the sorting member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. It becomes slower than the rotation of the minute member 31983.

  Therefore, when the rotation of the sorting member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161). The rotation of the member 31983 is when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161). It is slower than the rotation of the distribution member 31983 in FIG. 3, and the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 31980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 161) and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) is reduced. be able to.

  In this way, when the degree of freedom of design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 31980 are The difference between the time until the detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until the detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled and to ensure the degree of freedom of design. it can.

  Further, in the state in which the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1). In the case where an inertial force acts in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of the arrow F2 in FIG. 174 (b)), the respective gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surface of the teeth.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 31983 in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 174 (b)), the vibration is applied. Displacement of the dividing member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch between transmission and non-transmission of rotation to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotational direction can be reliably formed. it can.

  Further, since the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are disposed outside the second cover member 31988, they can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time for the detection time difference can be reduced.

  In addition, since the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 can be made relatively simple, the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can be improved.

  In particular, the rotational resistance of the sorting member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is easy to secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small. This is effective as a configuration for reducing the size.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of arranged gears is three has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see FIG. 161).

  In the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG rotates due to the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 31983 from the second position to the first position, the one-way gear WG Has explained the case where the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5 (see FIG. 161), the structure in which the one-way gear WG acts in the opposite direction. It is also good.

  That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. When the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the one-way gear WG rotates the sorting member 31983 with the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the second gear GY4. It is good also as a structure which is not transmitted to 5 gear GY5.

  In this case, when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the sorting member 31983 ( 161), the distribution member 31983 is moved from the first position by friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Displacement (rotation) to the second position can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, a prize opening unit 32930 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In the thirty-first embodiment, the center of gravity of the distributing member 32983 is formed at the same position as the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 32930 in the thirty-first embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 175, in the sorting member 32983 in the thirty-first embodiment, the pair of action portions 19983a and the contact plate 19983d opposite to the intermediate plate 19983b in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a (see FIG. 175 lower side) and is provided with a center of gravity adjustment portion 32983g formed to project. The center-of-gravity adjustment unit 32983g is a part for arranging the center of gravity of the sorting member 32983 at the same position as the axis of the shaft member 988a, and is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 175, the sorting member 32983 is disposed at the first position, and external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the sorting member 32983. When the inertial force in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 175) is applied, the center of gravity of the distributing member 32983 and the axial center position of the shaft member 988a are disposed at the same position. Therefore, the inertial force acting on the sorting member 32983 does not generate a moment.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 175) acts on the sorting member 32983, the sorting member 32983. The displacement from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  Further, a sorting member 32983 is disposed at the second position, and external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the sorting member 32983. Even when an inertial force in the direction (the direction opposite to the arrow F1 direction in FIG. 175) acts, the inertial force acting on the sorting member 32983 does not generate a moment.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction opposite to the arrow F1 direction in FIG. 175) acts on the sorting member 32983, Displacement of the sorting member 32983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  The distribution member 32983 is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, the shape of the sorting member 32983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the distribution member 32983 has no directionality, the assembling property can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, a winning opening unit 33930 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. In the thirty-second embodiment, the shape of the intermediate plate 33983b of the sorting member 33983 is different between the opening U6 side and the opening U7 side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 33930 in the thirty-second embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 176 (a), the sorting member 33983 is in the first position. FIG. 176 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 33983 is disposed at the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b of the sorting member 33983 is formed to be curved in an arc shape projecting toward the opening U6 side. A projecting surface 33983b1 is formed, and the opening U7 side (the left side in FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b is curved and formed in an arc shape recessed toward the axis of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 33983. A concave surface 33983b2 is formed. Further, the action portion 33983a of the sorting member 33983 on the opening U7 side is formed so as to project to the intermediate plate 33983b (upper side of FIG. 176 (a)) as it moves toward the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)). The upper surface of the portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 form a uniform surface. In other words, a boundary portion between the upper surface of the action portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 is formed on the same surface.

  In a state where the sorting member 33983 is disposed at the first position, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) flows into the first receiving portion 19941g of the front unit 19940, and When the ball is passed through the winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980 and sent to the distribution member 33983, the game ball is on the concave surface 3398b2 of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980 and the opening U7 side (FIG. 176 (a)). The ball is sent to the action portion 33983a on the left side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is disposed at the second position. .

  Here, the concave surface 33983b2 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed to be curved in an arc shape recessed toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 33983, and has a surface that is uniform with the upper surface of the action portion 33983a. In order to form, the velocity component of the game ball sent to the distribution unit 33980 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)) is the opening U7 side (FIG. 176 (b)). The game ball can be sent to the opening U7 by changing the velocity component to the left). That is, since a velocity component toward the opening U7 can be imparted to the game ball, the ball can be sent in a shorter time compared to the ball sending to the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the pitching time of the game ball to the path TR3 (fifth path) by the sorting member 33983 can be shortened compared to the pitching time in the eighteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in a state where the sorting member 33983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the receiving portion 19941g, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980, and is sent to the distribution member 33983, the game ball is projected from the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980. 33983b1 and the opening U6 side (FIG. 176 (b) right side) action part 19983a is sent to the ball. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is disposed at the first position. .

  Here, the projecting surface 33983b1 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed to be curved in an arc shape projecting toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)), and thus formed on a straight line in the 18th embodiment. Compared with the side surface of the intermediate plate 19883b (see FIG. 161), the sliding or rolling distance on the projecting surface 33983b1 of the intermediate plate 33983b can be increased.

  Further, since the game ball slides or rolls on the projecting surface 33983b1 and approaches the axial center of the shaft member 988a, the moment acting on the sorting member 33983 can be reduced. Thereby, the rotation time of the sorting member 33983 from the second position to the first position can be delayed.

  Therefore, the pitching time of the game ball to the path TR4 (fourth path) by the sorting member 33983 can be made longer than the pitching time in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 33980 described above to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

  In addition, in this way, even when the sorting member 33983 is arranged in a state where the game ball sorting time is different depending on the sorting direction, the time until the game device flowing into the sorting unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until the detection by the detection device SE6, and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 33983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, a winning opening unit 34930 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the sorting member 19983 is rotatably supported (see FIG. 161), but in the thirty-third embodiment, the sorting member 19983 is rotatably supported, and the front and rear It is arranged so as to be displaceable in the direction and the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 34930 in the thirty-third embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 177 (a), the sorting member 19983 is in the first position. FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 19983 maintains the posture (angle) disposed at the first position inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j described later. The state displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)) is illustrated, and FIG. 177 (c) illustrates the state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position. In order to facilitate understanding, in the enlarged view illustrated in FIG. 177, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are illustrated by solid lines, and the sorting member 19983 is illustrated by chain lines.

  In the winning opening unit 34930 according to the thirty-third embodiment, an elliptical shape in which the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are inclined and extend toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) toward the opening U7 (the left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Formed. Here, the oval shape indicates a shape in which both end portions are formed in an arc shape having a radius equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a, and the pair of both end portions are connected by a pair of linear shapes. Further, the pair of linear shapes are arranged in parallel, and the distance between the opposed shapes is arranged to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

  Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 can be displaced in the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the sorting member 19983 is rotatably arranged in the sorting unit 34980 and is arranged to be displaceable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 177 (a) left-right direction) and the up-down direction (FIG. 177 (a) up-down direction). Arranged in the installation.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (a), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 with the sorting member 19983 disposed at the first position (see FIG. 1). When inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 177 (a)) acts on the dividing member 19983, the inertial force generated in the distributing member 19983 is on the front side (FIG. 177 (a)). The shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)) as shown in FIG. 177 (b) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the sorting member 19983 is displaced forward by the inertial force generated in the sorting member 19983.

  Further, due to the forward displacement of the sorting member 19983, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy imparted to the sorting member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. .

  Further, since the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) as it is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy imparted to the sorting member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 19983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 177 (a)), Displacement (rotation) of the minute member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (b), when the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the opening U6 side of the sorting member 19983 (FIG. 177 (b)). It is possible to maintain the contact between the action part 19983a on the right side) and the back side contact part 19982b2 of the bottom plate 19982b formed on the bulged part 34982 of the first side surface base 34981. Thereby, the distribution member 19983 can maintain the attitude | position (angle) arrange | positioned in the 1st position.

  In a state where the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), that is, in a state where the shaft member 988a is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction). 988a is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j by gravity, that is, displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), so that FIG. 177 (a). As shown in FIG. 2, the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 19983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 177 (a)), the vibration is applied. The state in which the minute member 19983 is disposed at the first position can be maintained.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), in a state where the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the sorting unit 34980 has a front surface. The facing distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h of the unit 19940 and the sorting member 19983 is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Accordingly, in a state where the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced forward (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the game ball is sent to the sorting unit 34980, and the sorting member 19983 is moved from the first position to the second position. In the case of displacement, the game ball may be caught between the projecting portion 19982d of the sorting unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the sorting member 19983.

  On the other hand, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment have an oval shape extending in an inclined manner toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) toward the opening U7 (the left side in FIG. 177 (a)), in other words. And an elliptical shape that is inclined and extended toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). Therefore, due to the weight of the sorting member 19983 and the force in one direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity) acting on the sorting member 19983 due to contact between the sorting member 19983 and the game ball flowing down in the sorting unit 34980, The distribution member 19983 is displaced to the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) and one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction), and the game ball released from the biting state has a fifth passage (passage TR3). Can be sent to.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (b), in the state where the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the sorting unit 34980, the front unit 19940 The distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h and the sorting member 19983 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  A game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g of the front unit 19940, passes through the first winning port 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 34980, When the ball is sent to the sorting member 19983, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 19983b and the action portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)) of the sorting unit 19980.

  Here, as described above, the game ball sent to the sorting unit 19980 has a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)), and therefore, the game ball sending direction and the extension of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are included. The installation direction has the same direction component in that it moves forward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) toward the rear side.

  Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). While maintaining, the sorting member 19983 is rotated about the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and is placed at the second position as shown in FIG. 177 (c).

  An external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 1), and the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the sorting member 19983 (FIG. 177 (a), arrow F1 direction. When the inertial force acts on the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983, the inner side of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j is on the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). That is, displacement to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) and the sorting member 19983 from being illegally rotated from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)). , The distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft member 988a as a rotation axis by the game balls being sent, and is disposed at the first position as shown in FIG. 177 (a). Is done.

  The bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) toward the opening U7 side (the left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 19983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 177 (a)), the sorting is performed. The shaft member 988a of the member 19983 can be prevented from being illegally rotated from the second position to the first position by displacing the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j.

  Further, the shaft member 988a of the distributing member 19983 that is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)), that is, the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j is subjected to gravity. As a result, since it is disposed at the first position, a driving means such as an actuator for displacing the sorting member 19983 to the first position becomes unnecessary. Therefore, product cost can be suppressed. Moreover, it can suppress that the state by which the distribution member 19983 was displaced to the front side by the control defect of a drive means, etc. is maintained.

  Further, external force is continuously applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 177 (a)) continuously acts on the sorting member 19983. Even in this case, the distribution member 19983 can be maintained at the first position by the action of gravity.

  In addition, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extended toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) toward the opening U6 side (the right side in FIG. 177 (a)). May be.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the second position. (See FIG. 1) When the inertial force in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 177 (c)) acts on the sorting member 19983, the inertial force generated in the sorting member 19983 is backward. The shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the rear side (right side of FIG. 177 (c)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the sorting member 19983 is displaced rearward by the inertial force generated in the sorting member 19983.

  Further, due to the rearward displacement of the sorting member 19983, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy imparted to the sorting member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. .

  Further, since the sorting member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) as it is displaced rearward (right side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy imparted to the sorting member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and the inertial force in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the arrow F2 direction in FIG. 177 (c)) acts on the sorting member 19983. Displacement (rotation) of the minute member 19983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  In addition, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends toward the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, the part which connects a pair of both ends may be formed to be curved, or may be formed from both a curved shape and a linear shape. Accordingly, the distribution member 19983 is illegally rotated from the second position to the first position by forming the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in a shape corresponding to the external force applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). This can be suppressed.

  Moreover, although a pair of linear shape demonstrated the case where it arrange | positions in parallel, it is not necessarily restricted to this, A pair of linear shape may be arrange | positioned non-parallel.

  For example, the facing distance may be increased from the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). As a result, the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 displaced toward the opening U7 can be rotated and displaced inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the game ball is sent to the distribution unit 34980 in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), and the distribution member Even when 19983 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the game ball bites between the projecting portion 19982d of the sorting unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the sorting member 19983. Indentation can be suppressed.

  In order to displace the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 19983 inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, the inner lower surface of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j is preferably formed in a linear shape.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 34980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, a winning opening unit 35930 in the 34th embodiment will be described. In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the sorting member 31983 is arranged at a position deviated in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 35930 in the 34th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 178 (a), the distribution member 31983 is in the first position. FIG. 178 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the second position. In FIG. 178, only the outer shape of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 is illustrated by a chain line for easy understanding.

  In the winning opening unit 35930 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the front-side contact portion 19982b1 and the back-side contact portion 35598b2 of the lower surface plate 35982b formed on the bulging portion 35982 of the first side surface base 35981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 178 ( a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to the vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 35982b2 is formed so as to protrude upward (upward in FIG. 178 (a)) from the upper surface of the front surface side contact portion 19982b1.

  As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL when the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

  Further, when the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the sorting member 31983 is moved from the second position. In the case of displacement (rotation) to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

  Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with an entrance into which a game ball is inserted, and a distribution member that distributes the game ball inserted into the entrance into one side or the other side. ing. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball entrance is arranged above the sorting member in the vertical direction when the sorting member is viewed in the rotation axis direction. There was a problem that the mode until reaching the member became monotonous and the entertainment of the game was insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the prize winning unit 35930 in this embodiment, the sorting member 31983 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (a)) of the first winning prize port 64. By the time the played game ball reaches the sorting member 31983, the game ball is displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Therefore, a game in which a game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 in the downward direction (FIG. 178 (a) downward direction) or in the left-right direction (FIG. 178 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface) is visually recognized. The player can visually recognize the displacement of the game ball in a different direction (front-rear direction). Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the distribution member 31983 has a direction of speed component (vertical direction (FIG. 178 (a) vertical direction)) and a longitudinal direction of the game ball with respect to the first receiving portion 19941g and the first winning opening 64. (FIG. 178 (a) left and right direction)), the game ball is in contact with the sorting member 31983 while maintaining the speed component. For this reason, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the game ball can be displaced quickly, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 on the rear side (right side of FIG. 178 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the first position, the game ball contacts the intermediate plate 19983b on the axial side of the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983. . Accordingly, the moment acting on the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 19983 due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and damage to the intermediate plate 19983b (sorting member 19983) can be suppressed.

  Further, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

  Accordingly, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be made slower than the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

  In this way, when the degree of freedom of design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 31980 are The difference between the time until the detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until the detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced, and the entertainment of the game can be prevented from being impaired. Can be secured.

  In addition, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are disposed outside the second cover member, and therefore can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time for the detection time difference can be reduced.

  In particular, the rotational resistance of the sorting member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is easy to secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small. This is effective as a configuration for reducing the size.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of arranged gears is three has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see FIG. 161).

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 31983 having a speed component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 178 (a)) Are in contact with the game ball and the distribution member 31983, the game ball has no velocity component to the rear side. Next, the game ball is displaced to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) by the weight of the game ball, and comes into contact with the action part on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 178 (a)) to move from the first position to the second position. Displace (rotate).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution having the velocity component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 178 (b)) are distributed. When the member 31983 comes into contact with the member 31983, the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the first position in a state where a speed component to the rear side is applied.

  Thereby, the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position are obtained. Different. In this embodiment, the displacement (rotation) speed at which the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position of the sorting member 31983. ) Faster than the displacement (rotation) speed.

  That is, the displacement (rotation) speed of the sorting member 31983 when the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the first position is the displacement (rotation) speed of the sorting member 31983 when the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the second position. ) Slower than speed.

  Therefore, the action part 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) of the sorting member 31983 comes into contact with the back side contact part 35982b2 at a high speed, and the action part 19983a (sorting member 31983) may be damaged. is there.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the sorting member 31983 is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, so that the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 are transmitted. Friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5.

  Thereby, since the displacement (rotation) from the 2nd position to the 1st position of the distribution member 31983 can be slowed, it can suppress that the action part 199883a (distribution member 31983) is damaged.

  Here, when the rotation of the sorting member 31983 due to the displacement (rotation) from the first position to the second position of the sorting member 31983 is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, and the fourth gear. Since friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of GY4 and fifth gear GY5, displacement (rotation) of distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position is delayed. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) collides with the distribution member 31983, the distribution member 31983 is caused by friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the respective gear teeth. Cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position in a state where the game ball has bounced back (separated). Therefore, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separating), and rebounds in a state where the distribution member 31983 is disposed at the second position. There is a possibility that the game balls fall (separated) and come into contact with the sorting member 31983 to be sent to the opening U6 opposite to the direction in which the game balls are originally sorted.

  On the other hand, the one-way gear WG in the present embodiment is configured such that when the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 31983 is not transmitted to the one-way gear WG. It is said. Therefore, friction (resistance) is not generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, and the first position from the second position of the distribution member 31983 is increased. The displacement (rotation) to the position can be performed quickly.

  Therefore, even when the game ball bounces off from the distribution member 31983 due to the game ball having a speed component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178) and the distribution member 31983 coming into contact, the game ball is distributed together with the game ball. The member 31983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and can send a game ball to the opening U7.

  Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounces back) from the distribution member 31983, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is arranged at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 31983 comes into contact with the game ball, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball, so that the game ball is prevented from being sent to the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

  Further, in the state in which the sorting member 31983 is disposed at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1). When the inertial force in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of the arrow F2 in FIG. 178 (b)) acts, the gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 Displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed by friction (resistance) generated on the tooth meshing surface.

  In addition, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch the rotation to the gear formed on the outer ring between transmission and non-transmission, a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction can be reliably formed. Moreover, since it can be set as a comparatively simple structure whether the gear is driven, the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability and durability can be improved.

  Moreover, since the distribution member 31983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, the shape of the distribution member 31983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, the assembling property can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG causes the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is rotated by the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 31983 from the second position to the first position without transmitting to the GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, the one-way gear WG Although the case where the rotation of the sorting member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 has been described, the one-way gear WG may be configured to act in the opposite direction.

  That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. When the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  In this case, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the sorting member 31983 is directed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 178 (a)). When the inertial force acts, the sorting member 31983 is caused by friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Displacement (rotation) from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 31983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment will be described. In the 35th embodiment, the sorting member 24983 is arranged at a position deviated in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 179 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. FIG. 179 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 36930 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a sorting member 24983 is provided. As described above, the center of gravity of the sorting member 24983 in the direction connecting the action part 19983a and the action part 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the standing direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is the same as that of the protrusion 24983a. It is located on the action part 24983a side (FIG. 179 (a) left side).

  Therefore, when the sorting member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the sorting member 24983 is displaced (rotated) against the gravity, so that the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the sorting member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, since the sorting member 24983 is displaced (rotated) using gravity, the displacement (rotation) can be accelerated. it can.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

  In addition, as a result, even when the sorting member 24983 is arranged at a position where the game ball sorting time differs depending on the sorting direction, the time until the game ball flowing into the sorting unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161), and to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of design freedom.

  Moreover, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983, The structure of the sorting unit 36980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of design freedom can be increased with respect to the layout of the fourth passage or the fifth passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is sent to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) and passes through the first winning port 64. The ball is sent to the sorting unit 36980. Accordingly, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 36980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the direction in which the sorting member 24983 is biased with respect to the first receiving portion 19941g and the first winning opening 64 and the speed component to the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution including the speed component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 179 (b)). As the member 24983 comes into contact, the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the first position in a state where a speed component is applied to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)). Therefore, the action part 19983a on the opening U6 side (the right side in FIG. 179 (b)) of the sorting member 24983 abuts on the back-side contact part 36982b2 at a high speed, and the action part 19983a (sorting member 24983) may be damaged. is there.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the action part 24983a disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the sorting member 24983 is from its lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). Since the projection 24983a1 is formed so as to project on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the portion 19983a (the sorting member 24983) from being damaged.

  Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 24983 is disposed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) with respect to the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 179 (a) left-right direction).

  Here, the action part 24983a disposed on the opening U6 side (the right side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the sorting member 24983 is one side in the gravitational direction (the gravitational direction) from the lower surface (the lower side in FIG. 179 (a)). In the case where the protrusion 24983a1 is formed to protrude to the lower side, the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 24983 from the first position to the second position is delayed by the amount of the protrusion 24983a1. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 179 (b)) collides with the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is moved from the first position in a state where the game ball bounces back (separated). Displace (rotate) to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 24983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separating), The game ball bounced back (separated) in the state where the distribution member 24983 is disposed at the second position falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 24983, so that the game ball is sent to the opening U6 opposite to the direction in which the game ball is originally distributed. There is a risk of being.

  On the other hand, the action part 24983a disposed on the opening U7 side (the left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the sorting member 24983 in the present embodiment is in the direction of gravity from the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that protrudes to one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). Therefore, when displacing (rotating) from the first position to the second position, the displacing member 24983 can be quickly displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position.

  Therefore, even when the game ball rebounds from the distribution member 24983 due to the game ball having a speed component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 179 (b)) and the distribution member 24983 coming into contact, the game ball is distributed together with the game ball. The member 24983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and a game ball can be sent to the opening U7.

  Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounces back) from the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is arranged at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 24983 is in contact with the game ball, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball, so that the game ball is prevented from being sent to the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

  Further, in the state in which the sorting member 24983 is disposed at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the sorting member 24983 is applied. In the case where an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)), the direction (distribution member) connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983. The angle formed between the direction of the rotation of 24983 and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 (the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and the inertial force in the rear side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the arrow F2 direction in FIG. 179 (b)) acts on the sorting member 24983. The displacement of the minute member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the distribution member 24983 in this embodiment was provided with the action part 24983a in which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be disposed on the action portion 24983a of the sorting member 24983.

  That is, in the sorting member 24983 in this embodiment, the protrusion 24983a1 is integrally formed with the action portion 24983a disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. The weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to protrude from the lower surface of the action part 24983a, or may be embedded inside the action part 24983a, like the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment.

  By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

  When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to prevent the concave portion 24982b3 from being disposed in the front contact portion 36982b1, and to reduce the product cost. Moreover, since it can suppress that a weight member protrudes from the lower surface of the action part 24983a, damage to the distribution member 24983 at the time of an assembly can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 24983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a winning opening unit 37930 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the receiving surface for receiving the game ball of the sorting member 37983 is formed as a curved surface 37983h projecting toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  180 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 37930 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 180 (a), the distribution member 37983 is in the first position. FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the sorting member 37983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 37930 according to the thirty-sixth embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 37983 is located on the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front / rear direction (FIG. 180 (a) left / right direction). An axial center position is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b of the sorting member 37983 are formed to be curved in an arc shape projecting toward the axis of the shaft member 988a.

  Further, the action portion 37983a of the sorting member 37983 is formed to project to the intermediate plate 37983b (upper side of FIG. 180 (a)) as it proceeds to the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 180 (a)), and the upper surface of the action portion 37983a. And both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b form a uniform curved surface 37983h.

  Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 37983 is disposed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) with respect to the center position of the opening U10 in the front / rear direction (FIG. 180 (a) left / right direction).

  Further, as described above, the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is sent to the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) and passes through the first winning port 64. The ball is sent to the sorting unit 37980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 37980 has a velocity component to the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (b), in a state where the sorting member 37983 is disposed at the second position, a game ball and a sorting member 37983 having a speed component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 180 (b)) , The game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the game ball maintains the speed component to the rear side or the speed component is increased to the opening U6. The ball is sent. That is, the force component that displaces (rotates) the sorting member 37983 among the forces acting on the sorting member 37983 when the game ball abuts can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), in the state where the distribution member 37983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution having the speed component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 180 (b)). When the member 37983 comes into contact, the sorting member 37983 is disposed at the first position in a state where a speed component is applied to the rear side. Therefore, the action portion 37983a on the opening U6 side (the right side in FIG. 180 (b)) of the sorting member 37983 abuts on the back side contact portion 37982b2 at a high speed, and the action portion 37983a (the sorting member 37983) may be damaged. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, and therefore, among the forces acting on the distribution member 37983 when the game ball abuts, Since the force component for displacing (rotating) the distribution member 37983 can be reduced, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 37983 from the second position to the first position can be delayed, so that the action portion 37983a (distribution member) 37983) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), in a state where the sorting member 37983 is disposed at the first position, a game ball and a sorting member having a speed component to the rear side (right side of FIG. 180 (b)). When 37983 abuts, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the game ball has a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). The velocity component is converted into a velocity component and is sent to the opening U7.

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 37980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 37983 is disposed at a position where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the pitching path from the distribution member 37983 to the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ), The difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fifth passage may be formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, among the distribution of the distribution member 37983 in two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed fast. . In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161). It can enhance interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a winning opening unit 38930 in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 38983 and the upper surface of the action portions 38983a3 and 38983a4 is formed differently. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 181 is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 38930 according to the thirty-seventh embodiment, corresponding to the section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 181 (a), the distribution member 38983 is in the first position. FIG. 181 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 38983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 38930 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 38983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front / rear direction (FIG. 181 (a) left / right direction). Are arranged.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is sent to the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) and passes through the first winning port 64. The ball is sent to the sorting unit 38980. Accordingly, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 38980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the direction in which the sorting member 24983 is biased with respect to the first receiving portion 19941g and the first winning opening 64 and the speed component to the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

  Further, the action portion 38983a3 disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed from the shaft member 988a side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)), which is a connection portion with the contact portion 19983d, toward the tip. In the eighteenth embodiment, the thickness is smaller than the tip of the action part 19983a.

  Therefore, the angle θ8 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 38983 and the upper surface of the action portion 38983a3 disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. The intermediate plate 19983b is formed to have a larger angle than the angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a disposed on the opening U7 side (see FIG. 161).

  Further, the action portion 38983a4 disposed on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed from the shaft member 988a side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)), which is a connecting portion with the contact portion 19983d, toward the tip. It is formed in a certain thickness dimension.

  Therefore, the angle θ9 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the action portion 38983a4 disposed on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. The angle between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a disposed on the opening U6 side is formed (see FIG. 161).

  Accordingly, the tip of the action portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the action portion 19983a (see FIG. 161).

  Accordingly, the distribution member 38983 is formed in an asymmetric shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and is disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) and the action portion 38983a3 and the opening U6 side (FIG. 181 (a)). The center of gravity of the sorting member 38983 in the direction connecting the action portion 38983a4 disposed on the right side (the direction orthogonal to the standing direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is closer to the opening U6 than the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 181 (a)). Located on the right).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the sorting member 38983 is disposed at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). When inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 181 (a)) acts on the dividing member 38983, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distributing member 38983 The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the sorting member 38983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 38983 (the direction of the arrow F1 in FIG. 181 (a)) is the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the sorting member 25983 can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 181 (a)) acts on the sorting member 38983, The displacement of the minute member 38983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), in a state where the distribution member 38983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution having the velocity component toward the rear side (right side of FIG. 181 (b)). When the member 38983 comes into contact, the sorting member 38983 is disposed at the first position in a state where a speed component toward the rear side is applied. Therefore, the action part 38983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)) of the sorting member 38983 abuts on the back side contact part 38982b2 at a high speed, and there is a possibility that the action part 38983a4 (sorting member 38983) may be damaged. is there.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball is an angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 38983 and the upper surface of the action portion 38983a4 disposed on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)). θ9 is formed smaller than the angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a disposed on the opening U6 side (see FIG. 161). Since the tip of the action part 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the action part 19983a (see FIG. 161), the action part 38983a4 (distribution member 38983) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Here, since the tip of the action portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the action portion 19983a (see FIG. 161), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 38983 from the first position to the second position is slow. Become.

  Therefore, when a game ball having a speed component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)) collides with the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the game ball bounces back ( In a separated state, the sorting member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separating), and rebounds with the distribution member 38983 disposed at the second position. The game balls that are (separated) fall and come into contact with the sorting member 38983, so that the game balls may be sent to the opening U6 opposite to the direction in which the game balls are originally sorted.

  On the other hand, the angle θ8 formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the sorting member 38983 in this embodiment and the upper surface of the action portion 38983a3 disposed on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the 18th embodiment. In the embodiment, since the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 and the upper surface of the action portion 19983a disposed on the opening U7 side is formed (see FIG. 161), the distribution member 38983 is a game. More velocity component toward the opening U7 can be given to the sphere than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  That is, the distribution member 38983 can give a lot of velocity components in the same direction as the rotation direction of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 to the game ball. In other words, the distribution member 38983 can reduce the application of the velocity component in the direction away from the rotation region of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 to the game ball.

  Accordingly, even when the game ball rebounds from the distribution member 38983 due to the game ball having a speed component toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 179 (b)) and the distribution member 38983 coming into contact, the game ball is distributed together with the game ball. The member 38983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and a game ball can be sent to the opening U7.

  Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounces back) from the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is disposed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 38983 comes into contact with the game ball, and the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball, thereby preventing the game ball from being sent to the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

  Further, since the game ball is given more velocity component toward the opening U7 than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment, the sorting member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. In this case, the sorting member 38983 can send the game ball to the opening U7 in a shorter time compared to the time to send the ball to the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 38980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the distribution member 38983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls is different depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the pitching path from the allocation member 38983 to the detection device SE5 and the pitching path to the detection device SE6 Even when the lengths of the game balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 38980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the detection device SE6 is detected is reduced (see FIG. 161). ), It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired, and to ensure the degree of freedom of design.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, a winning opening unit 39930 in the thirty-eighth embodiment is described. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c of the bulging portion 39882 formed on the first side base 39981 of the distribution unit 39980 is the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). It is formed to protrude. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 39930 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 182 (a), the distribution member 39983 is in the first position. FIG. 182 (b) illustrates a state in which the sorting member 39983 is disposed at the second position.

  In the winning opening unit 39930 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 39983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) of the center position of the opening U10 in the front / rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left / right direction). Are arranged.

  Further, the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) and the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) of the distribution member 39983 are formed asymmetric with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. The action part 39983a3 on the opening U7 side is formed longer than the action part 39983a4 on the opening U6 side.

  Therefore, when the shaft center of the shaft member 988a of the sorting member 39883 is disposed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left-right direction). Also, the action portion 39983a3 of the sorting member 39983 disposed in the first position is disposed in the game ball passing region, and the game ball and the action portion 39983a3 of the sorting member 39983 can contact each other. Thereby, the distribution member 39983 can be displaced from the first position to the second position.

  In addition, the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c is curved and formed in a shape protruding toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 is the first. The first curved wall 19982c1 in the eighteenth embodiment (see FIG. 161) is formed with an overhanging portion 39982c3 that projects to the opening U10.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball that flows into the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is sent to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) and passes through the first winning port 64. The ball is sent to the distribution unit 39980. Accordingly, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 39980 has a velocity component toward the rear side.

  Therefore, the game ball having the velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) and being sent to the sorting unit 39980 slides or rolls on the first curved wall 39982c1, and hits the overhanging portion 39982c3. By making contact, the ball is sent to the sorting member 39983 with a velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). Further, when gravity acts on the game ball, the ball is sent to the sorting member 39983 with a velocity component toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

  That is, the game ball swings with a velocity component in the same direction as the rotational displacement of the action portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) of the sorting member 39883 having the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis. The ball is sent to the minute member 39983.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in the state where the sorting member 39983 is disposed at the first position, the game ball having the velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) is the sorting member. When the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position in contact with 39983, compared to the case where the game ball has a backward speed component (right side in FIG. 182 (a)). Thus, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 39983 can be accelerated.

  Further, since the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) of the sorting member 39983 is formed longer than the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)), the sorting member 39983 is formed. Is located closer to the action part 39883a3 (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) than the intermediate plate 19983b.

  Therefore, when the sorting member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the sorting member 39983 is displaced (rotated) against its own weight, and therefore the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, since the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) using its own weight, the displacement (rotation) can be accelerated. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (b), in a state where the distribution member 39983 is disposed at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 39983 having a velocity component toward the player side (left side of FIG. 182 (b)). And the distribution member 39883 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player side and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983 are Since it is formed in the opposite direction, the displacement (rotation) of the sorting member 39983 can be slowed.

  Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 39980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 39980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. While being able to suppress, the freedom degree of design is securable.

  Further, in the state in which the sorting member 39983 is disposed at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the sorting member 39983 is applied. In the case where an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)), the direction (distribution member) connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 39983 The angle formed between the direction of rotation of 39983 and the direction of inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 (the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). Thereby, the rotational direction component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 can be reduced.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the sorting member 39983 in the direction of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (the arrow F2 direction in FIG. 182 (b)), The displacement of the minute member 39983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in the state where the distribution member 39983 is disposed at the first position, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983 Are formed in substantially the same direction, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being separated (bounced back) from the distribution member 39983 by the collision between the game ball and the distribution member 39983.

  Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounces back) from the distribution member 39983, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is arranged at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 39983 abuts and the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from being sent to the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

  In the distribution member 39983 in this embodiment, the action part 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) and the action part 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) are asymmetric with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the action portions 39983a3 and 39983a4 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

  In this case, the structure of the distribution member 39983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, a winning opening unit 40930 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection device SE6 is disposed between the passage TR10 and the passage TR9 has been described (see FIG. 161). In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the detection device SE6 is disposed in the passage TR3. Established. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 183 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 40930 in the thirty-ninth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a), in which the sorting member 19983 is disposed at the first position. Illustrated.

  In the winning opening unit 40930 in the thirty-ninth embodiment, since the detection device SE6 is disposed in the passage TR3, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection.

  Thereby, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. While being able to suppress, the freedom degree of design is securable.

  In addition, since the front base 40943 of the front unit 40940 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

  Here, in the winning opening unit 19930 in the eighteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 is disposed on the side opposite to the player of the detection device SE6, so that the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 is on the front side. (Left side in FIG. 183 (b)) and then it is necessary to fold back toward the rear side (left side in FIG. 183 (b)), and the wiring (not shown) of the detection device SE6 becomes longer.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), the assembly of the winning prize opening unit 40930 is simplified. Product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), that is, at a position far from the player, the detection device SE6 is illegally arranged. It can suppress being operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the winning a prize opening unit 41930 in the 40th embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the solenoid 610 is disposed on the side opposite to the player in the passage TR10 has been described (see FIG. 161). However, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the solenoid 610 is on one side in the gravity direction of the passage TR10. (Lower side in the direction of gravity). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or rear side). Further, the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the left and right direction.

  FIG. 184 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 41930 according to the 40th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). FIG. 185 (a) is a side view of the prize opening unit 41930, and FIG. 185 (b) is a rear view of the prize opening unit 41930. In FIG. 185, only the wing member 945 disposed in the front unit 19940, the solenoid 610 disposed in the passage unit 41990, the transmission member 41965, and the displacement member 41966 are illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the solenoid 610 is on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the passage TR10, and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is along the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 184). Arranged. Therefore, the displacement direction of the projection 945b accompanying the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be matched with the displacement direction of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

  Here, the displacement member 19966 in the eighteenth embodiment needs to be rotationally displaced (see FIG. 160) with the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as the rotation axis in order to perform the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945. That is, it is necessary to convert the linear displacement of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 into a rotational displacement.

  On the other hand, the displacement member 41966 in the present embodiment can perform the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 by causing the displacement in the linear direction in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 184). That is, the displacement direction of the annular portion 961c and the displacement member 41966 can be matched without changing the linear displacement of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, thereby simplifying the configuration of the displacement member 41966 and reducing the product cost. it can.

  Moreover, the dimension in the front-back direction (FIG. 184 left-right direction) of the winning opening unit 41930 can be reduced, and the winning opening unit 41930 can be reduced in size.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be configured to be opposed to the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or the rotational axis direction (the driven member 163 is displaced). In a direction intersecting with the plane to be driven) may be arranged to face the driven member 163. In this case, a frictional force can be generated between the driven member 163 and the driven member 163 can be decelerated by the frictional force.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at least one of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 is configured to be displaceable in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is displaced at a timing when the driven member 163 is to be decelerated. It may be configured to be opposed to the driven member 163 in the direction, and to be retracted outside the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other timings. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

  In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 has been described. However, the arrangement is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven member 163 may be disposed at an overlapping position in the displacement direction view, and the upper restricting portion 176 may be disposed closer to the rotating shaft side of the driven member 163 than the lower restricting portion 175. Also good.

  In addition, the lower restriction portion 175 and the upper restriction portion 176 are not limited to the case where the lower restriction portion 175 and the upper restriction portion 176 are disposed on the left and right sides of the rotation shaft of the driven member 163. May be arranged on the right side.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 applies an electromagnetic force in the direction in which the driven member 163 is pulled up has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 so as to generate an electromagnetic force to be pushed up. Further, the driven member 163 may be driven using a rotary motor instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting unit 181 is configured by an LED has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a miniature light bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the case where vibration transmission to the electric decoration board 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electric decoration board 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, instead of filling the gap, a highly-attenuating resin member may be filled in a region between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electric decoration board 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the arrangement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180.

  Conversely, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electric decoration board 180 may be reduced, and filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since the vibration transmission to the electric decoration board 180 at the time of driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 can be promoted, it is possible to produce an effect of shaking the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 in accordance with the vibration of the electric decoration board 180. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is configured by one large opening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of through holes may be configured, such as punching metal.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is configured in a thin plate shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an opening may be partially formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in the front view, it is possible to avoid visually recognizing the plate portion of the electrical decoration substrate 180 while exposing the light emitting means 181 in the front view. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the lifting plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or by a cam mechanism.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or may have a rotational angle width only in one of the vertical direction with respect to the horizontal.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole portion 406 is a long hole long in the horizontal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a long hole that is inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, may be a curved long hole, or may be a long hole having a portion extending in the vertical direction. Thereby, the design freedom of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of wing-like members 460 are in contact with each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a slight gap may be provided from the design stage. Thereby, compared with the case where the wing members 460 are in contact with each other, the fatigue accumulated by the contact with the wing members 460 can be eliminated, so that the durability of the wing members 460 can be improved. In addition, you may comprise so that a player can visually recognize the pattern formed in the back side of a clearance gap, and the light irradiated from a light emission means through this clearance gap.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of wing members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the amount of displacement and the displacement speed of the pair of wing members 460 may be different by adjusting the gear ratio by varying the size of the arcuate gear 462 of the wing member 460. Thereby, even if it is a case where the shape of the side contact | abutted by a pair of wing member 460 is left-right symmetric, contact surface S1 can be shifted from the left-right center position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the wing-like member 460 at the time of contact is visually recognized in a bilaterally symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, most parts may be configured to be partially different while being bilaterally symmetric. For example, a part of the shape may be left-right asymmetric, a pattern drawn on the front side may be left-right asymmetric, or the color may be left-right asymmetric. Even in this case, since most of the shape of the wing member 460 is bilaterally symmetric, it is possible to make the player think that the wing member 460 forms a bilaterally symmetric shape.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the wing-like members 460 that are in contact with each other are rotationally displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the pair of wing-like members 460 may be configured to translate and contact in the left-right direction. In this case, the left wing member 460 can be formed in a larger area than the right wing member 460 in comparison with the shape of the back case 310.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the wing-like members 460 supported and displaced by the raising / lowering board 430 comprised a series of shapes, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the wing-shaped member 460 and an invariant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape in front view. Thereby, since the player can visually recognize the shape completed only by the wing member 460 and the shape completed by the other predetermined member and the wing member 460, the effect of the wing member 460 is improved. Can do.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the concept of “shells and pearls” is recalled by the light emitting effect member LA1, the wing member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole that has been driven into the wall, and the wing member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured to represent a bullet force. In this case, it can be realized by diverting the shape of the wing member 460 and configuring the light emitting effect member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 with different members having different decorations or shapes. That is, a part of the members can be diverted to form another operation unit, so that the development cost can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slid in the linear direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be configured to be pivotally supported by arrangement and the lifting plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable by an arc track centering on this axis.

  Further, in the case where the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported by the fixed arrangement, the elevating plate 430 may still be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the displacement in the left-right direction of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed on the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing an urging means or an electromagnetic solenoid for urging the relative displacement member 442 toward the left and right arcuate gear portion 444b, the meshing between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

  The arcuate gear portion 444b may be made of a flexible resin material used for a gear belt or the like instead of being made of a highly rigid resin material. In this case, the deformation in the left and right direction of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the deformation of the material.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 at the center portion of the game board 13 is configured in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the inner shape of the center frame 86 may be an asymmetric shape corresponding to the size relationship of the wing member 460. Thereby, the function which hides the back side by shielding and the function which improves the freedom degree of the shape of a game area | region can be provided with respect to the game board 13. FIG.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the electrical decoration board | substrate 777 was arrange | positioned at the back side of the light transmissive hole 60c, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the electric decoration board 777 may be disposed inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, since the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow surface constituting member 91 can be brought close to each other, by forming the outer portion 94 thin, the outer portion 94 vibrates corresponding to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to execute an effect that causes (wags).

  In other words, the portion that is displaced by driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operation unit 700 to be visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 but also outside the window portion. be able to.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the recessed part of the base board 60 arrange | positioned at the front side of the electrical decoration board | substrate 777 was arrange | positioned in the left-right downward of a game area | region, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of the game ball, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, may be arranged below the outer rail 62, or is arranged inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed from a resin material (high-rigidity resin material) with little bending is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubbery resin material. In this case, the partition member 708 can be brought into close contact with the electric decoration substrate 705 and the thin film cover member 712 by elastic deformation of the partition member 708, and light leakage can be prevented.

  In the first embodiment, the distance between the reference O1 and the position where the left and right load members 761 contact the plate-like displacement member 730 is the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the position where the load member 761 contacts the plate-like displacement member 730 and the reference O1 may be different on the left and right, and the arrangement of the load member 761 relative to the reference O1 may be different on the left and right.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the load member 761 may be configured to have a positional relationship in which the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 come into contact with each other when the load member 761 is displaced to the front side. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced to the front side by the load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730, the arrangement of the load member 761 can be returned to the back side by the load applied from the front lid member 770.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right drive units 760 are substantially symmetrical has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if the density of the vertical rod-like extending portions 761c of the left and right load members 761 is changed (locally), the thickness is changed, or the material is changed, the ease of bending of the load member 761 is changed. good. Thus, when the left and right drive units 760 are in a single-side excitation state, the posture in which the plate-like displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven. That is, the posture in which the plate-like displacement member 730 can be stopped can be increased.

  Even if the left and right drive units 760 are left substantially symmetrical, the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 is asymmetrical (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side). A similar effect can be obtained by providing an extra thickness on the lower bottom side of the plate).

  Although the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the plate-like displacement member 730 may be configured to be displaced up and down while maintaining the posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change in posture. Thus, even when the plate-like displacement member 730 does not change in posture, it is possible to configure a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is easily bent and a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is difficult to bend.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the overhang portion 761d is configured integrally with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c are configured such that the overhanging portion 761d can be assembled to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c in an assembling manner such as fastening, engagement, fitting, fitting, and sandwiching. And may be configured separately. In this case, even when the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c is diverted and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced. Therefore, when the entire load member 761 is replaced. In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are displaced in the rotation axis direction of the plate-like displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at a position overlapping with the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  In this case, the direction of the change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-like displacement member 730. The change in the interval between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be used not for the change in the attitude of the hollow member 740 but for the change in the holding force of the hollow member 740.

  That is, when the inclination angle of the plate-like displacement member 730 is increased, the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed. It can be used for pinching. Therefore, the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed with the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  In this case, the clearance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 and the clearance between the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be equally configured. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear projecting columnar portions 743 similarly increases, the attitude of the hollow member 740 is compared with the case where the larger clearance side is allowed to rotate about the smaller clearance side as an axis. The change can be easily suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portions 735 that support the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are separately disposed on the plate-like displacement member 730 before and after the reference O1 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

  Although the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the plate-like displacement member 730 may be configured to slide and move in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long long groove in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction. In this case, by providing the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b on the opposite side with respect to the sliding direction, along with the sliding displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is pivotally supported by the left-right direction axis is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the plate-like displacement member 730 may be supported in a manner that can rotate even in the front-rear direction axis (for example, a support manner at a ball joint).

  Further, the plate main body (long plate configured in the left-right direction) of the plate-like displacement member 730 may be supported on the upper side of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-like displacement member 730 so as to be on a separate body. In this case, in accordance with the drive mode of the drive unit 760, a combined displacement of the rotation of the left-right axis and the rotation of the front-rear axis can be caused in the plate body of the plate-like displacement member 730.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the vertical direction displacement of the to-be-supported part 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be accept | permitted by comprising a shaft support part in the shape of a long hole long up and down. In this case, not only the rotational movement of the plate-like displacement member 730 but also the posture change of the plate-like displacement member 730 caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right pivotally supported portions 731 as compared to the other (centering on the front-rear axis) Therefore, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 accompanying the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a core member extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to pass through the load member 761 so that the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes with the displacement of the load member 761. (It may be configured so that the core is removed). In this case, since the rigidity change of the load member 761 occurs based on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent along with the rigidity change.

  In the second embodiment, the case where one of the portions that decelerate the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, both of the parts that decelerate the driven member 163 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the parts to be decelerated (the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176) may be formed of the same member.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the biasing spring SP21 does not directly hit the driven member 163 but gives the biasing force via the abutting member 2190 is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the urging spring SP21 may be configured to directly contact the driven member 163.

  In this case, the arrangement (contact location) of the biasing spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a plurality of contact points between the urging spring SP21 (s) and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points are provided on the rotating shaft side and the rotating tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. It may be configured separately.

  In the third embodiment, by extending the shape of the long hole portion 3406 in the displacement direction of the lifting plate 430, a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even when the lifting plate 430 is being displaced is configured. The case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the section has been described has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a section in which a sliding portion (an angular region where the gear teeth are not meshed) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotating gear 441, and the rotating gear 441 does not rotate even when the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. By configuring the drive force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be cut off.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 relative to the lifting plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation gear 3441 with an arm is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed on the entire circumference, but is configured so that a protruding portion is partially formed and can function as a cam, and the protruding portion applies a load to the relative displacement member 442. Thus, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be displaced. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 relative to the lifting plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhanging portion of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 and the relative displacement member 442.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured to detect the thin overhang portion 4761g that is a part of the load member 4761 and easily breaks has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise so that the thick overhang | projection part 4761f may be detected.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjustment member 5782 projects upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the adjustment member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

  Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the inside of the load member 761, and the adjustment member 5782 may enter the opening to function as a core. In this case, the ease of bending of the load member 761 can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjustment member 5782.

  Although the case where the load member 761 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 has been described in the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive device that drives the load member 761 may be configured by a motor such as a DC motor. Thus, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to the instantaneous drive mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the back has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape when viewed from the back. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape when viewed from the rear surface or the sliding groove 966a2 is curved, the protrusion 945b slides along the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion The gap with 945b changes. Accordingly, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b is increased, the projection 945b is easily moved by the gap, and the wing member 945 is easily rattled.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the back, and the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly on the displacement member 966, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 The gap with the projection 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the thickness of the displacement member 966 can be improved by suppressing the amount of lightening due to the recess of the sliding groove 966a2.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the screw that is screwed into the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used for fastening and fixing the specific prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape has been described, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, an annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955 is increased.

  In this case, in order to secure a crossroad from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed by using a tool such as a drill, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the outer periphery of the annular protrusion 953c. It is possible to easily damage (disconnect) the wiring HS3 by shifting (sliding) in the lateral direction (direction separating from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c radially outward) on the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited thereto. You may attach the sticker by which the information which consists of a character or a figure is displayed on the side.

  In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front side) side of the pitching path TR0, the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning slot unit 930) is displayed. ), The player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 using the display as a mark (reference position) even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized. Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a seal, and printing with ink or two-color formation may be used.

  In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a larger displacement than the first member 11967. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, the displacement amount of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is in a state of protruding from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in a closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be pulled into the inside of the main body portion.

  In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are inserted into the rolling passages of the game balls that the rolling portions 943a and the second ball feeding portions 942c roll by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The unauthorized object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a. The case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the annular spring 961c is separated from the main body 961a by disposing a stretched spring between the main body 961a and the annular ring 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying power to the main body 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

  In this case, similarly to the above, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Prevents crackling with solenoid. Use of cushion>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, drive means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to generate a driving force for driving the displacement means to the predetermined direction side, and Resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance to displacement in the predetermined direction side, and the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce a load applied from the displacement means to the driving means. Game machine A1.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured to displace a displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, JP-A-2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the location where the load from the displacement member is received is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid is subjected to an excessive load. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the resistance means generates resistance against displacement of the displacement means toward the predetermined direction (drive means side), and is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Therefore, it can be avoided that the driving means receives an excessive load. Thereby, durability of a gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect which reduces the load given to a drive means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be dispersed by increasing the number of locations that receive the load, or the load may be suppressed, or the load may be transmitted by configuring the resistance means to provide a gap between the displacement means and the drive means. Alternatively, the surface of the resistance means acting on the displacement means may be enlarged to reduce the load per unit area.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a supporting means for supporting the displacement means, and the driving means is disposed closer to the supporting means than the resistance means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the load applied to the resistance means is reduced by keeping the arm length between the support means and the driving means short (the arm length of the moment of force). It is possible to avoid becoming excessive.

  In the gaming machine A2, the support means supports the displacement means so as to be rotatable about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to avoid that the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means is reversed in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left-right direction), Since the side where the rubbing of the portion covering the rotating shaft occurs can be limited to one side (a slight displacement to the left and right is avoided), the portion that needs to be formed thick can be limited.

  The gaming machine A3 includes first resistance means that generates a load with respect to displacement in the predetermined direction side, and second resistance means that generates a load with respect to displacement in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction side, the first resistance means And the second resistance means include misalignment portions arranged at different positions in the predetermined direction view, and the first resistance means is arranged away from the predetermined axis as compared with the second resistance means. A gaming machine A4 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the first resistance means to the displacement means. In other words, by increasing the arm length of the moment of force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means, the magnitude of the load can be reduced.

  Further, by dividing the location where the load is generated between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the location where the load is generated between the second resistance means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the concentration of the load. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the displacement means includes a transmission part for transmitting a driving force to the predetermined displacement means, and an attachment part extending radially outward of the transmission part, and the first resistance The game machine A5 is characterized in that the means is disposed so as to be able to contact the attachment portion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, it is possible to transmit the driving force to the displacing means even if the accessory is damaged. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

  In addition, the aspect of a transmission part is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, it may be configured at a position close to the driving means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction of the side on which the driving means is disposed with reference to the shaft member disposed along a predetermined axis. But it ’s okay.

  Moreover, the aspect of the axial direction reverse side by which the drive means is arrange | positioned on the basis of an axial member is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, the driving means and the transmission unit may be configured at positions opposite to the front and back with respect to a plane orthogonal to the predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmission portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is provided with load applying means for applying a load in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

  In the gaming machine A6, the load applying means is disposed on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to avoid an imbalance in the posture of the load applying means and the resulting load due to the influence of the driving force.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the resistance means is configured to be capable of applying a reaction force in contact with the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to generate a frictional force on the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement means is configured to receive an external force, and a contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged in parallel to at least one direction component of the external force. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (anomalous double rack)>
A base means, an intermediate means supported by the base means so as to be slidable, a tip side means supported by the intermediate means so as to be displaceable, and supported by the intermediate means, the intermediate means being in relation to the base means And a displacement component configured to be capable of displacing the tip side means with respect to the intermediate means in accordance with the displacement of the intermediate means. The base means can be displaced in a manner not corresponding to the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B1 that is configured as follows.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which a pinion is sandwiched between a plurality of racks (see, for example, JP-A-2006-153095). According to this structure, the rack is displaced in the reverse direction as the pinion rotates, so that the displacement speed of the other rack with respect to one rack can be increased, and a high-speed displacement effect body can be configured. Is possible.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effector may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the basic means is configured to be displaceable, the basic means is displaced by the distal side means or the intermediate means by displacing the basic means in accordance with the displacement of the distal side means or the intermediate means. Can be hidden. Thereby, it is not necessary to prepare a shielding member separately, and the degree of freedom in designing the tip side means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the basic means is configured to be rotatable, the gaming machine B2.

  Here, when both members sandwiching the pinion (base means and tip side means) are racks that are displaced in parallel, when the pinion and the rack are arranged on the same plane, in order to avoid interference between the members, Since the pinion cannot be placed at a position overlapping the rack when viewed in the displacement direction, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that.

  In addition, since it is necessary to arrange support portions at a plurality of points for maintaining the rack posture and optimizing the engagement with the pinion, there is a risk of complicating the member structure and increasing the number of assembly steps. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and the simplification of the structure.

  At the retracted position, the overhanging portion on the base means side and the back portion of the tip side means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the foundation means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the foundation means and the displacement constituting means can be arranged at a position overlapping the intermediate means in the slide displacement direction view, thus saving space. In addition, the basic means can be simply provided with a structure for pivotally supporting it, so that the structure can be simplified.

  Moreover, since the overhang | projection part by the side of a base means can be arrange | positioned in the back | inner side using a curve, the shielding width | variety in a retracted position can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine B2, a part of the basic means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the basic means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating the other part around a fulcrum. The game machine B3 is characterized in that the other part is configured to be displaceable in a direction crossing the slide displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, both the basic means and the displacement constituting means are supported by the intermediate means. Load transmission can be stabilized.

  In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in the direction intersecting the sliding displacement direction, the displacement of the foundation means can be balanced by the displacement of a part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the whole foundation means can be set up (Both left and right) can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, in a state in which the tip side means is disposed at one end (overhang side) end position of the displacement range, the base means is from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement. A gaming machine B4 characterized by receiving a load for maintaining the posture.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the load necessary for the slide displacement is reduced as compared with the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. Can do. Furthermore, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip-side means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the basic means is maintained in a state where the tip-side means is placed at the one-side end position.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in a state where the tip side means is disposed at the other end (retraction side) end position of the displacement range, the base means is configured such that a load applied from the intermediate means is A gaming machine B5 characterized by taking a posture facing a displaceable direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the starting of the basic means, the intermediate means, and the displaceable means can be made smooth.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, in a state in which the tip side means is disposed at the other end (retraction side) end position of the displacement range, the base means protrudes to the retreat position side from the intermediate means. A gaming machine B6 comprising an exit.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B5, by adopting a configuration in which the overhanging portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (retraction side) end position that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the intermediate means The upper and lower dimensions of the base means can be concealed by the intermediate means at the end position on one side (the overhang side) while keeping the dimension below the dimension of the basic means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a part of the foundation means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means is guided by the foundation means. Is connected to the gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, it is possible to easily secure the passage route of the electrical wiring and the electrical wiring by utilizing the fact that the displacement on the partial side of the basic means is suppressed. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the head.

  In the gaming machine B7, the tip side means is configured to be slidable, and the electrical wiring is arranged outside the tip side means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the load applied to the electrical wiring is reduced compared to the case where the electrical wiring is connected to the tip side means that is displaced by the slide displacement that easily applies the load to the electrical wiring. Can be suppressed.

  Thereby, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) generated in the operation of the tip side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. For example, the driving means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the basic means and the driving means for driving the tip side means with reference to the intermediate means can be configured separately while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the displacement component means is configured to be able to displace the tip side means relative to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the tip side means can be stably displaced at high speed (higher speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are configured asymmetrically left and right>
A plurality of displacing means configured to be displaceable between a first relative position and a second relative position disposed away from the first relative position, wherein the plurality of displacing means includes the first relative position; Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be viewed in a series of predetermined shapes, and the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that forms a series of shapes by arranging a plurality of operation parts having substantially the same shape in proximity (for example, see JP-A-2006-153095). According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily configure a large effect body by combining small operation parts, the structure of the operation part itself is substantially the same, so the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced. it can.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the shape of the motion part is configured to be substantially the same, the space necessary for realizing the displacement of each motion part is common to each motion part, and therefore, it is limited. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom of design so that the space can be used.

  For example, when the operation unit is displaced on the right side of a display device exemplified by a liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the player closer to the display device has higher attention from the player. Nevertheless, since the space required for the displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, the amount of displacement on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem that it was limited by the allowable amount.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means that are visually recognized in a series of shapes are configured with different sizes, the displacement amount of the first displacement means and the second displacement means Even when are the same, the space necessary for realizing the displacement can be made different, so that the limited space can be used satisfactorily and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, an outer shape of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is set in accordance with an arrangement possible region at the second relative position.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are visually recognized at the first relative position regardless of the size of the arrangementable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

  In addition, as in the case where the game board is formed of a light-transmitting resin, it is possible to improve the decoration when the decoration of the region at the second relative position is substituted with the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 includes guide means disposed on the back side of the plurality of displacement means to guide the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is a predetermined direction view. A gaming machine C3 configured to be displaced.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to avoid the guide means being visually recognized from the gaps between the plurality of displacement means. Thereby, it can comprise so that a clearance gap may be utilized effectively instead, such as making a decorative part other than a guide means visually recognized from a clearance gap.

  In the gaming machine C3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and a position between the plurality of displacement means passes through the center of the guide means from a reference line along the predetermined direction as viewed in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4, which is arranged at a shifted position.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, in consideration of the load balance and the like, the part that the player expects that the guiding means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged (reference) It is possible to avoid a decrease in designability by concealing (corresponding to a line) with a plurality of displacement means so that it is difficult for the player to see.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, the first displacement unit is disposed at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving unit, and the second displacement unit is A gaming machine C5, which is disposed downstream of the predetermined position in the driving force transmission path.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, by configuring the member to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, locally in the driving force transmission path It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

  In the gaming machine C5, the driving means and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force are disposed in the upper left part of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are disposed in the upper left part. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that one displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means disposed at a position different from the upper left portion.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the driving means disposed in the upper left portion, which is easy to ensure a larger area as the internal area of the rear case than the upper right section, from the arrangement of the payout device, and Similarly, since the transmission means can be easily concealed by the first displacement means disposed at the upper left, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive means and the transmission means. Thereby, it is not necessary to configure another cover for hiding the driving means and the transmission means.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first displacing means is configured so that gravity acts in a tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to approach the second displacing means by tilting displacement. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the dimension is set so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can come into contact with each other, but the clearance ( If the gap does not come into contact due to misalignment within the gear teeth, the gap between the guide rail and the guided portion, etc., and the gap is generated, the gap is easily filled by the tilting displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid maintaining a state where a gap is generated between the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The designability in the case of forming the shape can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C5 to C7, an electrical wiring passes through the second displacing means side between the first displacing means and the second displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are excessively passed by passing the electrical wiring to the second displacement means side where overdisplacement is unlikely to occur. When the displacement occurs, the load generated on the electric wiring can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the predetermined shape is a symmetric shape, and the split surface constituting part that forms the split surface that divides the first displacement means and the second displacement means is the center of the game area A gaming machine C9, which is arranged on a side far from the position.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the asymmetrical split surface is arranged on the side far from the view (the side that is difficult to see from the player), so that the first displacement means And it can avoid that the appearance of a 2nd displacement means falls.

  It should be noted that the appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape on the opposite side the center position side of the game area (the side closer to the field of view, the side where the player can easily see) symmetrical.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the plurality of displacing means are arranged so that a side of the second relative position where the size of the dispositionable area is limited is opposed to the first relative position. Machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means having an asymmetric shape in a symmetric series at the first relative position. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement in which a displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is a downward displacement, and the first displacement. The gaming machine C11 is configured with different second displacements, and is configured such that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the excitement of the player can be improved by complicating the displacement modes of the plurality of displacement means.

  In addition, when the upper inner surface of the back case is vertically displaced due to the shape of the payout device, the displacement of the plurality of displacement means does not affect the vertical displacement of the back case (corresponding to a predetermined section). Since the second displacement is started after being lowered, the region where the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is allowed can be formed evenly without being affected by the vertical position shift of the upper inner surface of the back case. Even when the displacement means has the same displacement mode, it can be easily avoided that the plurality of displacement means collide with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement by arrangement>
A first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a plurality of second displacing means supported to be displaceable by the first displacing means, wherein the first displacing means supports one second displacing means. And a second support portion that supports the other second displacement means, and the first support portion is supported by the first support portion when a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. A displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means generated in the two displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion when a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. The gaming machine D1 is configured to have a different displacement mode with respect to the game machine D1.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that the second displacement means (353) is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, whether the second displacement means that is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced is supported by the first support portion or the second support portion. Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement unit can be made different, the displacement mode between the first displacement unit and the second displacement unit can be complicated, and the effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gap between the one second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured such that the first support portion side has a larger displacement amount than the second support portion side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the first support means can be configured to eliminate the gap between the first support portions due to the displacement of the first displacement means, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the first displacement means is supported at one side in a predetermined direction, and the one side can be displaced. And the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means, and the second displacement means is configured to A gaming machine D3 comprising one side second displacement means arranged on one side and another side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where the load applying means applies the load on the first displacement means. It can be made different depending on whether it is arranged on the other side.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the game machine includes load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the load applying means are arranged at a plurality of positions, and each of the first displacements independently. A gaming machine D4 configured to be able to apply a load to the means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is possible to eliminate the need for auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first displacement unit includes a load applying unit configured to be able to apply a load, and includes a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface, and the load applying unit is provided at least on the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that a part thereof is shielded in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting board. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the load applying means by using a light emitting substrate necessary for the convenience of the light emitting effect. In this case, by irradiating strong light from the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate, the visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting substrate can be reduced, so that the other part of the load applying means not shielded by the light emitting substrate in a predetermined direction view. However, it can be made difficult for the player to see.

  In the case where the light emitting substrate and the load applying unit are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a driving device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying unit using a path of an electric wiring connected to the light emitting substrate. Since the electrical wiring can be passed, it is possible to eliminate the need for newly creating a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

  In the gaming machine D5, the light-emitting board is disposed on a back side of the game board, and the game board includes a recessed portion in which the opposite side is recessed at a position facing the light-emitting board. Machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to secure an area for disposing the light emitting board between the gaming board and the load from the load applying means to be transmitted to the gaming board. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine D6, the recessed portion is disposed outward with respect to the outer shape of the gaming area in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, even if the film member formed on the front surface of the recessed portion is displaced, it is avoided that the displacement affects the gaming area. Can do.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 includes guide means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, and the guide means is disposed on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be restricted by the guiding means, and the guiding means is disposed closer to the other side. Compared to the above, since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced, rubbing between the first displacement means and the guide means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D8, a support plate that supports the guide means, a thin film member that is fixed to a predetermined area on the support plate, and a light emitting substrate that is disposed on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and has a light emitting portion And the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without any gaps.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, the thin film member separates the guiding means and the light emitting substrate, thereby preventing the rubbing powder of the guiding means from entering the light emitting substrate side. it can.

  In the gaming machine D9, the thin film member has a dimension capable of avoiding contact with other displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine D10, it is not necessary to ensure the rigidity of the thin film member in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D9. Therefore, by forming the thinnest film as much as possible, the light from the light emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member. Can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. It is important for communication>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, drive means for generating a drive force for displacing the displacement means, and transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the state can be changed so as to change the force transmission mode.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of a displacement means, and the transmission means displaces the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove ( For example, see JP 2010-234152 A). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb some excessive displacement of the transmission means. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, because the deformation groove is configured to absorb excessive displacement of the transmission means, an extra thickness or dimensional length is required for the deformation groove. The restriction on the shape of the displacement means is increased. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by the change of the state of the transmission means, so that excessive displacement of the transmission means can be absorbed by the change of the state of the transmission means. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to add an extra structure to the displacement means, and the structure of the displacement means can be improved.

  In addition, about the change of a transmission aspect, it is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, it is possible to change the transmission efficiency of the driving force by changing the rigidity of the transmission means or adjusting the direction of the load applied to the transmission means, or a change caused by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. .

  In the gaming machine E1, the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load generation source for changing the state of the transmission means.

  In addition, the aspect of the change of the state of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to a change in rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

  Examples of the deformation mode of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, bending, and twisting, and deformation in which a boundary such as bending and displacement occurs. Moreover, as an aspect of the change in rigidity (strength), an aspect in which the thickness of the transmission means changes, an aspect in which the core inserted through the transmission means is removed, and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means is configured in a shape that is flexible in different directions, and the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position with displacement, A gaming machine E3 that is configured to change an angle formed by a direction in which it is easily bent.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the fact that the direction of the reaction force received from the displacing means changes during the displacement of the displacing means can be used for the shape change of the transmitting means. A range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means with respect to the reference position can be divided from a range in which the transmission means mainly bends and deforms due to the driving force.

  In the gaming machine E3, the displacing means is driven to stop in a predetermined midway posture, and the transmission means is a reaction force from the displacing means when the displacing means is in the midway posture. The gaming machine E4 is configured so that the direction of is along the direction in which it is easy to bend.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the midway posture by the bending of the transmission means. Even if the setting is made, it is possible to easily keep the displacement means in the midway posture.

  In the gaming machine E4, the driving means applies a driving force so that the pushing portion that pushes the displacement means of the transmission means passes through a contact position in the midway posture of the displacement means in a state before bending. A gaming machine E5 that is controlled to be generated.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the driving energy can be included even after the displacing means is in the midway posture, and this can be used to vibrate the displacing means.

  That is, since the transmission means is in an easily bent posture, the vibration using the bending can be generated in the transmission means without generating the driving force of the drive means in a mode for generating vibration. Thereby, vibration can be generated with a simple mechanism.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 includes a range setting unit configured to be able to set a range in which the state of the transmission unit changes.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set by the range setting means. It can be adjusted depending on the situation.

  In the gaming machine E6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with a predetermined position as a reference. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the driving means. It can suppress that efficiency falls.

  In addition, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of state change that occurs in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence of the displacement means on the displacement mode can be reduced. Therefore, even when the drive means cannot be controlled accurately, the displacement mode displacement (for example, stop position deviation) of the displacement means can be suppressed to a small level.

<Wiring path of movable accessory>
In a gaming machine comprising rotational displacement means configured to be rotationally displaceable, and electric supply means configured to be able to supply electricity disposed along a line connecting the rotational shaft and the outside of the diameter to the rotational displacement means, The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes an arrangement portion arranged on a rotation shaft portion of the rotation displacement means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an electric wiring is fixed to an arm-like member that is rotatably supported, and the electric wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-like member (for example, a special game machine). (See JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the electric wiring is not only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, but the electric wiring may expand and contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, which is given to the electric wiring. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the placement portion of the electric supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotation displacement means, so that the rotation displacement means when the rotation displacement of the rotation displacement means occurs. Therefore, the relative displacement of the placement portion can be suppressed, and the load applied to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine F1 includes disposition displacement means that is displaceably disposed in the vicinity of the electricity supply means, and suppression means that suppresses displacement in a direction in which the electricity supply means approaches the disposition displacement means. A gaming machine F2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. .

  In the gaming machine F2, the arrangement displacement means is configured to be easily separated from the electricity supply means when an unscheduled displacement occurs.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. .

  In the gaming machine F3, the disposition displacement means includes a first disposition displacement means that displaces and stops close to the electricity supply means, and a position that displaces and stops close to the electricity supply means. Second disposition displacement means set at a position far from the electricity supply means compared to the stop position, and the first disposition displacement means and the second disposition displacement means are connected to the electricity supply means. The gaming machine F4 is configured to abut against each other by being displaced in proximity and to apply a load in a direction away from the electricity supply means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced too much, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the electric supply means. can do.

  In the gaming machine F4, a gaming machine F5 is configured such that the first arrangement displacement means has a smaller inertia than the second arrangement displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, when the first disposing means unintentionally contacts the electricity supplying means, the load applied to the electricity supplying means can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect which comprises the magnitude of inertia is not limited at all. For example, the first arrangement displacement means may be configured to be lighter and smaller than the second arrangement displacement means, so that the magnitude of inertia may be configured, or the aspect of the support portion may be different. The magnitude of inertia may be configured by generating a magnitude of displacement resistance.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, provided with support means for supporting the rotational displacement means, the support means comprises an opening portion that is opened along a circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means, The gaming machine F6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed as compared with the case where the electric supply means is passed through the predetermined rotational shaft. be able to.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F6, a displaceable displacer disposed displaceably in the vicinity of the electricity supply unit, and a drive unit that generates a driving force for driving the displaceable displacer, the drive unit includes: A gaming machine F7, which is disposed on a side where the rotational displacement means is not disposed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F2 to F6, it is possible to improve the arrangement efficiency.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the means for guiding the electrical wiring has a function of transmitting the driving force, so that the member can be shared. The number can be reduced.

<Concept of Invention with Drive Unit 600 as an Example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating the driving unit; and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism is a driving force of the driving unit. And a projecting portion projecting from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a projecting portion thereof. A gaming machine G1, wherein a sliding groove through which the installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010). 234099). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is coupled to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, a facing portion is formed on one end side of the rotating member so as to be opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the projecting portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable because it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape (thickness) of the projecting portion. If it is equal to (3), the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval between the facing portions so that the projecting portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases accordingly. As a result, since the shakiness of the wing member is likely to occur, the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member. Since the projecting portion protrudes from one of the wing members, the sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the slide member is a slide displacement, and the posture of the slide groove is not inclined with respect to the projecting portion, so that it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width can be reduced by setting the groove width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding portion, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding portion can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

  The sliding groove may be a concave groove (dent) or a through groove (opening). In other words, the sliding groove only needs to be formed so that the inserted projecting portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

  In the gaming machine G1, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the slide displacement direction of the slide member is a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is substantially the same as the wing member. They can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and linearly extends in a direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member. A gaming machine G3 that is extended in a shape.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the projecting portion projects from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly, The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protruding portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be a constant size. Therefore, shakiness of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the slide member by suppressing the amount of lightening due to the recess of the slide groove.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion projects from the wing member, the slide groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member slides upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the position of the projecting portion when starting the game is set below the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

  Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, since the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the gravitational direction. At the time of the operation, the inertial force is increased by adding the weight of the slide member, and the driving force necessary for the driving means is increased. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member. Since the position of the protruding portion when the member starts sliding displacement upward in the gravity direction is set below the gravity direction of the rotating shaft of the wing member, the protruding configuration pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove As for the displacement component of the part, the horizontal direction component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be decreased (minimized). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting or closing the wing member in a stopped state to start or close it.

  In the gaming machine G4, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the gaming machine G5 is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started and opened.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation shaft of the wing member and gravity A gaming machine G6, wherein an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

  According to gaming machine G6, in either gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity has a wing member Since the inclined surface that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to the gravity direction is formed, even when the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation direction of the rotation axis of the wing member The protruding portion can be guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member directed upward in the gravitational direction can be started smoothly.

  In addition, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protruding portion be reduced, but also the protrusion can come into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation portion in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the wing member in the opened or closed stop state. That is, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even under the influence of vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, a receiving portion that receives the protruding portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position for closing the wing member is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove, The gaming machine G7, wherein rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the projecting portion is received on the inner wall of the sliding groove when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. Since the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  In the gaming machine G7, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion when the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion. ) Can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the slide member is configured to close the wing member in order to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion that abuts one side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement from the one-side abutted portion. And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one-side abutted part and the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other-side abutted part is When the rotating member is rotated to the other side to the position where the other side of the contact part comes into contact, Gaming machine G9, characterized in that the engagement between the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is One side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted portion and the direction of slide displacement Since the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member with a predetermined interval, the other abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts is provided. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contacting portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side. When the member is closed, the rotating member is rotated to the other side. Pushed by, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting part comes into contact with at least the other side abutted part, the engagement with the slide member of the overhanging part is released. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side to open the wing member.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of pairs. A projecting portion projects from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and an overhang portion protruding from the tip of the abutting portion, and the slide member is rotated when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member which is disposed opposite to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement with respect to the one-side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion is abutted When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted. When the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, and the wing When the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. A gaming machine G10.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is One side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted portion and the direction of slide displacement Since the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member with a predetermined interval, the other abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts is provided. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contacting portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side. When the member is closed while the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other-side contacted part is Pushed by the side, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slid toward the other side by rotating the rotating member further to the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a simple shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength decreases, but the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed as in the present invention, the shape of the projecting portion and the one-side contact portion is rotated by the projecting portion being disengaged from the slide member. There is no need to form the member in an allowable shape for rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that can easily maintain the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G10, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage of a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. A gaming machine G11, wherein a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G10, the gaming machine G11 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball that has entered the entrance, and the protruding portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. For example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the entry from the entrance is made. The flow of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G11, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine G12, comprising a rubbing portion that traverses the passage of the passage member when the member is slid and contacts the edge of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G11, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where it is closed, the passage member crosses the passage of the passage member. Since the slide member includes a rubbing portion that is in rubbing contact with the edge portion, an illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance can be cut.

  For example, when the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance and through the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out, pulling) and reciprocating the game ball. In response to such fraud, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is inserted in a state where the wing member is opened, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member. When being rubbed against the edge, the yarn can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact part of a slide member from a metal material. In this case, the whole slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (sliding contact portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entirety of the passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (a portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) with which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G11, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine G13 comprising a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub the edges of each other.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of each other. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members to be rubbed, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  For example, when the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance and through the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out, pulling) and reciprocating the game ball. According to the present invention, in response to such a fraud, even if the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the opened position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edge part that is rubbed against each other) may be formed from the metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine G12 or G13, the driving means is configured such that the driving shaft is displaced in the first direction by electromagnetic force and the driving shaft is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing means, and the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. A gaming machine G14 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G12 or G13, the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutting portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side so as to open the wing member disposed opposite to the one-side abutting portion A game apparatus, comprising: an other-side abutted portion on which the other side of the abutting portion abuts, wherein the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed at a substantially center in the width direction. Machine G15.

  According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member has a contact portion, and the sliding member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side so as to be opposed to the one-side abutted portion and open the wing member And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one side abutted portion and the other side abutted portion are formed at the substantially center in the width direction, so that the pair of wing members and the rotation It is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member. Therefore, the sliding member can be smoothly displaced by the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member and opening or closing the pair of wing members, When the position of the slide member is changed, the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations, and is also connected to the rotating member at two locations. It is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member, and a resistance is generated when the slide member is slid and displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), thereby preventing the opening or closing of the wing member. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

  Note that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in a state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And the position on the virtual line along the direction of slide displacement is meant.

  In the gaming machine G15, the gaming machine G16 is characterized in that a width dimension on one side and the other side of the contact part is set to be at least three times or less of a maximum outer dimension of the projecting part.

  According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G15, the width dimension on one side and the other side of the abutting part is set to at least three times or less the maximum outer dimension of the projecting part. The posture change of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily allowed. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimension of the one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be not more than twice the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described attitude change tolerance.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 930 as an example>
A first entrance, a first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first entrance, first driving means that drives the first opening / closing member, a second entrance, and a second entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth; and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are provided on the second opening / closing member. A gaming machine H1 that is arranged on the back side.

  Here, the first entrance, the first opening / closing member for opening or closing the first entrance, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second entrance, and the first entrance 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a second opening / closing member that opens or closes two entrances and a second driving unit that drives the second opening / closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the door and it is difficult to effectively use the space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the back side of the first opening / closing member (first entrance) is provided. A space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first driving means and the second driving means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices becomes the first opening / closing member (first insertion member). It can be secured on the back of the ball opening), and the space can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine H1, the front projected area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening / closing member.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that a front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than a total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine H2 or H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means And since it is made larger than the total front projection area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entrance (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second entrance. A gaming machine H4, wherein the gaming machines H4 are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the opening and closing member.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are the second incoming ball. Since it is provided side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second entrance (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, the drive shaft, and the main body. A drive unit that is housed in the unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn from the other side of the main body unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit serve as the second drive shaft. A gaming machine H5, which is arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the first driving means and the second driving means are a main body portion, a driving shaft disposed on one side of the main body portion, and a driving shaft thereof. The first drive means and the second drive means provide the drive shaft to the first drive means and the second drive means. Since the two opening / closing members are arranged in a posture, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily combined.

  In the gaming machine H5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body portion are disposed. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at a position where one outer surface except the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body portion is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces except the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are disposed are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means. Even if the outputs are different and the sizes of the main body portions are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

  That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed in different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step, It is necessary to form a shield plate by bending along the step, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces of the main body portion are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

  The shield plate divides a region where the first driving unit and the second driving unit are disposed and another region (for example, a region where the detection sensor and the control board are disposed), and the area between the two regions. Is a barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a first passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the first entrance and a passage for the game ball that has entered the second entrance A second passage member to be formed; and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member, wherein the first opening / closing member rotates to a position sandwiching the entrance. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance are provided, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage. A gaming machine H7, comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that slides and displaces as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. And a slide member that slides and displaces along with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. Compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Thus, a space can be secured on the back side of the first entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage member. Further, since it is not necessary to bend the first passage member to the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, the first entrance is made closer to the second entrance accordingly. Can do.

  In the gaming machine H7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and the second member extends from the rotating shaft and is driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine H8, wherein the first portion is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and extends from the rotating shaft and is driven first. A second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is formed to be bent in a generally U shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the slide member is secured and the first drive means The distance between the slide member can be suppressed.

  That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension of the first portion (the distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is connected to the slide member from the rotation shaft in the present invention. In the case where the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal, the slide amount of the slide member can be equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first drive means and the slide member is increased and the whole is increased in size. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be equivalent to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed to be bent substantially in the shape of a letter when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide amount of the slide member is secured and the first drive means and the slide The distance between the members can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion that is opposite to the slide member.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. By effectively utilizing the space generated by this, the rotating member can be reduced in size. That is, the rotation member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the game machine includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening and closing member, the first drive unit, A gaming machine H10 that is disposed between the two.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the gaming machine H10 includes a detection sensor that detects a gaming ball that has entered the second entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is in the second opening / closing state. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, the first sensor part detects the first. Since the driving means can be concealed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such illegal acts.

  In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, for example, when a drilling process is performed using a tool such as a drill, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection sensor. In the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and it becomes impossible to visually recognize the place where the fraud has been applied. Therefore, the fraudulent act can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine H10 includes a case member that houses the detection sensor and a screw member that is fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is positioned between the pair of sensor devices.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, the first driving means may be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. In other words, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving unit with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is easily formed between the facing of the pair of detection sensors. By using as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded region on the front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraud.

  The screw member may be a case member made up of two members, for fastening and fixing the two members, or for fastening other members to the case member. good. The screw member is preferably made of metal.

  In the gaming machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine H12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the opposing faces of the pair of detection sensors. When fraud is added to the first driving means from the ball opening, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first drive means, for example, when a drilling tool is used and drilling is performed, the wiring is damaged due to the fraud. (Disconnection) can be made easy. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring, and it is possible to easily suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine H12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine H13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. It can be drawn (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  In the gaming machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. A gaming machine H14.

  According to the gaming machine H14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the diameter of the seat portion increases as the seat portion moves away from the second opening / closing member. In order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first drive means, for example, when a drilling tool is used and drilling is performed, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (disconnect) the wiring by shifting the position in the lateral direction (side slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wiring.

  In any one of the gaming machines H12 to H14, the gaming machine H15 is characterized in that the wires of the pair of detection sensors are pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

  According to the gaming machine H15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is drawn out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of. That is, a wider range in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
A game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and A gaming machine comprising: a second member disposed on the back side of the game board; a first engagement portion that engages with the first member; and a second engagement portion that engages with the second member A gaming machine I1 comprising a third member having

  Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. A gaming machine that includes a second member that is disposed on the back side of the game board is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage and then flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be provided with interest.

  In this case, if there is a positional shift (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member is ensured. It is requested to do. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning those members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming the first member, the gaming board is inverted to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the gaming board. A separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is necessary, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the third member having the first engagement portion that engages with the first member and the second engagement portion that engages with the second member, the third member is provided. The second member can be positioned with respect to the first member using.

  In the gaming machine I1, the gaming board includes an opening formed in an opening, and a connection portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in an internal space. A gaming machine I2, wherein the third member is disposed in an internal space of the section.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the machining man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member is configured such that the first engagement portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engagement portion engages with the second passage of the second member. A gaming machine I3 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member has a first engagement portion in the first passage of the first member and a second engagement portion in the second passage of the second member, respectively. Since the second member is engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned with respect to the first member. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) in the connection portion between the first passage and the second passage. Since the first member and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is more effective than when the other portion is positioned by the third member. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly.

  In the gaming machine I3, the gaming machine I4, wherein a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, so the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage. Tolerance or mounting tolerance can be easily tolerated.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and the third member can be attached at the same time by attaching the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I5, in a state in which the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engagement portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, there is no need to separately perform an operation of engaging the first engagement portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine I7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the second engagement portion of the third member is the second member from the opposite side to the first member. Since the first member and the third member are attached to the game board at the same time, the second member is attached to the back surface of the game board. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the fixing member includes the third member. A gaming machine I8, wherein the members are fixed or integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or formed integrally with the fixing member, the first member can be held (arranged) at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the first member rotates to a position where a game ball is formed so as to be able to enter and is connected to the first passage, and a position sandwiching the entrance A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a driving force of the driving means for the pair of wing members. A transmission mechanism that transmits to the member, and the transmission mechanism is a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. And the third member is formed so that the third member can guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the transmission mechanism is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member and the rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means. And a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, so that the pair of wing members can be opened and closed only by the rotating member, compared with the conventional product that is the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I9, the pair of wing members includes a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the slide member includes a slide groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine I10, wherein the third member includes a covering surface portion facing an opening opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I9, the pair of wing members includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the sliding portion is slidably inserted through the protruding portion. Since the slide member is provided with a moving groove, and the third member is provided with a covering surface portion facing the opening opposite to the blade member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding member slides by the covering surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside, and dust and foreign matter can be prevented from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably prevent the pair of wing members from being opened or closed by preventing the sliding of the protruding portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter entering the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention taking the specific prize opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball entered in the ball entrance rolls, and its rolling A gaming machine comprising a passage member into which a game ball rolling on the surface flows, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval.

  Here, provided with a ball entrance that is formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance A gaming machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-3092). The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the entrance are collected on the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Into each ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and there is a problem that over winning is likely to occur. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval, so that the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member is increased even when the entrance is enlarged. Can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened and the flow into the passage member can be made faster. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine J1 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 includes a detection sensor that detects a gaming ball that has entered the entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine J1 or J2 includes first guide means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide means is located at one end in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. And a game machine J3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to contact the gaming ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape, the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide is equal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arrange | positioned between a side edge part and a channel | path member, when a game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal direction edge part of a ball entrance, the game ball is made into the 1st inclined surface of a 1st guide means. It can guide to a channel | path member and can be made hard to stay in the longitudinal direction edge part of a rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, another game ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. And over-winning can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the gaming machine J4 is provided with a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. .

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the gaming machine J4 includes a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to receive the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, another game ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. And over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be promptly guided (inflowed) to the passage member. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J4 or J5, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that a groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to a diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J4 or J5, the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, These game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is opposite to the first region in which the first guide means is disposed with the passage member interposed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine J7, wherein the second area is formed to be inclined downward toward the first area.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. Since the second region on the opposite side across the surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region Can be quickly rolled toward the passage member using the downward slope of the second region. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J7, the gaming machine J8 is provided with second guide means that protrudes from the second area of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J7, the second guiding means is provided so as to protrude from the second area of the rolling surface, so that the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region by passing the passage member and decelerating before (immediately before) the passage member while increasing the rolling speed to the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J7 or J8, a game that is disposed in the second region of the rolling surface and rolls in the second region of the rolling surface along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine J9, comprising second guide means formed so that a ball can be guided to the entrance side.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J7 or J8, the gaming machine J9 is disposed in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is directed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means formed so as to be able to guide the game ball rolled along the entrance to the entrance is provided, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be decelerated. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region by passing the passage member and decelerating before (immediately before) the passage member while increasing the rolling speed to the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J9, the opening / closing member is disposed at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact in the state where the entrance is opened.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J9, when the entrance is opened, the opening / closing member is disposed at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided to the entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and rebounded toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the entrance as the side edge portion opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means, The gaming machine J11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the side portion opposite to the first guide means.

  According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is separated from the entrance opening as the side edge opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. In addition to being inclined in the direction, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly while suppressing jumping out of the entrance. Can be made.

  That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, a game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed is entered from the entrance. Since the possibility of jumping out to the outside is low, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region by contacting the side edge of the second guide means and guiding to the entrance side. It can suppress and can be made to flow into a passage member early by that much. On the other hand, a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by getting over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it can be made to flow into the passage member quickly while suppressing jumping out from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress over winnings by preventing another game ball from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member.

  In the gaming machine J11, the second guide means has a side edge on the side facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the first direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine J12.

  According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the dimension of the side edge part of the 2nd guide means, the game ball which got over the upper surface of the 2nd guide means can be made to contact (collision) with the 1st guide means, and can be decelerated reliably. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  In the gaming machine J11 or J12, the gaming machine J13 is characterized in that a position separated from the rolling surface by a radius of the gaming ball is included in a side edge portion of the second guide means.

  According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J11 or J12, a position separated from the rolling surface by the radius of the gaming ball is included in the side edge of the second guiding means, so the upper surface of the second guiding means The game ball that has passed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to be surely decelerated, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines J8 to J13, the second guiding means is located on an extension of the inclined direction of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine J14, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J8 to J13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the tilt direction of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means, so the first guiding means Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. It can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  The gaming machine J14 includes a guide groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is formed as a concave groove that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member, and from the bottom surface of the guide groove, the second guide means A gaming machine J15 characterized in that the height to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine J15, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J14, the gaming machine J15 includes a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Since the height dimension from the first guide means to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can flow into the passage member quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J15, the game machine includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member, and the width of the guide groove is A gaming machine J16 that is reduced in size toward the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine J16, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines J1 to J15, the gaming machine J16 includes a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collises) with the side wall of the guide groove. The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
In a gaming machine comprising a ball entrance unit that is formed so that a game ball can be entered and a ball passage unit that is connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed. The game board has an opening formed in the thickness direction, and the entrance unit has the entrance and a first passage connected to the entrance and is disposed on the front side of the game board. A first unit provided; and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage. A gaming machine K1 characterized by

  Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed A machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting the game board (combined use) by replacing the entering unit with another entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the incoming ball unit is disposed on the front surface of the game board, for example, a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages needs to be secured in front of the game board in advance. For this reason, when a ball entering unit with a small number of passages is used, there is a problem in that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the entry unit has an entry port and a first passage connected to the entry port and is disposed on the front side of the game board. 1 unit and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage, so that the front of the game board It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space according to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be used when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting the game board. The space in front of can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine K1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. A gaming machine K2 that is arranged in an overlapping position.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping with one unit, the player can visually recognize the second unit through the first unit, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Also, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board may be formed from a plywood board or a sticker may be attached to the game board. Since it is also possible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of design freedom can be increased.

  In the gaming machine K2, at least a front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the front side of at least the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light transmissive material, so that the second unit flows down through the first unit. The player can visually recognize the game ball to be played, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first unit may be entirely made of a light transmissive material. In addition, when only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmissive material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit overlapping the second passage in the front view is formed of the light transmissive material. This is because it is possible to visually recognize the flow of the game ball and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K3, the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material. When making the player visually recognize the second unit, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down by changing the position in the front-rear direction, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of the display mode include printing with ink, sticking a seal, and two-color molding.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of pieces. And a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. And a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit that is disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine K6, wherein a plurality of second branch passages are provided with detection sensors for detecting the passage of gaming balls.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. A second upstream unit, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and having a plurality of second connection passages, and detecting the passage of the game ball in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensor is arranged, for example, when the gaming machine having a different specification is manufactured by changing the second upstream unit to another unit having a small number of the second branch passages, the number of the detection sensors is set. It can suppress that a worker makes a mistake.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection sensor is provided in the second connection passage, the detection sensor can be provided by the number of the second connection passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connection passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to provide one detection sensor, but only the number of the second connection passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor is disposed. On the other hand, in the structure in which the detection sensor is arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangements.

  In the gaming machine K6, the first unit includes a second entrance for allowing a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball inserted into the second entrance passes is provided. A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A gaming machine K7 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K6, the first unit has a second entrance where a game ball can be entered, and the second unit has entered the second entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensor to detect is arrange | positioned, the detection sensor arrange | positioned in a 2nd unit can be disperse | distributed, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of a channel | path can be raised by that much.

  In the gaming machine K7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged. The gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the second unit is positioned relative to the first unit.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the second passage is engaged directly or indirectly with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passage is connected is the same. Or by positioning the third passages directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed with respect to the first unit even in a separate unit.

  In addition, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is intended to suppress the occurrence of displacement (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the position shift ( The occurrence of a step can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game balls can flow smoothly.

  In any one of the gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit and is protruded A gaming machine K9, wherein a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage projects toward the second downstream unit. In addition, since a receiving portion that receives a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit are positioned by the engagement between the detection sensor and the receiving portion. While being possible, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the entire second unit.

  In the gaming machines K1 to K6, the first unit includes a second entrance where a game ball can be entered, and a third path through which the game ball entered into the second entrance passes. In the second unit, the gaming machine K10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K9, the third path through which the game ball entered in the second entrance is passed is at least between the second branch paths in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be downsized.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and an inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion is bent. The game machine K11 is characterized in that a standing part is erected from the side and the wall part on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flow-down direction of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. Since the standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion, and the outer wall portion of the bent portion is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the direction of the flow of the game ball, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, the standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion, thereby improving the rigidity of the passage and improving the durability, and playing the game ball along the standing tip of the standing portion. While the guide can be guided to smoothly flow down the bent part, the standing part is located in front of the game ball in front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing part and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is tilted so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flow direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball while standing. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising: a first passage member through which a game ball passes; and a second passage member through which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

  Here, a game provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through an upstream end connected to the downstream end of the first passage member. A machine is known (for example, JP 2012-5883 A). However, in the structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected in this way, a positional shift between the two is unavoidable, so the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem in that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine L1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side of the upstream end of the second passage member and the side surface upstream end on the side surface are formed in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side (bottom surface upstream end) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (side upstream end) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that a position separated from the bottom surface upstream end by a radius of a gaming ball is included in the side surface upstream end.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the side surface upstream end includes a position separated from the bottom surface upstream end by the radius of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball is transferred from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the side surface upstream end. That is, the position of the step on the bottom side where the game ball is affected and the position of the step on the side can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from being affected by the steps on the bottom side and the side steps at the same time, and to easily disperse those effects. ).

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the bottom downstream end on the bottom side and the side downstream end on the side of the downstream end of the first passage member are formed with different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and has a protruding tip as the side surface downstream end, and the second passage member includes the upstream end. A gaming machine L3, wherein the gaming machine L3 is provided with a concave portion that is recessed and that receives the protruding piece and faces the protruding tip of the protruding piece as the upstream end of the side wall.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the first passage member protrudes from the downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is a side downstream end. And the second passage member includes a recess that is recessed at the upstream end of the second passage member to receive the protrusion piece and that faces the protruding tip of the protrusion piece as an upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a position different from the bottom surface upstream end in the game ball passage direction downstream side, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protruding piece is relatively weak in rigidity and may be broken. According to the gaming machine L3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball). Even when the projecting piece is broken, the bottom surface upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (side upstream end) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Also, according to the gaming machine L3, the gaming machine protruding piece is formed on the first passage member and the concave portion is formed on the second passage member, respectively, so that the first side is brought into contact with the protruding piece on the side surface of the concave portion. The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be restricted. That is, at the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to jump up when riding up, so the reverse step (from the downstream end of the first passage member) However, compared with a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position, it is easy to inhibit smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, like the gaming machine L3, the fact that the positional displacement of the second passage member relative to the first passage member can be restricted is that the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for smooth flow of game balls.

  In the gaming machine L3, the gaming machine L4 is characterized in that a side surface upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to a passing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to a case where the game ball is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The side surface upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared with the case where the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the side surface upper end surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. Let it be hard to be bounced back. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine L5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, for example, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape having a protruding piece or a recess (stepped shape). The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection mold can be moderated, so that it is possible to suppress the bubble accumulation (air biting) and filling failure, and to mold It is possible to improve the performance.

  In the gaming machine L4 or L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4 or L5, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine. The game ball that has collided with the upstream end can be pressed to the bottom surface side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced up and bounced at the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the specific prize opening unit 550 as an example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are open from the outside to the opening direction. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism is capable of restricting the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

  Here, a ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, a pair of wing members that are disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close And a pair of wings by the driving force of the driving means, and when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the gaming means is allowed to enter the game ball. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting unit that is disposed at a restricting position that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

  According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the permissible position, so that the game balls that have passed between the pair of wing members are inserted into the entrance port. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the restricting position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball is moved to the entrance. It is possible to regulate entering the ball.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowed position after the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside. Therefore, there has been a problem that the effect of restricting the illegal entry of game balls into the entrance is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened. Accordingly, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally entered into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion projects from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the slide groove In the inner wall, a receiving portion for receiving the protruding portion when the slide member is slid to the position for closing the wing member is recessed, and in the state where the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the receiving wall for receiving the protruding portion when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. Then, in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  In the gaming machine M2, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, so the weight of the sliding member By utilizing (self-weight), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is An abutment portion and an overhang portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and the one-side abutted portion opposed to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation to release the wing member When the member is rotated toward the other side, In the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the one side abutted portion and the tension is applied. When the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member, and the rotating member is rotated to the other side to at least a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts on the other side abutted portion, the projecting portion The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the engagement of the part with the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, a one-side abutted part that abuts one side of the abutting part, and the one-side abutted part at a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. With the rotation, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other-side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contacting portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting part comes into contact with at least the other side abutted part, the engagement with the slide member of the overhanging part is released. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side to open the wing member.

  In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is An abutment portion and an overhang portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and the one-side abutted portion opposed to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation to release the wing member When the member is rotated toward the other side, And the other side abutted part with which the other side of the part abuts. When the wing member is closed, the overhanging part is disengaged from the slide member and the wing member is closed. When the slide member is slid to a position at which the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. A gaming machine M6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion that projects from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, a one-side abutted part that abuts one side of the abutting part, and the one-side abutted part at a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. With the rotation, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other-side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contacting portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slid toward the other side by rotating the rotating member further to the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a simple shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength decreases, but the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed as in the present invention, the shape of the projecting portion and the one-side contact portion is rotated by the projecting portion being disengaged from the slide member. There is no need to form the member in an allowable shape for rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that can easily maintain the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any of the gaming machines M2 to M6, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball that has entered the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the slide groove. A gaming machine M7, wherein a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M2 to M6, the gaming machine M7 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. For example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the entry from the entrance is made. The flow of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 930 as an example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the driving means, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball that has entered the entrance A gaming machine N1 comprising: a passage member that forms a passage of the first and second passages, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010). 234099). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member rotates toward one side or the other side.

  In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is bonded to the game ball, the game ball is inserted from the entrance and the path of the passage member is passed, and the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the ball and reciprocating the game ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress an illegal act in which the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball and the detection sensor detects the act multiple times.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, since a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the middle of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that the detection sensor detects a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine N1, the transmission mechanism moves the slide member across the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member rubs against the edge of the passage member. A gaming machine N2 including a rubbing portion.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N1, the transmission mechanism is configured such that when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member Since the rubbing portion that comes into rubbing contact with the edge portion is provided, it is possible to cut an illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even when the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the frictional portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion And the edge of the channel member can be cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact part of a slide member from a metal material. In this case, the whole slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (sliding contact portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entirety of the passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (a portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) with which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In the gaming machine N1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine N3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a pair of crossing the passages of the passage member and rubbing the edges of each other Since the transmission member is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edge part that is rubbed against each other) may be formed from the metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the drive means is configured such that the drive shaft is displaced in the first direction by electromagnetic force and the drive shaft is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing means, and the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. A gaming machine N4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, the displacement from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where it is closed is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 19930 as an example>
It operates with the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the game ball is distributed to the other side A gaming machine comprising a sorting unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, wherein at least a part of at least one of the first passage or the second passage is disposed along a direction intersecting the game board. A gaming machine O1 that is characterized by being played.

  There is a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side There is known a gaming machine including a sorting unit having a second passage that passes therethrough (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the passage is arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and the other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that space was reduced.

  According to the gaming machine O1, since at least a part of at least one of the first passage or the second passage is disposed along the direction intersecting the game board, the front-rear direction (with the game board having a relatively large space) is provided. It is possible to dispose at least a part of the passage using the space in the intersecting direction). Therefore, the distribution unit can be downsized in the width direction, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine O1, the sorting member is pivotally supported so that the rotating shaft is disposed along the width direction of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the sorting member is rotatably supported and the rotating shaft is disposed along the width direction of the gaming board. The direction in which the game balls are distributed can be the direction intersecting the game board (front-rear direction). Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be downsized in the width direction, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap each other in a top view, so the sorting unit is reduced in the width direction, Accordingly, a space for disposing other members can be secured.

  The gaming machine O2 or O3 includes first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage extends along a direction intersecting the game board, and the distribution member And a first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage, and the first detection means is disposed in the first upstream passage. A gaming machine O4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O2 or O3, the first passage extends along the direction intersecting the gaming board, and the first upstream passage going backward from the sorting member, A first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage, and the first detection means is disposed in the first upstream passage, so that the first detection means is brought close to the sorting member, The first detection means can be easily made visible to the player. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball from being distributed to one side by the distribution device to being detected by the first detection means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  In addition, it is preferable that a 1st channel | path and a 2nd channel | path are formed from the light transmissive material which can visually recognize the game ball to pass from the outside.

  In the gaming machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage includes an enlargement unit that enlarges a displaceable region of the game ball, and the enlargement unit is disposed between the distribution member and the first detection unit. A gaming machine O5 that is provided.

  Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to be violated due to an impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, chattering may occur when the first detection unit is brought close to the sorting member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage includes an expanding means for expanding the displaceable area of the game ball, and the expanding means Since it is arranged between the distribution member and the first detection means, when the game ball is ramped due to an impact during the sorting operation by the sorting member, the game ball rampage is absorbed by the expansion means. can do. As a result, the occurrence of chattering can be suppressed while allowing the first detection means to be brought closer to the sorting member.

  In addition, as an expansion means, what enlarges the cross-sectional area of the channel | path in the 1st upstream channel | path of a 1st channel | path is illustrated.

  The gaming machine O6 includes a first branch passage branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O5, the first branch passage is branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage. When the ball rampage is relatively small, the expansion means (inner space of the first branch passage) can suppress the game ball rampage and suppress chattering, while the game ball rampage is relatively large That is, in the case of a large rampage in which the occurrence of chattering cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be caused to flow out through the first branch passage.

  In addition, the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, so that the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member are detected by the first detection means through the first upstream passage, It is possible to form a configuration in which the first detection means cannot be reached and the first detection means flows out to the first branch passage. Thereby, it is possible to have a game property that allows the player to expect the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, as a guidance destination of the game ball | bowl by a 1st branch path, an out mouth, a winning opening, a game area | region, etc. are illustrated, for example.

  In the gaming machine O6, at least the first upstream path of the first path is formed of a light transmissive material, and the first branch path is branched from a side of the first upstream path. A gaming machine O7.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O6, at least the first upstream path is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch path is lateral to the first upstream path. Therefore, the game ball passing through the first upstream passage can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. That is, the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member and passing through the first upstream passage are made visible so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to have a game property that makes a player expect this. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage, so that an area of a display surface for displaying information on the game is secured on the upper surface of the first upstream passage or the first branch passage. it can. As information regarding a game, the information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the 1st branch passage is illustrated, for example. As a guide destination, an out mouth is illustrated, for example.

  The entire first passage may be formed from a light transmissive material, and the first branch passage may be formed from a light transmissive material.

  In the gaming machine O6 or O7, the gaming machine O8 is characterized in that the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O6 or O7, the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means. The downstream passage can be used not only as a passage for game balls passing through the first upstream passage, but also as a passage for game balls passing through the first branch passage. Thereby, a distribution unit can be reduced in size.

  In the gaming machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from a side of the first upstream passage, and is juxtaposed with the first upstream passage, and the first upstream passage is the first branch passage. A game machine O9 that is merged to the side of the machine.

  According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage, and is arranged in parallel with the first upstream passage. Are joined to the side of the first branch passage, so that the first downstream passage can be offset from the first upstream passage toward the first branch passage. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions another member under the 1st upstream channel | path is securable.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 20930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates according to the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection unit that detects the game ball distributed to the one side, and distribution to the other side And a second detection means for detecting the game ball, and a time required for the game ball reaching the sorting member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection means. A gaming machine P1 comprising adjusting means for adjusting so that a difference from a time required for the means to be detected becomes small.

  A distribution member that operates according to the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means that detects the game ball distributed to the one side, and a game ball distributed to the other side There is known a gaming machine provided with a second detecting means for detecting (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means, There was a problem that the degree of freedom of design was low.

  That is, when the display means displays the fact that a game ball has been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means and notifies the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls. ), The time required to reach the sorting member and the game balls distributed to one side are detected by the first detection means, and until the game balls distributed to the other side are detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, there is a difference in the time from reaching the sorting member until it is displayed depending on the sorting direction, and the fun of the game is impaired.

  Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the paths for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detecting means or the second detecting means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the sorting member, and the first detecting means and the first detecting means 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distributing member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the sorting member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the second detection means to be detected is adjusted to be small. And a path for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means, respectively, symmetrically with respect to the distribution member, and the first detection means and the second detection It is unnecessary to dispose the means at the same distance from the distributing member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passage and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means.

  In the gaming machine P1, a first path that guides the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member is the first A second passage that leads to the detection means, wherein at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion serves as the adjusting means. A gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the first path for guiding the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member to the first detection means and the distribution path are distributed to the other side by the distribution member. A second passage for guiding the game ball to the second detection means, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage includes a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion serves as an adjustment means. Therefore, the time required for the first detection means to detect the game ball that has reached the sorting member by utilizing the fact that the moving speed decreases due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recess or protrusion. And adjustment to reduce the difference between the time required for detection by the second detection means and the second detection means can be performed reliably. Further, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  The adjusting means (concave portion or protrusion) may be disposed only in one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be disposed in both the first passage and the second passage. When a plurality of recesses or protrusions are provided, the size of the recesses or protrusions (such as the depth of the recesses, the height of the protrusions, the width of the recesses or the protrusions) and the interval between them are the same. It may be different or different.

  Further, the first passage and the second passage may be formed symmetrically (the same shape) with respect to the sorting member, or may be formed asymmetrically. Even in the case of being formed symmetrically, the speed of the game ball can be reduced by the resistance when passing through the concave portion or the protruding portion, so that the first detection means and the second detection means are respectively the same from the sorting member. It is not necessary to arrange them at a distance. That is, it is possible to ensure a degree of design freedom regarding the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member A second passage that leads to the second detection means, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage includes a fall area where the game ball is freely dropped, and the fall area is the adjustment means. A gaming machine P3 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first path for guiding the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member to the first detection means and the other side by the distribution member A second passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the second detection means, and at least one of the first passage and the second passage has a fall area where the game balls are freely dropped, and the fall area is adjusted as described above. Therefore, compared to the form in which the game ball rolls by receiving frictional resistance from the rolling surface, it is less susceptible to frictional resistance, and the movement speed is more efficient because the gravitational acceleration is maximized. The difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the sorting member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the second detection means to be detected is reduced by using Adjustment can be made reliably. Further, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  The adjusting means (falling region) may be disposed only in one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be disposed in both the first passage and the second passage. When a plurality of drop areas are provided, the lengths of the drop areas may be the same or different.

  The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the recess or protrusion is disposed in the first passage downstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes the first branch path branched from the first path, and the first branch path downstream from the branch position where the first branch path is branched. Since the recess or the protrusion is provided, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first branch passage due to the influence of the recess or the protrusion.

  The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the recess or protrusion is disposed in the first passage upstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A gaming machine P5 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P5 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the first passage upstream from the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. Since the recessed portion or the protruding portion is disposed, whether or not the branching to the first branch passage is made by utilizing the fact that the moving speed is reduced due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recessed portion or the protruding portion. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means is configured to make the time required for the distributing member to distribute the game balls to the one side different from the time required for the operation to distribute to the other side. A gaming machine P6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means includes a time required for the operation of the distributing member to distribute the game balls to one side and a time required for the operation to distribute to the other side. Therefore, using this time difference, the time required for the game ball that has reached the sorting member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the second detection means to detect Adjustment to reduce the difference can be performed reliably. Further, since the adjustment can be made by the distribution member, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passages and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means.

  In the gaming machine P6, the sorting member is pivotally supported so that the center of gravity is biased to the one side or the other side with respect to the rotation shaft, and the adjusting means is based on the bias of the center of gravity position. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the time required for the operation of distributing the game balls to the one side differs from the time required for the operation of distributing the game balls to the other side.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P6, the sorting member is pivotally supported so that the center of gravity is biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotating shaft, and the adjusting means is The time required to distribute the game ball to the one side differs from the time required to distribute the game ball to the other side due to the deviation of the center of gravity position, thus simplifying the structure of the adjusting means and reducing the product cost it can.

  Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the sorting member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include, for example, a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

  In the gaming machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported, and the adjusting means distributes the game ball to the one side by changing a rotation resistance of the distribution member depending on a rotation direction. The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that the time required and the time required for the operation to be distributed to the other side are different.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P6, the sorting member is pivotally supported so that the adjusting means can change the rotational resistance of the sorting member depending on the rotation direction, thereby Since the time required for the operation to be distributed to one side is different from the time required for the operation to be distributed to the other side, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second time Adjustment to reduce the difference from the time required for detection by the detection means can be reliably performed.

  As a means for varying the rotational resistance of the distribution member depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, and rotation to one side does not transmit rotation of the distribution member, and rotation of the distribution member is the other rotation. A configuration in which the rotational resistance increases as much as the other gears are transmitted and the other gears are rotated is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the distribution member is formed in a mode different from the one side receiving surface that receives the gaming balls distributed to the one side and the one side receiving surface, and distributes to the other side A game machine P9, comprising: another receiving surface for receiving the game ball, wherein the one receiving surface and the other receiving surface serve as the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the sorting member has a one-side receiving surface that receives the game balls distributed to one side, and the one-side receiving surface in a different manner. The other side receiving surface for receiving the game balls formed and distributed to the other side, and the one side receiving surface and the other side receiving surface are used as adjusting means, so the behavior of the game ball received on the one side receiving surface And the difference between the behavior of the game ball received on the other side receiving surface and the time required for the game ball reaching the sorting member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection means. Adjustment to reduce the difference from the time required to complete the process can be performed reliably.

  In addition, as a difference of the aspect of a 1st receiving surface and an other side receiving surface, the difference of the inclination angle with respect to a perpendicular direction and the difference of a material (elastic modulus) are illustrated, for example, and it is received by the 1st receiving surface and the other receiving surface. An example of the difference in the behavior of the played game balls is the ease of bouncing of the game balls. For example, if the bounce of the game ball received on the one side receiving surface is larger than the bounce of the game ball received on the other side receiving surface, the flow of the game ball is slowed down for the bounce period. Thus, it is possible to earn time required for detection by the first detection means.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 24930 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a distribution member that operates by a weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side; and a disposition member on which the distribution member is disposed. A gaming machine Q1 comprising suppression means for suppressing rotation of the sorting member when an external force is applied to the member.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a distribution member that operates with the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and a disposing member on which the distribution member is disposed ( JP, 2017-148189). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that if the player hits or an external force is applied to the arrangement member, the distribution member may be rotated due to the influence of inertial force. It was.

  That is, when a game ball distributed to one side is guided to a winning opening to which a higher game value is given than a game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting a gaming machine, the arrangement member If an external force is applied to the arm, the distributing member is rotated by inertial force, and the posture of the distributing member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). It was.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, since the suppression means for suppressing the rotation of the sorting member by the external force applied to the arrangement member is provided, even when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, it is affected by the inertial force. Rotation of the distribution member can be suppressed. Therefore, the injustice which rotates a distribution member by the effect | action of external force can be suppressed.

  The arrangement member includes the first member itself on which the distribution member is pivotally supported. However, the arrangement member is not limited to the first member, and the second member on which the first member is arranged, A third member connected directly or indirectly to the two members is also included. Examples of the second member include a case member that pivotally supports the distributing member and forms a skeleton of the distributing unit, and the third member includes a game board on which the distributing unit is disposed, Various members (for example, an outer frame, an inner frame, a front frame, a glass plate, etc.) connected directly or indirectly to the game board are exemplified.

  In addition, examples of the external force include a force input to the gaming machine due to an act of tapping or shaking by a player.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a gaming machine Q2, wherein the distributing member has a rotational axis disposed along the width direction of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the distribution member is arranged along the width direction of the game board, so that the distribution direction of the game balls by the distribution member It can be the direction (front-rear direction) that intersects the board. Therefore, the passages for guiding the game balls distributed to one side or the other side by the distribution member can also be arranged along the direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the sorting unit including the sorting member can be downsized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

  As described above, the configuration in which the rotation shaft of the distributing member is arranged along the width direction of the game board is such that when the player strikes the front (glass plate) of the gaming machine, the inertia due to the action of the external force Since the force is applied to the sorting member as a force in the direction of rotating the sorting member, it was impossible to adopt the conventional product, but a suppression means for suppressing the rotation of the sorting member was provided. Thus, it has become possible to employ for the first time, and thereby, it is possible to achieve both the securing of a space for disposing other members and the prevention of fraud.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the restraining means is arranged such that an external force acts on the arrangement member by arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position overlapping the rotation axis in the direction of the rotation axis of the distribution member. A gaming machine Q3 that suppresses rotation of the sorting member when the game is played.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the restraining means is arranged in a position where the center of gravity of the sorting member overlaps the rotating shaft when viewed in the direction of the rotating shaft of the sorting member. Since the distribution member is prevented from rotating when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, the influence of the inertial force applied to the distribution member when the external force is applied to the arrangement member (distribution) The force component that attempts to rotate the member) can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the sorting member from being rotated by the action of an external force.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the suppression means includes an inclination angle with respect to a vertical direction of the distribution member rotated to the one side and an inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the distribution member rotated to the other side. The game machine Q4 is characterized in that the distribution member is prevented from rotating when an external force is applied to the arrangement member.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the suppression means includes the tilting angle of the sorting member rotated to one side and the sorting member rotated to the other side. By varying the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the sorting member from rotating when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, so the force necessary to rotate the sorting member is One state can be made larger than the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the sorting member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, the sorting member can be prevented from being rotated by the action of the external force.

  In the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, the sorting member is formed in a symmetric shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetry plane.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape with a virtual plane including the rotation axis as a symmetry plane, so the shape of the distribution member is simplified. Manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means is configured such that an external force is applied to the arrangement member by arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position biased to the one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. In this case, the gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that the distribution member is prevented from rotating.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the suppression means is arranged by arranging the center of gravity of the sorting member at a position biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. Since the distribution member is prevented from rotating when an external force is applied to the member, the force necessary to rotate the distribution member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the sorting member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, the sorting member can be prevented from being rotated by the action of the external force.

  Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the sorting member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include, for example, a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the restraining means makes the sorting member rotate when an external force is applied to the arrangement member by changing the rotational resistance of the sorting member depending on the rotation direction. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the suppression means distributes when an external force is applied to the arrangement member by changing the rotation resistance of the distribution member depending on the rotation direction. Since the member is prevented from rotating, the force required to rotate the sorting member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the sorting member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, the sorting member can be prevented from being rotated by the action of the external force.

  As a means for varying the rotational resistance of the distribution member depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, and rotation to one side does not transmit rotation of the distribution member, and rotation of the distribution member is the other rotation. A configuration in which the rotational resistance increases as much as the other gears are transmitted and the other gears are rotated is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the restraining means has a shaft hole that supports the rotation shaft of the sorting member as a long hole shape, so that when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, the sorting member A gaming machine Q8 that suppresses rotation of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the restraining means has a long hole shape for the shaft hole that supports the rotating shaft of the sorting member, so that an external force acts on the arrangement member. Since it is suppressed that a distribution member rotates when it is performed, it can suppress that a distribution member rotates by the effect | action of an external force. In other words, by setting the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape and the direction in which the external force is applied to a predetermined angle or less, the sorting member can be rotated when the sorting member receives a game ball. On the other hand, when an external force (inertial force) is applied to the sorting member, the rotating shaft of the sorting member can be slid along the longitudinal direction of the shaft hole to consume the applied energy. As a result, it is possible to suppress the sorting member from being rotated by the action of an external force.

  Note that the direction in which the external force acts is a direction (a direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction) orthogonal to the front (glass plate) of the gaming machine, assuming that the player strikes the front of the gaming machine. . In this case, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the long hole shape and the vertical direction (the direction in which the game ball falls toward the sorting member) is preferably set to approximately 45 degrees or more, and approximately 60 degrees or less. More preferably, an angle that is substantially orthogonal is most preferable. When a game ball is received, the weight of the game ball can surely facilitate the rotation of the sorting member. On the other hand, when an external force is applied, the rotation shaft of the sorting member is connected to the shaft hole (long hole). This is because it can easily be surely slid along the longitudinal direction.

  In the gaming machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one of the one side or the other side toward the other.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one side or the other side to the other, so that energy consumption is increased and the distribution member is moved to the initial position. Can be returned to. That is, by setting the direction of the distribution member (inclination direction of the shaft hole) according to the direction in which the external force is applied, when the external force (inertial force) is applied to the distribution member, the distribution member The axis of rotation of the shaft can be slid in the direction of the upward tilt of the shaft hole, and the consumption of the applied energy can be increased. It can be returned to the initial position.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning port for winning the game ball distributed to the one side and the gaming ball distributed to the other side win and the first winning port A second prize opening that gives a game value lower than a prize, and when the sorting member is rotated by an external force applied to the arrangement member, the game ball is distributed to the other side. A gaming machine Q10 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to one side and the game ball distributed to the other side win. And a second winning opening that gives a lower gaming value than the winning of the first winning opening, and when the sorting member is rotated by an external force applied to the arrangement member, the game ball is moved to the other side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an action of changing the posture of the sorting member (rotating the sorting member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting a gaming machine or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the game machine includes a first winning port for winning the game ball distributed to the one side, and a second winning port for winning the game ball distributed to the other side, The gaming machine Q11 is characterized in that a gaming value given for winning in the first winning opening is equal to a gaming value given for winning in the second winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to one side and the game ball distributed to the other side win. A second prize opening, and the gaming value given for winning the first prize opening is equivalent to the gaming value given for winning the second prize opening. It is possible to suppress an action of changing the posture of the sorting member (rotating the sorting member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting or the like.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 34930 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a game entrance into which a game ball is entered; and a distribution member that distributes the game ball that has entered the game entrance to one side or the other side, the rotation of the distribution member The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that, when viewed in the axial direction, the entrance is disposed at a position that is biased toward the one side or the other side from above in the vertical direction of the sorting member.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a entrance into which a game ball is entered, and a distribution member that distributes the game ball entered into the entrance to one side or the other side (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017). -148189). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball entrance is arranged above the sorting member in the vertical direction when the sorting member is viewed in the rotation axis direction. There was a problem that the mode until reaching the member became monotonous and the interest of the game was insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, when the distribution member is viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the entrance is disposed at a position that is biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to one side or the other side. It is possible to change the manner in which the played game ball reaches the sorting member. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, until the game ball that has entered the entrance is distributed to the other side by the distribution member after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the one side. The game ball that has entered the entrance after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the other side is moved to the one side by the distribution member. A gaming machine R2 that is different in configuration from acting on the game ball before being distributed.

  Here, when the ball entrance is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the sorting member to one side or the other side in the direction of the rotation axis of the sorting member, the sorting member is formed in a symmetrical shape. However, depending on the posture of the sorting member (whether it is in the state after the game balls are distributed to one side or the state after the game balls are distributed to the other side) The game balls distributed by the split members have different behaviors, which may cause problems.

  For example, when the ball entrance is arranged at a position that is biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the sorting member to one side in the direction of the rotation axis of the sorting member, the game ball heading from the entrance to the sorting member is Because it has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, for the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side, the game ball (in the absence of distribution) in the direction to rotate the distribution member Game balls that also have a velocity component in the direction of rotating the ball), while for the sorting members in the state after the game balls are distributed to the other side, the direction opposite to the direction of rotating the sorting members Game balls (game balls having a velocity component in a direction opposite to the direction in which the absence of distribution is rotated) collide with each other. Therefore, depending on the attitude of the distribution member, the behavior of the game balls that are entered from the entrance and distributed by the distribution member are different.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R1, the gaming ball that has entered the entrance after the sorting member has sorted the gaming balls to one side is separated by the sorting member. The structure that acts on the game ball until it is distributed to the other side, and the game ball that has entered the entrance after the distribution member distributes the game ball to the other side is moved to one side by the distribution member Since it differs from the structure which acts on a game ball until it distributes, according to the attitude | position of a distribution member, it can respond to the behavior of the game ball which is entered from the entrance and distributed by the distribution member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

  The gaming machine R2 includes a guide passage that guides the gaming ball that has entered the entrance to the sorting member, and when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of the sorting member, A gaming machine, wherein the entrance is disposed at a position biased toward one side, and the distribution member is disposed at a position biased toward the other side from a vertically lower side of an outlet of the guide passage. R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the gaming machine R3 includes a guide passage that guides the gaming ball that has entered the entrance to the sorting member. The entrance is located at a position that is biased from the upper side of the vertical direction to the one side, and the distribution member is placed at a position that is biased from the lower side of the guide passage to the other side in the vertical direction. With respect to the sorting member in the state after being distributed to the side, the position at which the game ball that enters the entrance and flows out from the exit of the guide passage collides can be brought closer to the rotation center of the sorting member. Thereby, the rotation moment applied to the sorting member by the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and the breakage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the tilt angle with respect to the vertical direction of the sorting member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the one side is the distribution in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that it is larger than the inclination angle of the member with respect to the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R2 or R3, after the game ball is distributed to one side, the inclination angle of the sorting member with respect to the vertical direction after the game ball is distributed to the other side Since the tilting angle of the distribution member in the vertical direction is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction, the game ball that has entered the entrance and has flowed out from the exit of the guide passage is in a state after the game ball has been distributed to the other side. When colliding with the sorting member, the component in the direction passing through the rotating shaft of the force received by the sorting member can be increased. Thereby, this can reduce the rotational moment applied to the sorting member due to the collision of the game balls, thereby suppressing breakage.

  In the gaming machine R3 or R4, the distribution member is characterized in that a rotational resistance in an operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is larger than a rotational resistance in an operation of distributing the game ball to the one side. A gaming machine R5.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R3 or R4, the distribution member has a rotational resistance in the operation of distributing the game balls to the other side larger than the rotational resistance in the operation of distributing the gaming machine to the one side. As a result, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed, and the sorting operation can be performed reliably.

  In other words, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When the ball is received, the sorting member is rotated to the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the sorting member comes into contact with the sorting member after the game ball is sorted to the other side). To the surface that regulates the displacement to the surface). As a result, the sorting member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R5, since the rotation resistance of the sorting member in the operation of distributing the game balls to the other side is increased, the rotation resistance decelerates the rotation of the sorting member to the other side, It is possible to moderate the impact when the distribution member that distributes the game balls to the other side collides with the stopper surface. As a result, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, for the sorting member in a state after the game balls are distributed to the other side, the speed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the sorting member is rotated to one side (the direction from one side to the other side). Since game balls having components are collided, if the rotation resistance when rotating the sorting member to one side is increased, the sorting member that received the game ball cannot rotate with the game ball, and the game ball Is easy to bounce off the sorting member. When the game ball bounces off the sorting member, the sorting member moves to one side while the game ball is separated (bounced back) from the sorting member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has been rotated and separated (bounced back) falls, the game ball may be distributed to the other side opposite to the direction in which the game ball is originally allocated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R5, the distribution member has a lower rotational resistance in the operation of distributing the gaming machine to one side than the rotational resistance in the operation of distributing the gaming ball to the other side. When it is received, the sorting member can be easily rotated together with the game ball toward one side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the received game ball from bouncing off from the sorting member, and to reliably distribute the game ball to one side.

  In the gaming machine R5, rotation of the sorting member in a direction in which a plurality of gears forming one gear or a gear train and the gears and the sorting member are arranged to sort the game balls to the other side is performed. A gaming machine R6, comprising: a one-way clutch that transmits to the gear and that does not transmit the rotation of the sorting member in the direction in which the game ball is distributed to the one side to the gear.

  According to the gaming machine R6, the rotation of the sorting member in the direction of distributing the game balls to the other side is transmitted to the gear, which is interposed between the gears and the sorting member, and a plurality of gears forming one gear or a gear train. And the one-way clutch that does not transmit the game ball to the one side in the direction in which the game ball is distributed to one side, and therefore when the distribution member is rotated in the direction to distribute the game ball to the other side. The rotation of the sorting member is transmitted to the gear through the one-way clutch, and the gear is driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the sorting member is increased by the amount of the driven gear. On the other hand, when the sorting member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game balls to one side, the rotation of the sorting member is interrupted by the one-way clutch and is not transmitted to the gear. That is, the gear is not driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the sorting member is reduced by the amount that the gear is not driven.

  Thus, since it is the structure which switches transmission and non-transmission of the rotation to a gear with a one-way clutch, in addition to the effect which game machine R5 has, the difference of the rotation resistance with respect to a rotation direction can be formed reliably. Moreover, since it can be set as a comparatively simple structure whether the gear is driven, the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability and durability can be improved.

  In particular, since the inertial force of the gear when starting the follower of the gear in the stopped state can be used as the rotational resistance of the sorting member, the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the sorting member is reduced. In the present invention, which can be easily secured and the amount of displacement in the sorting member sorting operation is relatively small, the present invention is effective as a configuration that suppresses breakage due to collision of the sorting member with the stopper surface.

  The one-way clutch may be of any type as long as it allows transmission of rotation in one direction and blocks (regulates) transmission of rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch system include a sprag type and a cam type. Also, when the rotating shaft of the sorting member is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch, a gear is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch, and the rotating shaft of the sorting member is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch. The gear is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch.

  In the gaming machine R5 or R6, the sorting member is formed in a symmetrical shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetry plane.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R5 or R6, since the sorting member is formed in a symmetrical shape with a virtual plane including the rotation axis as a symmetry plane, the shape of the sorting member is simplified. Manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R5 or R6, the gaming machine R8 is characterized in that a center of gravity of the sorting member is arranged at a position biased to the one side with respect to a rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine R8, since the center of gravity of the sorting member is arranged at a position that is biased to one side with respect to the rotation axis, when the sorting member is rotated in a direction to distribute the game balls to the other side, Since the center of gravity is raised, the rotation resistance of the sorting member is increased accordingly. On the other hand, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction in which the game balls are distributed to one side, the center of gravity is lowered, so that the rotational resistance of the distribution member is reduced accordingly.

  As described above, since the position of the center of gravity is set to a predetermined position, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R5 or R6, the simplification can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can be improved.

  Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the sorting member to one side with respect to the rotation axis include, for example, a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

  In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R8, the distribution member has a receiving surface that receives at least the game ball distributed to the other side formed as a curved surface that protrudes toward the rotation axis. Machine R9.

  According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is a curved surface in which the receiving surface that receives the game ball distributed to at least the other side is convex toward the rotation axis. Since it is formed, breakage of the sorting member can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When the ball is received, the sorting member is rotated to the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the sorting member comes into contact with the sorting member after the game ball is sorted to the other side). To the surface that regulates the displacement to the surface). As a result, the sorting member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R9, since the distribution member is formed as a curved surface in which the receiving surface that receives the game ball is convex toward the rotation axis, the received game ball is moved along the curved surface. Can be slid or rolled. Therefore, it is possible to moderate the impact when the distributing member that has distributed the game balls to the other side collides with the stopper surface by the amount of sliding or rolling. As a result, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is characterized in that the receiving surface that receives the game balls distributed to the other side has a smaller inclination than the receiving surface of the game balls distributed to the one side. A gaming machine R10.

  According to the gaming machine R10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is inclined such that the receiving surface that receives the game ball that is distributed to the other side is inclined more than the receiving surface of the game ball that is distributed to one side Therefore, the sorting member can be prevented from being damaged and the sorting operation can be performed reliably.

  That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball is in a state after the game ball is distributed to the one side ( That is, when it is received by the receiving surface that receives the game ball that is distributed to the other side, the sorting member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (after the game ball is distributed to the other side) A surface that abuts the distribution member and restricts the displacement of the distribution member to the other side is collided at high speed. As a result, the sorting member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R10, since the distribution member has a small inclination angle of the receiving surface that receives the game balls distributed to the other side, the thickness of the portion that collides with the stopper surface due to the small inclination. Can be increased. As a result, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, for the sorting member in a state after the game balls are distributed to the other side, the speed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the sorting member is rotated to one side (the direction from one side to the other side). Since game balls having components collide, if the inclination of the receiving surface of the game balls distributed to one side is small, the game balls are likely to rebound from the distribution member. When the game ball bounces off the sorting member, the sorting member moves to one side while the game ball is separated (bounced back) from the sorting member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has been rotated and separated (bounced back) falls, the game ball may be distributed to the other side opposite to the direction in which the game ball is originally allocated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R10, the distribution member has a larger inclination angle of the receiving surface that receives the game balls distributed to one side. More speed components in the direction toward the sorting direction can be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the received game ball from bouncing off from the sorting member, and to easily rotate the sorting member that has received the game ball together with the game ball toward one side. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably distributed to one side.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 19930 as an example>
It operates with the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the game ball is distributed to the other side In addition, in the gaming machine having a sorting unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, the sorting member is rotatably supported, and the rotation shaft is disposed along the width direction of the game board. A gaming machine S1 that is characterized by being played.

  There is a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side There is known a gaming machine including a sorting unit having a second passage that passes therethrough (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the passage is arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and the other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that space was reduced.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the distribution member is pivotally supported so that the rotation axis is disposed along the width direction of the game board, so that the distribution direction of the game balls by the distribution member is changed to the game board. It can be a crossing direction (front-rear direction). Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be downsized in the width direction, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine S1 includes first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage includes expansion means for expanding a displaceable region of the game ball, and the expansion means is the A gaming machine S2 which is disposed between a distribution member and the first detection means.

  Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to be violated due to an impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, chattering may occur when the first detection unit is brought close to the sorting member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, the first passage is provided with an enlarging means for enlarging the displaceable area of the game ball, and the enlarging means is the first detection member. When the game ball is ramped due to an impact during the sorting operation by the sorting member, the game ball rampage can be absorbed by the expanding means. As a result, the occurrence of chattering can be suppressed while allowing the first detection means to be brought closer to the sorting member.

  In addition, as an expansion means, what enlarges the cross-sectional area of the channel | path in the 1st upstream channel | path of a 1st channel | path is illustrated.

  The gaming machine S2 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S2, the first branch passage is branched from the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage. If the game ball is small, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering by suppressing the rampage of the game ball by the expansion means (inner space of the first branch passage), while the occurrence of chattering is relatively large, that is, the occurrence of chattering. In the case of a large rampage that cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be caused to flow out through the first branch passage.

  In addition, since the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member are detected by the first detection means through the first passage, and the first It is not possible to reach the detection means, and it is possible to form a form that flows out to the first passage. Thereby, it is possible to have a game property that allows the player to expect the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, as a guidance destination of the game ball | bowl by a 1st branch path, an out mouth, a winning opening, a game area | region, etc. are illustrated, for example.

  In the gaming machine S3, the first passage is formed of a light transmissive material, and the first branch passage is branched from a side of the first passage.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3, the first passage is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage. The game ball passing through can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. That is, the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member and passing through the first upstream passage are made visible so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to have a game property that makes a player expect this. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Moreover, the area of the display surface for displaying the information regarding a game can be ensured on the upper surface of the 1st passage or the 1st branch passage because the 1st branch passage is branched from the side of the 1st passage. As information regarding a game, the information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the 1st branch passage is illustrated, for example. As a guide destination, an out mouth is illustrated, for example.

  Note that only a part of the first passage may be formed from a light transmissive material, and the first branch passage may be formed from a light transmissive material.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine X1, wherein in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine X2, wherein in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, In any of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. This is a gaming machine X3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 60, 19060 base board (game board)
60a, 19060a Through hole (opening)
60c Light transmission hole (recessed part)
64 First prize opening (first passage, entrance)
140 Second winning entrance (entrance entrance, first entrance entrance, second passage)
65a Special winning entrance (second entrance)
162 Transmission shaft rod (support means)
163 Driven member (displacement means)
175 Lower regulation part (second resistance means)
176 Upper restriction part (resistance means, first resistance means)
310 Rear case 405 Metal rail (guide means)
410, 3410 Transmission unit (transmission means)
411 Drive gear (transmission means)
412 Transmission gear (transmission means)
413 Terminal gear (transmission means)
414 Arm member (transmission means)
425 Accommodation plate (support means)
425b Omitted part (open part)
427 Through hole (suppressing means)
428 Blocking plate (support means, suppression means)
430 Lift plate (basic means, intermediate means)
433 cylindrical part (suppression means)
441 Rotating gear (displacement constituting means)
442 Relative displacement member (intermediate means, tip side means)
444 Auxiliary arm member (base means, rotational displacement means)
444a Base end side part (part, rotating shaft part)
444b Arc-shaped gear part (overhang part)
444d Tubular part (other part, rotating shaft part)
460 Wings (tip side means, displacement means, first displacement means, second displacement means, arrangement displacement means)
464L forming portion (first displacement means, first arrangement displacement means)
464R forming part (second displacement means, second arrangement displacement means)
490 Fixed transmission plate (displacement component means)
708 Partition member (support plate)
712 Thin film cover member (thin film member)
714 Light guide member (guide means)
730 Plate-like displacement member (displacement means, first displacement means)
735 Small receiving part (first support part, second support part)
736 Large receiving part (first support part, second support part)
740 Hollow member (second displacement means)
743 Projecting columnar part (second displacement means)
750 Variable decorative member (second displacement means)
761,4761 Load member (displacement means, load application means, transmission means)
761c Longitudinal stick-like extension part (pushing part)
761d Overhang part (attachment part, range setting means)
762 Shaft bar (support means)
764 Lower restriction part (second resistance means)
765 Upper side restricting part (resistance means, first resistance means, range setting means)
777 Illuminated board (light emitting board)
DH1 Electric wiring (electric supply means)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
S1 Contact surface (split surface)
SOL1 Electromagnetic solenoid (drive means)
SOL2 electromagnetic solenoid (drive means, load application means, range setting means)
SP21 Biasing spring (load applying means)
3441 Rotating gear with arm (displacement component)
930, 19930, 20930, 21930, 22930, 23930, 24930, 25930, 26930, 27930, 28930, 29930, 30930, 31930, 32930, 33930, 34930, 35930, 36930, 37930, 38930, 39930, 40930, 41930 units (Arrangement member)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
941g, 19941g First receiving part (entrance)
942c Second pitching section (first passage member)
943, 19943 Front base (main body member, entrance)
943a Rolling part (first passage, first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening and closing member)
945b Protrusion (projecting part)
951 Plate member (second opening and closing member, opening and closing member)
953a1 opening (entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Torus (seat)
954b Concave part (guide groove)
954c Projecting part (second guide means)
954c2 Side edge portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Concave portion (passage member)
957a1 body 957a2 shaft (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall (covered surface)
962g Projecting part (first engaging part)
140 Second winning entrance (entrance entrance, second entrance entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (first part)
965b Rotating part (first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recessed portion (receiving portion)
966b2 One-side contacted part 966b3 Other-side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade part (cutting member)
6683 blade (cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (standing part)
985e1, 985f1 inflow passage (second connection passage)
988b Magnetic body (adjustment means, suppression means)
988c Magnetic material (adjustment means, suppression means)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 recessed part (receiving part)
19941h Intermediate entrance (second passage)
19980, 20980, 21980, 22980, 23980, 24980, 25980, 26980, 27980, 28980, 29980, 30980, 31980, 32980, 33980, 34980, 35980, 36980, 37980, 38980, 39980, 40980, 41980 a sorting unit 1998 , 31986a Side plate (guide passage)
19982c, 39882c Game ball guide wall (guide passage)
19982d Projection (guide passage)
19983, 24983, 25983, 29983, 30983, 31983, 32983, 33983, 37983, 38983 Protruding member (adjusting means, protruding member)
24983a1 protrusion (adjustment means, suppression means)
26983a2 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
26982a4 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
27982b2 Back side contact portion (adjustment means)
28982b2 Back side contact portion (suppressing means)
30983f Rubber sheet (adjusting means, one side receiving surface, other side receiving surface)
32983 g Center of gravity adjustment part 32983 g (suppression means)
33983b1 Projection surface (adjustment means)
33983b2 Concave surface (adjustment means)
34982c, 34985j Bearing part (suppression means, shaft hole)
37983h Curved surface (receiving surface)
38983a3, 38983a4 Action part (receiving surface)
TR0 pitching passage (second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1, TR201 first passage (second passage, second branch passage, first passage)
TR2, TR202 Second passage (second passage, second branch passage)
TR3 passage (second passage, adjusting means, drop area)
TR4, TR214, TR224, TR234 passage (first passage, first upstream passage)
TR5 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR6 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR7 passage (first branch passage)
TR8 passage (first passage, first branch passage, first downstream passage)
TR9 passage (second passage)
TR10 passage (second passage)
TR11 passage (first branch passage)
TR12 passage (first passage, first downstream passage, first branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detection device (detection sensor)
SE5 detection device (first detection means, second detection means)
SE6 detection device (second detection means, first detection means)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Color (support ring)
θ1 First drive range (outer range)
θ2 Second drive range (center range)
U1 opening (first branch passage)
U2 opening (enlarging means, first branch passage)
U3 opening (first passage, first downstream passage, first branch passage)
U4 opening (enlargement means, first branch passage)
U5 opening (first passage, first upstream passage, first downstream passage)
U6 opening (first passage, first upstream passage, first winning port, second winning port)
U7 opening (second passage, second prize opening, first prize opening)
U8 opening (entrance)
U9 opening (second passage)
GY3 3rd gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gears)
GY4 4th gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gears)
GY5 5th gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gears)
WG one-way gear (adjustment means, suppression means, one-way clutch)

Claims (3)

It operates with the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the game ball is distributed to the other side A gaming machine comprising a sorting unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the distributing member is rotatably supported and the rotating shaft is arranged along the width direction of the game board. Comprising first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage;
2. The first passage is provided with an enlarging means for enlarging a displaceable area of the game ball, and the enlarging means is disposed between the distribution member and the first detecting means. The gaming machine described.   3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a first branch passage branched from the first passage, wherein the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

Images